还剩105页未读,
继续阅读
英语语法专项训练汇总
展开
名 词
一.名词分类。名词指的是表示人和事物名称的词,分为专有名词和普通名词。
专有名词:包括人名、地名、时间名、报刊名、单位团地名等专有的名称,第一个字 母大写,例如Lily,China,Sunday,The Times,Class One等。
普通名词:是一类人或东西或是一个抽象概念的名词,如:book,sadness等。普通名词又可分为下面四类:
1)个体名词(Individual Nouns):表示某类人或东西中的个体,如:gun dog 。
2)集体名词(Collective Nouns):表示若干个个体组成的集合体,如:family, police。
3)物质名词(Material Nouns):表示无法分为个体的实物,如:air, water 。
4)抽象名词(Abstract Nouns):表示动作、状态、品质、感情等抽象概念,如:work , health 。
个体名词和集体名词可以用数目来计算,称为可数名词(Countable Nouns),
物质名词和抽象名词一般无法用数目计算,称为不可数名词(Uncountable Nouns)。
二.可数名词(Countable Nouns)
1. 可数名词复数的规则变化:
1)一般情况下在词尾加 s. 在清辅音后读/ z/ 在浊辅音和元音后读/iz/ maps bags如map-maps
2)以字母s,x,ch,sh等结尾的名词加es,读/iz/如bus-buses,watch-watches
注意:stomach的复数是stomachs
3)以辅音字母+y结尾的名词,先变 y为i,再加es. /iz/例词:country-countries
以元音字母加y结尾的名词构成复数时,直接加s,
Boy- boys, toy-toys day- days, key- keys
4)一些以f, fe结尾的名词构成复数时,把f, fe变成v, 再加es,/ z/如:
Half- halves, leaf- leaves, knife- knives, thief- thieves,self-selves, life- lives, wife- wives, shelf- shelves, loaf- loaves, wolf- wolves
口诀: “树叶落到架上半边黄,妻子围上围巾拿刀去砍狼,吓得小偷自己逃命忙”
5)以o结尾的名词构成复数时,通常在词尾加s,但有一些加es
Hero- heroes, potato- potatoes, tomato- tomatoes, negro- negroes,
巧记:黑人英雄爱吃西红柿和土豆。
2.不规则变化:
(1)单复数形式不同: man-men woman- women
child-children foot-feet tooth-teeth mouse-mice goose-geese
(2)单复数形式相同
Deer, sheep, fish, works,(工厂) means( 方式、途径), Chinese, Japanese, Swiss, bellows( 风箱), series, crossroad, horsepower及由汉语拼音拼出的计量单位,如: yuan, li, jin,但英语中原有的计量单位不在此列,如:dollar- dollars, pound- pounds, metre-metres
(3)关于某国人变复数:中日不变,英法变,其余S加后面
Chinese-Chinese Japanese-Japanese Frenchman-Frenchmen Englishwoman-Englishwomen American-Americans Australian- Australians
Canadian- Canadians German-Germans
除上述情况外,关于名词数的问题还应注意以下几个方面
1)有些名词只有复数形式,一般不直接受数词或a(an)修饰,如果要表示数量用相应的起量词作用的名词。Clothes, glasses, trousers, compasses, scissors pants,shorts等
A pair of glasses, two suits of clothes
注意:此时谓语动词和前面的量词保持一致。如
A pair of glasses is on the table Two pairs of glasses are on the table
2)有些名词只有复数,没有单数 Police, people, cattle 作主语是谓语动词用复数
3)有些集合名词即可做单数,指整体;又可作复数,指该集体的成员,指整体时,谓语用单数;指成员时,谓语用复数。常用的名词有:Family, class, group, team, party, public等。
比较下列句子
The team is made up of 12 members The team are having a bath now
My family is going to move to Paris My family usually watch TV after supper
4)合成名词的复数形式,通常将其中所包含的中心词变为复数,如
passer-by—— passers-by, grown-up--- growns-up,
father –in –law ----fathers -in –law, boy student----boy students
5)以s 结尾的专用名词,如: the New York Times, the United Nations, the United States等,表示事物的整体,谓语用单数,但有些表示群岛,山脉的专有名词,谓语常用复数。如:
The United States is a highly developed country
The Alps are in Europe
6)字母、数字、引语或缩略(词)语的复数形式是在其后加‘s或s, 如
There are two f‘s in the word ”office” Many VIPs are coming to our city
7)名词作定语,通常用单数形式,即使在意义上是复数的(如shoes)或总用作复数的名词(如trousers)也是如此如:
There are twenty boy students in our class They are his girl friends Trouser pockets
注意:但当 man, woman作定语时,如果被修饰的名词是复数,man和woman也要变成复数。如:A woman doctor, two women doctors; a man teacher, two men teachers
8)当sports, customs, arms, clothes, sales 和accounts做定语时,不能变成单数修饰名词,如
A sports car一辆赛车 a customs officer一个海关官员 arms production武器的生产,
a clothes shop一家服装店 a salesgirl一个女售货员 an accounts department一个会计部门
二.不可数名词(Uncountable Nouns)
(1)概述:不可数名词所表示的事物一般不能用数目来计算没有词形变化,不能直接用a,an或数词修饰,词尾不能加s ,作主语时,谓语动词用单数。 news information rice
(2)不可数名词量的表达
A可用Some, much, little, a little, a lot of, lots of a bit of, a large amount of ,a great deal of , a large sum of .等修饰。
B 数词或冠词+量词+of + 不可数名词 量词可以是单数,也可以是复数,但of 后的不可数名词只能是原形。A piece of paper some pieces of information
说明:可数名词表达量时也可以用此种表达,但要注意可数名词的数。
注意:
1. 有些不可数名词是以s结尾,不要误以为是可数名词,如
News, maths, physics, politics等,它们如作主语,谓语用单数
2. 在有些情况下,名词作定语,和of作定语,含义不同,如
A cup of coffee一杯咖啡, a coffee cup 咖啡杯
三. 可数名词和不可数名词的主要区别:
1)可数名词可以被a/an修饰,且有复数形式,而不可数名词不可以被a/an修饰,且没有复数形式
2)有些限定词只能修饰可数名词,某些则只能修饰不可数名词,而某些则既能修饰可数名词又能修饰不可数名词
只能修饰可数名词的有:few, many= a number of, a great/good many, a great many of, dozens of
只能修饰不可数名词的有:much, little, a little, a lot of, lots of a bit of, a large amount of ,a great deal of , a large sum of .等修饰。
即可修饰可数名词又可修饰不可数名词的有:some, any, plenty of, a lot of, a large quantity of
只能修饰可数名词单数的有: many a, more than one
有些不可数名词有相应的名词表其个体:
Bread- a loaf, work- a job, clothing- a garment, poetry- a poem,
traffic- a vehicle, jewellery- a jewel
有些不可数名词加s,含义发生变化。如:
Time时间- times时代; paper纸-papers文件,报纸,论文,卷纸;
manner方式- manners礼貌, water水- waters水域
有些词既是可数名词又不可数名词但意思不一样
room 房间,空间 work著作,作品 , 工作, wood小树林,木材,木头
四.名词所有格。现代英语名词有两个格,通格和所有格。当名词在句中做主语,宾语或补语时,名词无词性变化,称之为通格,当一个名词去修饰句中另一个名词时,有时用通格,有时用‘s属格,或of 属格
A.通常在名词词尾加’s , 以s 结尾的名词在s后加’ .Tom’s pen Teachers’ Day
B.表示两者或两者以上共同拥有,在最后一个名词后加’s ,若表示分别拥有则名词后分别加’s.
Lily and Lucy’s mother is a nurse . Tom’s and Jim’s books are missing .
C. 表示店铺,医院,诊所,住宅的名称时,常在名词后加’s 代表全称。At the doctor’s .
D. 不定代词someone ,anyone 等和else 连用’s 应加在else 后,someone else’s
G. 表示时间、距离、国家、城市等无生命东西的名词也可以在词尾加’s 或’ 构成所有格。
today’s newspaper three hours’ walk thirty tons’ weight China’s capital
E. of 所有格用来表示无生命的东西 a map of China desks and chairs of our school
F. 构成A /two/this/that/these/those+名词+of+所有格/名词性物主代词。如:
That invention of his will greatly benefit the whole world
I don’t like that daughter of yours. He is a friend of my father’s.
He’s a friend of my brother’s . Is she a daughter of yours ?
H. 用to 也可以表示所有格。“钥匙 答案 桥和路, 出入口所有歌格用to”
The key to the car the answer to the question the bridge to knowledge
The way to the school the exit to the building the enterance to the theater
I.‘s属格与of属格的通用和区别
1)一般来说,‘s属格多用于有生命的名词,而of属格则主要用于无生命的名词(但在现代英语中,这一界限已被打破,如:Newton’s laws, 也可以说成 the laws of Newton; the rules of the game, 也可以说成the game’s rules)
注:a) 有生命的名词也可用of所有格形式,如:a photo of the baby
b) 但当’s属格表示“类别”属性,不可用Of属格,如:
A doctor’s degree博士学位,a teacher’s book教师用书
2) 如果‘s属格表示的是具体名词“个别”的属性,可用of属格,如:
The doctor’s arrival= the arrival of the doctor
注:a doctor’s degree, a teacher’s book表示的是“泛指类别”,没有具体指哪个人,而the doctor ‘s arrival表示的是“具体的特征”,译成“那位医生的到来”,可以换成 the arrival of the doctor
3) 名词通格作定语和‘s属格作定语的差别。
名词通格作定语表示泛指的类别,‘s属格作定语表示具体的特指。如:
Car engines are made in this factory(轿车发动机,不是其他类别的发动机)
That car’s engine needs repairing(那台轿车的发动机,具体特指)
They are having afternoon tea(他们在喝午茶)
Yesterday’s afternoon tea has gone bad(昨天的午茶坏了)
表示时间、距离、国家、城市等无生命的东西的名词,也可以在词尾加‘s或’构成所有格如:
用于时间 an hour’s ride 用于度量 thirteen tons’ weight
用于价值 a hundred yuan’s order 用于天体 the earth’s satellite
用于国家 Belgium’s capital 用于城市 Changchun’s agriculture
注:当today, yesterday, tomorrow分别表示“现在,过去,将来”时,只能用of属格,如:
地点加‘s作定语,表示的关系是“所属”和范围,相应形容词作定语,说明的是属性和性质。如:
China’s resources(资源世界各国都有,China’s resources指在中国范围内,属于中国的资源)
China’s agriculture, China’s industry, Beijing’s streets
Chinese history(世界各国都有本国的历史, China’s resources是阐述中国的历史,说明历史的属性)
China’s food, Chinese food
J.双重所属格
双重所有格与所有格的区别
He is my father’s friend. 他是我父亲的朋友(说明一件事实)
He is a friend of my father’s. 他是我父亲的一个朋友(强调数量,相当于He is one of my father’s friends)
His invention will greatly benefit the whole world(说明事实)
That invention of his will greatly benefit the whole world。(带有赞扬的感情色彩)
注:有些名词,在of后面有所属格和普通格,含义不同。常用的这类名词有opinion(意见)/portrait/ picture/ photo/ criticism(批评)。比较:
An opinion of the teacher对教师的意见 An opinion of the teacher’s教师的意见
A portrait of my father,我父亲的肖像 A portrait of my father’s我父亲收藏的肖像
A photo of him一张他的照片 A photo of his 他所拥有的一张照片
A criticism of the headmaster对校长的批评 A criticism of the headmaster’s校长的批评
名词在句中的作用
五.名词在句中的作用
1) 作主语: Knowledge is power Where there is a will, there is a way.
2) 作表语: Smoking is my only weakness.
The affair remained a complete mystery.
3) 作宾语(谓语或非谓语动词的宾语): Did you get my fax?
They affair remained a complete mystery.
4) 作定语 We bought a new color TV.
Would you like to go to the flower show tomorrow?
5) 作同位语 This is our department head, Dr.Owen. You girls sit on this side.
6) 作呼语 Come in, Mrs. Patterson. Morning, Helen.
7) 作状语: Wait a minute, I’ll call her. We’ll meet Monday.
8) 作介词宾语 She majored in physics at Yale. He was devoted to pure science.
9) 构成复合宾语(语):
They elected James(to be ) chairman. He painted the door a brighter color.
动 词
一、 动词就是表示动作和状态的词。动词动词有时态语态语气三种形式的变化。
(一) 动词按其能否独立作谓语分为谓语动词和非谓语动词两种。
(二) 动词的五种基本形式:动词原形、动词的第三人称单数、过去式、过去分词、现在分词。
(三) 动词按其不同的特征可分为:实义动词、连系动词、情态动词、助动词。
实意动词又可分及物动词和不及物动词。还可分持续性动词和瞬间动词。
联系动词分两种:一种表特征和状态。另一种表状态变化过程。
类 别
特 点
意 义
举 例
实意动词
Vt,vi
及物动词接宾语
须跟宾语一起才能表达完整的意思
we clean our classroom every day
不及物动词不能直接接宾语
能独立做谓语
She always comes late .
连系动词
Link-v
跟宾语
不能独立做谓语,跟表语构成完整的意思
I a student .
情态动词
Mod-v
跟动词原形(有相应的词汇意思)
不能独立做谓语,表示说话人的
语气、情态、无人称和数的变化
we can do it by ourselves. That would be better .,
助动词
Aux-v
跟动词原形或分词(无实义)
不能独立做谓语,跟主要动词构成谓语,表示疑问、否定及各种时态
He doesn’t speak Chinese .
1. 按词义和在句中的作用,动词可分为四类。见下表:
(1) 实义动词
实义动词表示行为、动作或状态的词,能独立做谓语。按其句法功能分为及物动词和不及物动词。
A.及物动词
及物动词的后面要跟上名词或代词等做它的宾语,可以分三类:
a. 及物动词+宾语 in fact ,my sister doesn’t like the pet dog .
b. 及物动词+间接宾语(sb)+直接宾语(sth) Could you bring me some water ?
c. 及物动词+宾语+宾语补足语 His jokes made us happy .
B 不及物动词
不及物动词后面一定不能直接跟宾语,可以跟介词构成一个动词短语,然后跟介词的宾语。
I lived in the country with my parents two years ago .
C. 许多动词可用做及物动词,又可用作不及物动词。
Who is going to speak at the meeting ? Few people outside China speak Chinese .
(2连系动词
联系动词本身有词义但不完整,不能独立作谓语,必须跟表语一起构成谓语,说明主语的状态、特征、性质或身份。连系动词可分为三类
A be 动词
Be 动词是一个多功能的动词,在初级英语中可见四种用法。
功能一 系动词be
Be 为联系动词,中心词义是:是,句型为 主+系+表 结构。Be 的形式常为am,is are ,was ,were will/can/may/must be ,has /have /had been 等。
Beijing is the capital of china . It will be sunny tomorrow .
功能二 助动词be
助动词be 无词义,辅助主要动词一起在句中做谓语,用法如下;
a .be+doing 构成进行时态,
the girls are reading and copying the new words now .
young Tom was always asking strange questions and trying out new ideas .
b. be +done 构成被动语态 tea is grown in my hometown .
c. be +going to do 表示打算将要做某事
We are going to plan trees in the park . I didn’t know if she was going to come here .
d. be +to do 表示按计划安排将要做某事 the new shop is not to be opened till next Monday
功能三 实义be
可以将be 视为实义动词,因为它具有实际的词义, 成为,做,发生,举行,逗留,到达等义。
His daughter wants to be a doctor for animals in her twenties .
Kate’s birthday party will be at half past six this evening .
功能四 there be
表示某地某时存在某人某物 There be +某人/某物+某地/某时
① There be结构的主语
a, There be结构的there 是引导词,无实义,其主语是be 后的名词或名词短语。且名词或名词短语通常用不确定的限定词,如a ,no , all 等修饰。也不用确定的限定词the ,this ,that ,these ,those 等修饰。
b. There be结构的主语不能是人称代词,专有名词及被物主代词或名次所有格修饰的名词。
误:There is China in the east of the world . there are their books on the desk .
There are they under tree .
c.若要说明被限定的某人某物在某处时,常用某人某物+be +地点 Tom is in the room .
②There be结构的谓语
a, There be结构的谓语是be ,它在人称数上应和后面的主语即名词保持一致,即主语是不可数名词或可数名词单数时用is /was ,主语是复数时用are /were .主语是两个或两个以上的名词时,be的形式采取临近原则,即与离它最近的主语的数保持一致。
There is a picture on the wall . there is an orange and apples in the basket .
b, There be结构的谓语动词有时不用be 而用其它动词,如live , stand , lie, seem 等使语言表达更生动。
Long long ago , there lived a king .
③There be结构的常见时态。
一般现在时态。 There is /are +名词
一般过去时态 There was /were +名词
一般将来时态 There is going to /will be +名词
现在完成时态 There has /have been +名词
④ There be结构可与情态动词连用,表示推测。There must be no one in the room .
⑤There be结构的句型转换。
a , 若对主语提问,无论主语是单数还是复数都用what’s +地点?
There are some flowers in the garden . There is a book on the desk .
What’s in the garden ? What’s on the desk ?
b ,对修饰名词的数词或表示不确定数目的词提问,如果是可数名词用how many +名词复数+are there +其它?如果是不可数名词用how much +不可数名词+is there +其它?
There are some flowers in the garden .----- how many flowers are there in the garden ?
There is a little milk in the glass . ----how much milk is there in the milk ?
There is a cat in the room ---- How many cats are there in the room ?
⑥ 反义疑问句用be not there .
⑦ there be 与have/has 区别
a , There be 与has /have 都当有讲,但have表示所属关系,即持有,拥有,占有,而there be 表示客观存在,不说明所有关系。 He has a pen .
b . 当主语是物或时间名词时,而且表示整体与局部,两者可互换。
The building has 6 floors . there are 6 floors in the building .
A week has seven days . there are seven days in a week .
c,在一般时态是,there 不能与have 连用。
(2)助动词
这类词本身无词义,不能单独做谓语,必须与其他动词连用,帮助构成时态,语态,和疑问句等结构,常用的助动词有be , have , has , had , do ,does ,did ,will ,shall 等 。
A . 助动词(am ,is are was ,were )
a. 助动词+现在分词 构成进行时态 The students are playing basketball .
He was reading a book at six yesterday .
b. 助动词+过去分词 构成被动语态。 A library was built last year .
B. 助动词has/have /had +过去分词 构成完成时态。
They have learned more than two thousand English words so far .
C. 助动词do(does ,did )用于构成否定句,疑问句,倒装句,加强说话人的语气及代替前面刚出现的动词等。
Do you live in Nanjing ? I do finish the homework .
D. 助动词will 和shall 用于构成将来时态。 (shall 仅用于第一人称,will 可用于各种人称)
There will be more trees in one hundred years . I shall be forty next year .
(3连系动词
A表特征和状态的联系动词有 be是 appear看起来 seem似乎 look看上去 sound听起来 smell 闻上去taste 尝起来 feel感觉到, 摸起来 stay 处于某状态remain仍然 keep 保持
She looks tired .
B 表示状态变化过程的连系动词。Become ,get ,go, grow, turn等
指人的情绪或身体状态的变化或表示天气社会发展变化多用become ,get 而且可互换。
It’s becoming /getting colder and colder .
指人的身体精神或事物向不好的方面变化时多用go, 它后面的形容词常是表示消极意义的。
The meat has gone bad in such hot weather .
指颜色变化时常用turn 或 go . the leaves turn yellow in autumn .
Become 可接表示职业等带有冠词的单数或复数名词,turn 接无冠词的表示职业的单数名词或接表示一定时间年龄的数量词。 She became a lawyer .
He used to be a teacher till be turned writer .
(4)情态动词
情态动词常用来表示说话人的语气和态度如命令劝告建议禁止猜测等。它本身具有一定意义,但不能独立做谓语,只能和主要动词一起构成谓语动词,情态动词没有人称和数的变化。朗读时情态动词的肯定形式一般不重读,含情态动词的句子变疑问句将情态动词提前,否定句 在情态动词后加not, 常见的情态动词有can, could , may , might , must , shall , should , will , would , have to , need , dare 等。
A. can , could , be able to
a . can 表示能力。 I can speak a little French .
be able to 代替can , 也可以表示能力,但can只有一般现在时和一般过去时。而be able to 则有更多的时态形式。You will be able to talk with the foreign teacher in English next week .
b.表示允许,准许这时can may 可以互换。
Can /may I borrow your bike tomorrow ?
c. 表示客观可能性,用在否定句和疑问句中表示说话人的怀疑猜测或不肯定。可能,或不可能。
Can this news be true ? He can’t be there .
d. Could 是can的过去式,在口语中经常代替can, 表示非常委婉的请求,这是can 和could 没有时态上的差别,
could /can you tell me the way to the nearest hospital ?
e. 以can 开头的一般疑问句,其肯定或否定回答分别用can ,can’t .
B. may ,might
a. 表示准许和许可,这时可以与can 替换。 否定回答常用mustn’t , can’t ,表示不行,不可以。
May I open the please ? Yes ,please . / No , you mustn’t .
b. 表示说话人的猜测,认为某事可能发生,常用于肯定句中。
Where is john ? He may be in the library .
May be 是情态动词may 加be , 与maybe 完全不同。Maybe是副词,或许。
He may be at home . Maybe he is at home .
c. 用于否定句时may not 译为可能不, can not 译为不可能。
She may not know the answer . she can’t know the answer .
e. 用在祈使句中表示祝愿、希望等。May you be happy . 祝你快乐。
f. might 除表示may 的过去式外,在口语中经常代替may . 表示非常委婉的请求或实现的可。
g. 能性较小,这时might 与 may 没有时间上的差异。
Might /may I speak to you for a few minutes ?
C. must
a. 表示说话人的主观意识,译成必须应当,以must 开头的疑问句,肯定回答用must,否定回答用needn’t , 或don’t. have to .意为不需要,不必。
Must I clean all the rooms ? yes ,you must ./No, you needn’t .
b. 用于否定句,译成禁止,不许, 一定不要,表示禁止或告诫。
You mustn’t smoke here .
c. 表示对事物的推测用于肯定句中,可能性比may 更大,疑问句中一般用can ,表示可能, 否定句中用can’t 表示表示不可能。
He must be in the classroom . He can not be at school .
d. must 和have 两者都表示必须是可以互换,但must 强调说话人主观认为,应当,必须。无人称、数、时态变化,而have to 表示不得不,必须,主要强调是外界客观因素,如环境,习惯,急事等,而要求某人不得不,只好,它可以用于多种时态,一般不用进行时态,且有人称和和数的变化。
We must study hard at our school . I have to sweep the floor ,because it’s too dirty .
D. need
Need 既可做情态动词又可做实意动词。
a. need 做情态动词时,只用于否定句或疑问句,无形态变化。
You needn’t do it again . He needn’t worry about it .
b. need 做实意动词,用法通常是:
人+need+ to do We need to buy some food for supper .
物+need +doing =物+need+ to be done
The flowers need watering . The flowers need to be watered .
另外need 后还可以直接接名词。He needs some help .
E. ought to should
ought to should 做情态动词用,都是应该,应当 的意思。Ought to 语气较强,指客观上有责任有义务去做某事,或按观念和道理也因该对某事负责,should 指主管上认为有责任和义务去做,但预期不如ought to 强烈。
You ought to respect your teacher . We should be careful of other’s feelings .
F. dare
敢,既可做情态动词也可做实意动词。情态动词常用在否定句和疑问句中,没有人称和数及时态的变化,若做实义动词后接to do sth . 有人称和数及时态的变化.
He dare not go out for a walk alone at night . He dares to climb the tree .
G 其它。
还有以下固定词组,也起着情态动词一样的作用,
Had better do sth 做好做某事 You had better not read books in poor light .
Shall we /I do sth 我们可以做某事吗? Shall we starts the meeting at once ?
Would like to do sth 想要做某事 would you like to come to my birthday ?
Will/would you please do sth 请你做某事好吗? Will you get some chalk ?
used to do sth 过去常常做某事。He used to get up early .
情态动词+have done”用法归纳
1. may和might+ 动词完成式
此结构用于推测过去的行为。例如:
She said that he might have missed the plane.她说他可能误了航班。
2. can和could+ 动词完成式
A. 表示过去能做而没做的事,有一种对过去未付诸实施的事情的惋惜。例如:
In those circumstances we could have done better.
在那样的情况下,我们本来可以做得更好的。(但没有做得更好)
B. 推测过去的某种行动。
Where can /could she have gone? 她可能到哪里去了呢?
The boy can't have finished reading the book so soon because it is difficult even to an adult.
这孩子不可能那么快就把这本书读完的,因为即使对一个成人来说,这本书也是相当难的。
Note:
can't和couldn't+ 动词原形可以用来表示否定推断。例如:
He can't be over fifty.他不可能超过50岁。
3.must +动词完成式
表示对过去行为的推断,具有较大的可能性,意为“一定…,想必…”。例如:
She must have gone through a lot.她一定吃过很多苦。
Note:
must+动词原形→对现在的推测,must be+现在分词→对未来或现在正在进行的推测。例如:
She looks happy; she must be having a good time.
4. needn't+动词完成式和didn't need to do
A. needn't+动词完成式表示一种已经做过的但并无必要的行为。例如:
You needn't have watered the flowers, for it is going to rain.
你本来不必浇花的,因为天要下雨了。(但却浇了)
We needn't have told him the news because he knew it already.
B. didn't need (have) to do结构表示没有必要做某事,实际上也没有做。例如:
I didn't need to clean the windows. My sister did it.
我不必擦窗,我妹妹擦了。(我没有擦)
5. should +动词完成式
A.此结构的肯定式表示应该做的事而没有做,否定式表示某种行为不该发生但却发生了。例如:
You should have given her more help.你应该多给她一些帮助的。(但没有给)
B. 表示推测,意为“可能”,但可能性较小。例如:
He should have finished the work by now.他现在该把工作完成了。(推测)
C. should / would have thought意为“本以为,本认为”。例如:
A: "Can you type?" B: "Certainly." A: "Well, I should have thought you wouldn't."
I should have thought she wouldn't agree.我本来认为她不会同意的。
D. should have thought有时意为“认为,以为”,相当于should think,但表示更为委婉、谦逊或不肯定的语气。例如:
I should have thought it fairly good.我以为它是很不错的。
E. should have + 过去分词用于虚拟语气:
Had you written him, you should have known the details.
6. ought to + 动词完成式
此结构表示某种过去应该做而没有做的事,或被忽略未做的某种明智行为。例如:
You ought to have returned the book earlier.(还晚了)
You ought to have refused her at the beginning, but now it is too late.
Note:
这里的ought to也可以用should代替。
二.动词短语
动词短语是由一些动词和其它词构成的短语,表达一个完整的意思。 其构成方式如下
构 成 方 式
举 例
动词+介词
Agree with , ask for , arrive at/in , begin with , come from , feel like , fall behind , fall off , look after
动词+副词
Come out , eat up , go back , go home , put on , work out , hold on , grow up , look over , move away
动词+副词+介词
Be fed up with , catch up with , get on with ,
Pull out from, look down upon
动词+名词+介词
Take care of , make friends with , have a look at
Play a joke on sb , make room for , say sorry to
Be +形容词+介词
Be busy with , be different from , be good at ,
Be famous for , be short for , be interested in
复杂结构
Make up one’s mind
动词的时态
一.动词的基本形式
绝大多数动词都有五种基本形式:动词原形,一般现在时第三人称单数,现在分词,过去式和过去分词。
1.动词原形。
动词原形就是不带to 的动词不定式,也就是词典中出现的动词原形的形式。
动词原形用法很多,常见的有:
(1)在一般现在时主语不是第三人称单数形式,其谓语动词用动词原形。
We often watch TV at home after supper.
(2) 在句型why not 的后面接动词原形。Why not go there on foot ?
(3) 在had better 后面要用动词原形。 You had better finish your homework be supper .
(4) 在句型let sb后面要用动词原形。Let’s play volleyball after school .
(5) 感官动词和使役动词后面接动词原形做宾语补足语
You words make me feel angry .
(6) 在祈使句的开头用动词原形。 Come and buy the book you need at our bookshop .
(7) 在情态动词后用动词原形。Can you swim across the river in an hour ?
(8) 在do ,will , would 等助动词后。Did you want to go there last Monday ?
2. 第三人称单数。
动词的第三人称单数就是句子的主语是第三人称单数,并且谓语是一般现在时,谓语动词应该用第三人称单数形式,即动词原形后面加-s 或者 es ,My sister often watches TV with us at home
动词的第三人称单数形式的构成:
(1) 一般情况下在动词后加s. work –works take—takes buy –buys cut---cuts
(2) 以字母s, x, ch, sh, o, 结尾的动词加es. Pass---passes catch-catches go- goes
(3) 以辅音字母+y结尾的动词,先把y变成i再加es . carry—carries try—tries
3. 现在分词
动词的现在分词形式由动词原形+ing 构成,一般用作非谓语动词或和be 动词连用构成现在进行时、过去进行时。I saw a boy laying on the ground .
The girl is reading a book .
现在分词的构成:
(1) 一般情况下直接加ing , buy—buying drink –drinking find –finding
(2) 以不发音的字母e 结尾的动词,去掉字母e 加ing . take-taking come-coming
(3) 以重读闭音节结尾的单词,末尾只有一个辅音字母的动词双写此辅音字母,再加ing , sit –sitting stop-stopping run-running begin-beginning get –getting
(4) 部分以ie 结尾的单音节动词,先把ie 变成变成 y,再加ing .
Die—dying lie –lying die –dying tie -- tying
4. 过去式和过去分词。
动词的过去式主要用来构成一般过去时,过去分词是用来构成现在完成时、过去完成时和被动语态的,也可做非谓语动词.
规则的动词的过去式和过去分词变化如下:
(1) 一般情况下直接加ed . work –worked help –helped play –played
(2) 以不发音的字母e结尾的动词直接加d. live-lived like-liked
(3) 以辅音字母+y结尾的动词,先把,先把y变成i,再加ed . carry-carried
(4) 以重读闭音节结尾,且末尾只有一个辅音字母,双写这个辅音字母,然后加ed. Stop-stopped prefer—preferred plan—planned
加上ed 后的读音
(1) 在浊辅音和元音后读/d/ .played carried lived
(2) 在清辅音后读/t/ passed stopped liked
(3) 在/t/ /d /后读/id/ wanted needed mended
不规则的变化
英语中有一些动词的过去式和过去分词是不规则变化,不规则变化的动词有200多个,但他们使用的频率特别高,不规则变化可以分为以下几种形式。
(1)A-A-A 形式。 动词原形、过去式、过去分词三个形式一样。
Cut-cut-cut put-put-put set-set-set hit-hit-hit cost-cost-cost
(2) A-B-B形式。过去式、过去分词一样。
Bright brought brought buy bought bought build built built find found found
(3)A-B-A 动词原形和过去分词一样。Come came come run ran run
(4) A-B-C 动词原形、过去式、过去分词都不一样。
Go went gone do did done see saw seen begin began begun
这一部分又可分为两种。
a. 过去分词在动词原形的基础上变化。 Go went gone (gone 由go 变来)
Rise rose risen (risen由rise 变来)
b. 过去分词由过去式变化而来. Choose chose chosen break broke broken
二. 动词的各种时态。
(一)一般现在时。the Simple Present Tense
1.基本结构:
肯定形式:主语+动词原形(若主语为第三人称单数,动词则要改为第三人称单数形式)
Tom goes to school by bus every morning on weekdays .
否定形式:若句中有be 动词,情态动词,则在后面 加not ,若没有则借助于don’t /doesn’t +动词原形。She is not beautiful but very charming. Jim doesn’t have a bike.
一般疑问句:有be,和亲情态动词的提前,没有的将do ,does 提前,句中动词用原形。
Do you want a go ? Can you swim ?
被动语态were/was done
2. 基本用法:
(1)表示现阶段经常或习惯发生的动作或存在的状态,或者说明主语的特征。
一般现在时的句中常有的时间状语:often, usually , sometimes , always , never, seldom, every day(week等),once/twice a week /(year 等),on Sunday(Friday 等), in the morning (afternoon 等)。
They go to the Palace Museum once a year . They often discuss business in the evening .
(2) 表示客观真理、事实、人的技能或现在的状态时,句子一般不用时间状语。
The earth turns round the sun . Light travels faster than sounds .
(3) 下列动词:come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return,live,fly表示十分确定发生(如安排好的事情)或按照时间表进行的事情,用一般现在时可以表达将来,句中可以有将来的时间,
The train for Haikou leaves at 8:00 in the morning .
(4)在时间状语从句中(以when ,before ,while ,until, as soon as 等引导)和条件状语从句中( 以if , unless等引导),用一般现在时代替一般将来时,句中可以有将来时间。
If it rains tomorrow , we will have to stay at home .
Please ring me up , as soon as you arrive in Germany.
(5) 一般现在时用于倒装句可以表示正在发生的动作,动词以come ,go 为主。
Here comes the bus . There goes the bell .
(6) 一般现在时常用于体育比赛的解说或寓言故事中。
Now the midfield player catches the ball and he keeps it .
(7) 人的心理活动和感官动词一般用一般现在时而不用现在进行时表达,常用动词有:like , love , hate , dislike , want , need , wish , hope , think. understand , remember . forget , mean , hear , feel, see .
I think it is going to snow . I really hope you can enjoy your stay here .
8)在动词hope, take care that, make sure that等后.
I hope they have a nice time next week.
Make sure that the windows are closed before you leave the room.
(二)一般过去时 The Simple Past Tense
1. 基本结构
肯定形式:主语+be 动词(行为动词)的过去式 She often came to help us in those days .
否定形式:was/were +not ; didn’t +动词原形 I didn’t know you were so busy .
一般疑问句:将was /were 提前 Did +主语+动词原形
Were you at home yesterday ? Did you see Jay last Friday ?
2.基本用法:
表示过去某时发生的动作和状态,这种动作和状态可能是一次性的也可能是经常发生的。
(1)表示过去具体时刻发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有at nine , yesterday morning , two days ago, when 等。 I get up at 6:00 this morning .
(2)表示一段时间内不知何时发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有yesterday , last week , in 2000, 等。 He came to our city in 2001.
(3)表示过去一个阶段中经常发生的事情时,时间状语有:last…,in …, from…to…, for several weeks , often, usually , sometimes , always , never 等。
Mr. Jackson usually went to evening schools when he was young .
(4) 讲故事,对过去经历的回忆,双方都明白的过去事件等一般用过去时,而且经常省略时间状语。 I happened to meet Lucy in the street .
四种时间状语
① yesterday及相关短语。
例如:yesterday morning/afternoon/evening 昨天上午/下午/晚上。
② “last+ 时间状语”构成的短语。
例如:last night/month/spring/year 昨晚/上个月/去年春天/去年。
③ “一段时间+ago”组成的短语。
例如:three days ago 三天以前 four years ago四年以前。
④ “介词+ 时间名词”组成的短语。
例如:in 1999 在1999年;on the morning of December 25th 在12月25号早上。
四种谓语动词的表现形式
① be动词的过去式was、were. She was a teacher five years ago. 她五年前是一名教师。
② 行为动词的过去式,分为规则动词和不规则动词两种。
③ 连系动词的过去式。例如:become-became She became angry. 她生气了。
④ 情态动词的过去式+动词原形。I could swim at the age of five. 我五岁时就会游泳了。
(三)一般将来时 The Simple Future Tense
1.基本结构
肯定形式:am/is /are +going to +do ; will /shall +do
They are going to have a competition with us . It is going to rain .
否定形式:am/is /are +not+going to +do ; will /shall+not +do
They are not going to /will not go climbing if it rains tomorrow .
一般疑问句:be 放在句首;will/shall 提到句首。
Will you go shopping tomorrow ?
2.基本用法:表示将来某个时间将要发生的动作或存在的状态,也表示将来经常或反复发生的动作,经常与表示将来的时间状语连用。
(1)一般将来时的时间状语有tomorrow , this afternoon , next week , one day , soon , someday , sometime , in the future ,when 等。
(2)用will 构成的将来时,表示动作与人的主观愿望无关。Shall 用于第一人称,will 用于所有人称。I will graduate from this school soon . You will stay alone after I leave .
(3) am/is /are +going to +do 表示打算或准备要做的事,或者主观判断即将要发生的事。
而am/is /are + to +do表示安排或计划中的动作。It’s going to rain soon .
A man told them that the woman was to give birth to the special baby .
(4) 表示一个人临时决定要做某事。可以用will 表达。
I will go to the lab to get some chemicals .So please wait until I return .
(5) 现在进行时、一般现在时也可以表示将来。
The train for Haikou leaves at 8:00 in the morning . He is leaving soon .
(6) shall 和will在口语的一些疑问句中相当于情态动词,shall 一般与第一人称连用,will与第二人称连用。Shall we go to the zoo next Saturday ? Will you please open the door for me ?
(7) be to + 动词原形 表示按照计划将要发生的事情。
An angel came to tell her that she was to have this special boy .
3. 它的标志性时间状语
1.)含tomorrow; next短语; 2.)in+段时间 ; 3).how soon;
4)).by+将来时间; 5.)by the time sb.do…
6).祈使句句型中:or/and sb. will do
7).在时间/条件状语从句中, 如果从句用一般现在时, 主句用将来时
8).another day
4..如何比较be going to 与will的使用:
①be going to 表示近期、眼下就要发生的事情,will 表示的将来时间则较远一些。 e.g: He is going to write a letter tonight. He will write a book one day.
②be going to 表示根据主观判断将来肯定发生的事情,will表示客观上将来势必发生的事情。 He is seriously ill. He is going to die. He will be twenty years old.
③be going to 含有“计划,准备”的意思,而 will 则没有这个意思,
She is going to lend us her book. He will be here in half an hour.
④在有条件从句的主句中,不用 be going to, 而用will,
If any beasts come at you, I'll stay with you and help you.
5.主将从现详讲
定义:if 引导的条件状语从句中,主句用将来时态,从句用现在时态。If是连词,所连接的句子 叫条件状语 从句,表示假设或条件,意思是“ 如果…的话” 。
常见的主将从现连接词:if,as soon as, unless
I’ll go with you as soon as I finish my work.
表示假设,表示将会发生和可能发生的事,或进行提醒警告。句子结构如下:
If +句子(一般现在时),+主句(主语will/may/can) +动词)
a. If you finish your homework, you can go out and play.
b. If I have enough money next year, I will go to travel.
②表示真实条件、客观真理、自然现象、定理定义 、民间谚语等,
句型是: If + 句子 (一般现在时 ),+ 主句 ( 一般现在时)
If you study hard, you are sure to succeed.
If a glass falls on the floor, it usually breaks
(四) 现在进行时。The Present Continuous Tense
1.基本结构
肯定形式:am/is/are +doing He is doing well in his lessons .
否定形式:am/is/are +not+doing She is not reading .
一般疑问句:将am/is/are放在句首。 Are you feeling better now ?
2.基本用法:现在进行时表示现在正在进行的动作或现阶段正在发生而此刻不一定在进行的动作。
(1)表示说话时正在进行或发生的动作,这时可以不用时间状语,也可以和now, at present, at the moment等时间状语连用。有时用一个动词,如look,listen
What are you reading now? Listen! Someone is singing in the classroom.
(2)表示当前一段时期的活动或现阶段正在进行的动作。
What are doing up in the tree ? I am writing a long novel these days .
(3) 表示即将发生的动作,一般指近期安排好的事情。常见的动词有come , go , stay, leave , spend , do drive ,fly 等 。I’m coming now . He is leaving soon .
(4) 表示频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always 等频度副词连用,以表示赞扬、不满或讨厌等感情色彩。
He is always borrowing money from me and forgetting all about it some time later .
他总是向我借钱,过一段时间就忘得一干二净。
3. 现在进行时与一般现在时的区别
(1)现在进行时表示动作的暂时性,而一般现在时表示动作的习惯性和经常性
I am watching TV now. (暂时性) I watch TV every day. (经常性)
(2)现在进行时可表示短暂性动作,而一般现在时表示长久性动作。
Lucy is living in Beijing.(短时间居住)Lucy lives in Beijing. (长久性居住)
(3)现在进行时表示的动作可带有感情色彩,而一般现在时所表述的动作通常是事实。
You’re always forgetting the most important things. (责备)
He is always helping others. (赞扬) He often helps others. (事实)
(4)有些动词不能用进行时,know, understand, love, like, hate, wish, want, think, hope, have, believe, agree, hear, see, notice,等等。这些动词通常用一般现在时表示说话时发生的动作。
I have a lot of friends here. She wants to buy a new bike.
(五)过去进行时。The Past Continuous Tense
1.基本结构:
肯定形式:was /were +doing at that time she was working in a hospital .
否定形式:was /were +not + doing when he came , I was not reading but watching TV .
一般疑问句:把was /were 放在句首。 Were you cooking at this time yesterday ?
2.基本用法:过去进行时表示过去某一时刻或某阶段正在进行的动作。
(1)过去进行时的时间状语有:then, at that time ,this time yesterday , at seven yesterday .以及when 引导的时间状语从句。He was cooking supper this time yesterday .
The little girl was playing with her toy when I saw her .
(2) 用于宾语从句或时间状语从句中,表示与主句动作同时进行而且延续时间较长。 句子中通常不用时间状语。She saw it happen when she was walking past .
They sang a lot of songs while they were walking in the dark forest .
(3)也可以表示过去一个阶段频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always 等频度副词连用,以表示赞扬、不满或讨厌等感情色彩。He always borrowing money from me when he lived here
3.when和while的区别
(1)when,while都有“当……时候”的意思。
when既可表示某一点时间,也可以表示某一段时间 。
在when引导的时间状语从句中,其谓语动词可以是延续性的,也可以是非延续性的,可与主句中的谓语动词同时发生,也可在其后发生。
I was just reading a book when she came into my room. 她走进我房间时,我正在看书。
Were you writing when the teacher came in? 老师进来的时候,你在写信吗?
When he was a child he was always trying out new ideas.他小时候就常常试验一些新的设想。
(2)while只能表示某一段时间,不能表示某一点时间。在while引导的时间状语从句中,其谓语动词只能是延续性的,而且也只能与主句中的谓语动词同时发生或存在。
While Jim was mending his bike, Lin Tao came to see him. 正当吉姆修自行车时,林涛来看他。
You can’t do your homework while you’re watching TV. 你不能一边看电视一边做家庭作业。
(3)另外,when和while的区别还在于:while引导的时间状语从句多用进行时态,而when引导的时间状语从句多用一般时态。
While they were talking , the bell rang. 正在他们谈话的时候,上课铃响了。
I was doing my homework when my mother came back home yesterday evening.
昨天晚上妈妈回家的时候,我正在做家庭作
(4)when和while 还可作并列连词。when表示“在那时”;while表示“而,却”,表对照关系。
The children were running to move the bag of rice when they heard the sound of a motor bike. 孩子们正要跑过去搬开那袋米,这时他们听到了摩托车的声音。
He is strong while his brother is weak. 他长得很结实,而他弟弟却很瘦弱。
4. 使用过去进行时应注意的几点
(1) 过去进行时可表示按计划、安排过去某时刻将要发生的动作。如:
He said they were leaving for Beijing this afternoon. 他说他今天下午要去北京。
(2) 动词hope, wonder等的过去进行时常用来表示提出要求,虽然表示现在的内容,但语气比一般现在时或一般过去时要委婉。如:
I was wondering whether you could come to join us. 我想你能否过来跟我们一起活动?
(3) 过去进行时中有always, forever, continually, constantly修饰时,表示说话人的赞赏或厌烦的感情。如:
He was always thinking of others. 他总是想到人家。
4. 过去进行时与一般过去时的区别
(1) 过去进行时强调动作在过去某时刻正在进行或持续,而一般过去时表示动作的完成。如:
He was writing his composition last night. 他昨晚在写作文。(不一定写完)
He wrote his composition last night. 他昨晚写了一篇作文。(已经写完)
(2) 表示过去的状态、感觉及心理活动的静态动词(如be, like, love, hate, fear, own, hear, see, know, want, notice)可用于一般过去时,但通常不用于进行时。如:
I hated it when a man spoke with his mouth full of food. 我讨厌人们说话时口里含着食物。
(3) 一般过去时与always, constantly, forever, continually等连用,表示“过去经常性、习惯性的动作”;而过去进行时与always, constantly, forever, continually等连用,表示动作的重复,常带有感情色彩。如:
He always got up at six. 他过去总是六点起床。
He was always thinking of his work. 他总是一心想到工作。
(4) 有时过去进行时可以用来替换一般过去时,但一般过去时表示主语的行为是经过认真考虑的;而过去进行时表示一种较随便或没有进行仔细考虑的行为。如:
I thought that he would agree with us. 我原以为它会同意我们的。
I was thinking of persuading him to follow my advice.
我想到了要说服他接受我们的建议。
(六)现在完成时The Present Perfect Tense
1.基本结构 :
肯定形式:has/have +done I have written an article .
否定形式:has/have +not +done He hasn’t changed a little so many years .
一般疑问句:has/have 提到主语前面 Have you been to Beijing ? Yes , I have .
2.基本用法:现在完成时表示一个发生在过去的,对现在仍有影响的动作,或表示开始在过去,并且一直延续到现在,甚至还可以延续下去的动作。
(1)表示发生在过去对现在仍有影响的动作时,时间状语有:already, yet, just, ever, never, before , once, twice , three times 等。 I have never seen such a fine picture before .
(2) 表示在过去开始一直延续到现在(可能延续下去)的动作或状态时,时间状语有:for four weeks , since ,since 1990, since last year ,since two weeks ago ,so far , ever since , since then , in the last(past )…years 等。
I have been away from my hometown for thirty years .
(3)口语中的Have got 往往表示Have (有)的意思。 They have got thousands of books .
(4) have/has been to、have/has gone to 和 have been in
have(has) been to...表示“曾去过某地,已经从那里回来了”,可以和ever、never、twice等连用。
have(has) gone to表示“已经去了某地,在去那里的途中或到达那里还没有回来”。have(has) been in 表示“在某地呆多长时间”,常与表示一段时间的状语连用, since, for, how long 等
He went to Shanghai last week 上周他去了上海
He has been to Shanghai.
他(曾经)到/去过上海.(但他人现在肯定不是在上海而是回来了)
He has gone to Shanghai.
他已经去上海了.(也许刚动身出发,也许已经到了,也许还在路上,反正他人不在这里)
Mr. Brown has been in Shanghai for three days. 布朗先生来上海已经有三天了
(5) yet already
Already 多用于肯定句中,用在Have/has 后,分词前, 有时也用在疑问句句尾,表示惊讶的语气。Yet 常用于疑问句和否定句句尾。
Jim has already done his homework. I haven’t finished reading the book yet .
(6) since for
For +一段时间 since +过去点时间/一般过去式的句子 since+段时间+ago
He has lived for three years . I have lived here since I was born .
与since 有关的两个句式。
It is +段时间+since+一般过去时的句子
段时间+ has passed +since +一般过去时的句子
It’s three days since he left shanghai . Three days has passed since he left Shanghai .
(7)延续性动词与瞬间动词
①英语中的行为动词有延续性和瞬间动词之分,
延续性动词是表示一个动作可以持续一段时间或更长,能够和表示一段时间的状语连用。 常见的有:study ,play , do , read , learn , write , clean , sleep , speak , talk , wait ,fly , stay , sit, stand , lie , keep 等。
瞬间性动词是表示一个瞬间动作,动作一发生即结束。亦称终止性动词。常见的有:begin ,start, finish , go ,come, leave , find ,get up , arrive , reach , get to , enter, hear, stop , open, close, become , buy , sell , borrow ,lend , happen , join , lose, renew , die , take away , put up , set out , put on , get on ,get off 等。
非延续性动词可以转化成延续性动词主要有以下几种:
A用相应的延续性动词:
buy—have , borrow –keep put on –wear catch (get)a cold –have a cold
Get to know—know
B. 转化成be +名词
join the army (party ,league )__be a soldier (party member, league member )
Go to school _-be a student become a teacher –be a teacher become –be
C. 转化成be + 形容词或副词。
Go-be away come –be here leave /go –be away /be not here come back –be back
die –be dead lose—be lost return –be back finish /end –be over get up –be up
Finish—be over begin/start –be on open—be open close –be closed turn on –be on
Fall sleep –be asleep wake up –be awake fall(get) ill (sick)—be ill(sick)
move –be out of
D. 转化成be + 介词短语。
Go /come to +地点---be in /at +地点 join –be in ….. be a ……member
move to +地点—be in /at +地点
②延续性动词在完成时中能与表示持续一段时间的状语连用,而瞬间动词不能。
His father has lain in bed for half an hour .
③瞬间动词在完成时中不能与一段时间连用,如果要与表示持续一段时间的状语连用,通常意思相当的持续性动词来代替,二用it is …since 结构来替换瞬间动词。
The film has been on for five minutes . It’s five minutes since the film began .
④瞬间动词的否定形式可以与表示一段时间的状语连用。 I haven’t seen you for a long time .
(8)用于现在完成时的句型
1)It is the first / second time…. that…结构中的从句部分,用现在完成时。
It is the first time that I have visited the city.
It was the third time that the boy had been late.
2)This is the… that…结构,that 从句要用现在完成时.
This is the best film that I've (ever) seen. 这是我看过的最好的电影。
This is the first time (that) I've heard him sing. 这是我第一次听他唱歌。
(9)现在完成时与一般过去时的区别。
A一般过去时表示过去某时发生的动作或单纯叙述过去的事情,强调动作;现在完成时为过去发生的,强调过去的事情对现在的影响,强调的是影响。
I saw this film yesterday.(强调动作发生的时间是yesterday 。)
I have seen this film.(强调对现在的影响,电影的内容已经知道了。)
B一般过去时和表示过去的时间状语连用,如:…ago, last week/...
In 2008, in the past, just now, the day before yesterday, yesterday ... Then(那时),that day, one day, once(从前) 现在完成时常和recently(近来),ever, never, twice, so far(到目前为止), since,for,in the past/last few years , already(肯定句), yet(否定,疑问句), just(刚刚), before(以前)连用。现在完成时不与表示过去的时间状语连用。
C现在完成时可表示持续到现在的动作或状态,动词一般是延续性的,如live, teach, learn, work, study, know
D现在完成时和一般过去时的转化,将一段时间状语改为过去时间状语。
I have been a league member for 3 years . I joined the League three years ago .
(七)过去完成时The Past Perfect Tense
1.基本结构:
肯定形式:had + done As soon as we got to the station , the train had left .
否定形式:had +not +done I had not been to Shanghai .
一般疑问句:had 放于句首。 Had you telephoned her before she left ?
2.基本用法:
过去完成时常表示过去某一时间或动作发生之前已经完成的动作。简言之,过去完成时所表示的时间是过去的过去。
(1) 1、表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成的动作。 他表示的时间是"过去 的过去 "过去完成时的时间状语有:by last week , by then , by the end of (last …)
until then 等。
常与by last year, by the time of yesterday,等连用。如: She said she had seen the film 4 times.
When Mr Li got to the classroom, all the students had begun reading. By the time they arrived, the bus had left.
2、表示 从过去某一时间开始一直延续到过去另一时间的动作或状态。常与for (后跟段时间)或since (后跟点时间)等连用.如:
She had worked in this school since it opened 25 years ago.
He had learned more than 2000 words by the end of last term ./
(2)用在状语从句中,过去完成时常用的连词
有: before, by, until, when, after, once, as soon as等。
等连词的复合句中,在过去不同时间发生的两个动作中,发生在先,用过去完成时;发生在后,用一般过去时。
They had lived in Beijing for two years before they came here .
When I got up ,it had stopped raining .
注意:如果两个动作紧接着发生,则常常不用过去完成时,特别是在包含before和after的复合句中,因为 这 时从句的动作和主句的动作发生的先后顺序已经非常明确,这时可以用一般过去时代替过去完成时。
例如: After he arrived in England, Marx worked hard to improve hisEnglish.
马克思到达英格兰之后,努力提高他的英语水平。
(3)用在宾语从句中,told, said, knew, heard, thought等动词引导的宾语从句中,从句要用过去完成时。 Jim said he had read the book before .
(4)叙述过去发生的事情,在已叙述了过去发生的事情后,反过来追述或补述以前发生的动作时,常使用过去完成时。
例如: Mr. Smith died yesterday. He had been a good friend of mine.
史密斯先生昨天去世了。他以前是我的好友。
I didn’t know a thing about the verbs, for I had not studied mylesson.
我对动词一无所知,因为我没有好好学习功课。
(5)在含有定语从句的主从复合句中,如果叙述的是过去的事,先发生的动作常用过去完成时。
I returned the book that I had borrowed.我已归还了我借的书。
She found the key that she had lost.她丢失的钥匙找到了。
(7)动词think, want, hope, mean, plan, intend等用过去完成时来表示过去未曾实现的想法,希望,打算或意图等。
例如: They had wanted to help but could not get there in time.
他们本来打算去帮忙,但没有及时赶到那里。
We had hoped to be able to come and see you .
我们本来希望能来看看你。
(8)过去完成时还可用在hardly…when…, no sooner…than…, It was the first (second, etc)
time (that)…等固定句型中。
例如: Hardly had he begun to speak when the audience interrupted him.
他刚开始演讲,听众就打断了他。
No sooner had he arrived than he went away again
他刚到就又走了。
It was the third time that he had been out of work that year.
这是他那一年第三次失业了。
时间状语
before,when,after,by+,until, once,had no sooner……than
过去完成时-语法判定
1. 由时间状语来判定
一般说来,各种时态都有特定的时间状语。与过去完成时连用的时间状语有:
( 1 ) by + 过去的时间点。如:
I had finished reading the novel by nine o'clock last night.
( 2 ) by the end of + 过去的时间点。如:
We had learned over two thousand English words by the end of lastterm.
( 3 ) before + 过去的时间点。如:
They had planted six hundred trees before last Wednesday.
2. 由“过去的过去”来判定。
过去完成时表示“过去的过去”,是指过去某一动作之前已经发生或完成的动作,即动作有先后关系,动作在前的用过去完成时,在后的用一般过去时。这种用法常出现在:
( 1 )宾语从句中
当宾语从句的主句为一般过去时,且从句的动作先于主句的动作时,从句要用过去完成时。在told, said, knew, heard, thought等动词后的宾语从句。如:
She said that she had seen the film before.
( 2 )状语从句中
在时间、条件、原因、方式等状语从句中,主、从句的动作发生有先后关系,动作在前的,要用过去完成时,动作在后的要用一般过去时。如:
After he had finished his homework, he went to bed.
注意: before, after 引导的时间状语从句中,由于 before 和 after 本身已表达了动作的先后关系,若主、从句表示的动作紧密相连,则主、从句都用一般过去时。如:
After he closed the door, he left the classroom.
(3)表示意向的动词,如hope, wish, expect, think, intend, mean, suppose等,用过去完成时表示"原本…,未能…"
We hadhoped that you would come, but you didn't.
3. 根据上、下文来判定。
I met Wang Tao in the street yesterday. We hadn't seen each othersince he went to Beijing.
过去完成时-语法区别
一、过去完成时与现在完成时的区别
现在完成时表示的动作发生在过去,以现在的时间为基点,但侧重对现在产生的结果或造成的影响,与现在有关,其结构为“助动词 have (has) + 过去分词”;过去完成时则是一个相对的时态,已过去时间为基点,它所表示的动作不仅发生在过去,更强调“过去的过去”,只有和过去某时或某动作相比较时,才用到它。
比较:I have learned 1000 English words so far.到目前为止我已经学会了 1000 个英语单词。
I had learned 1000 English words till then.到那时为止我已经学会了 1000 个英语单词。
— I'm sorry to keep you waiting. 对不起,让你久等了。
— Oh, not at all. I have been here only a few minutes.没什么,我只等了几分钟。(“等”的动作从过去某一时间点持续到现在)
二、过去完成时与一般过去时的区别
虽然这两种时态都表示过去发生的动作或存在的状态,但在使用时应注意以下几点:
1. 时间状语不同:过去完成时在时间上强调“过去的过去”;而一般过去时只强调过去某一特定的时间。
比较:They had arrived at the station by ten yesterday.
They arrived at the station at ten yesterday.
2. 在没有明确的过去时间状语作标志时,谓语动词动作发生的时间先后须依据上下文来判断:先发生的用过去完成时,后发生的则用一般过去时。
She was very happy. Her whole family were pleased with her, too.She had just won the first in the composition competition.
3. 当两个或两个以上接连发生的动作用 and 或 but 连接时,按时间顺序,只需用一般过去时来代替过去完成时;另外,在 before , after , as soon as 引导的从句中,由于这些连词本身已经表示出时间的先后,因此也可以用过去时来代替过去完成时。
He entered the room, turned on the light and read an evening paper.
(八) 过去将来时(The future –in –the –past Tense )
过去将来时态
定义:
过去将来时的基本特征,即 “立足过去,着眼未来”。它表示从过去某一时间来看将要发生的某个动作或存在的某种状态。但这个"将来"时间绝不会延伸到“现在”;而仅限于“过去时间区域内”。由此可以看出,含这个时态的句子常带一个表示“过去某个时间点”的状语
Mary told me that she would go to Shanghai by plane
.玛丽告诉我说她将要坐飞机去上海。
基本构成
A ) would + 动词原形
He asked me if I would stay here. 他问我是否要待在这儿。
B ) was / were going to + 动词原形
No one knew when he was going to finish his homework.
没有人知道他什么时候会完成作业。
C ) was/ were about to + 动词原形
He said that they were to leave at six.
他说他们将于6点动身。
She said that the meeting was about to begin. 她说会议就要开始
D) was / were to + 动词原形。如:
The building was to be completed next month. 这座建筑改在下个月竣工。
Li Lei was to arrive soon. 李蕾很快就要到了。
E) come, go, arrive, leave, die 等瞬时动词,用在过去进行时态中表示过去将来。 was / were +现在分词。
He was leaving the next day. 他第二天要走了。
We were informed that the leaders were coming to our school soon.
我们接到通知说领导们很快要来我们学校。
表示纯粹的将来时用should /would .
表示打算或主观认为的事情常用was /were +going to +动词原形
She told me that she was going to have a walk with her pet dog .
基本用法
A ) 主句为过去时,宾语从句常表示将要发生的事情。 如:Nobody knew what would happen after a hundred years.
没有人知道一百年之后将会发生什么事。
B)表示过去习惯性的动作
During that period , he would do morning-exercises every day.
在那段时间,他每天早锻炼。
C) 表示过去情况中的“愿望”、“倾向”,多用于否定句。例如:
No matter how difficult the work was , he would keep on doing it until he accomplished it . 不管工作有多难,他总会坚持不懈地把它干完。
D) 过去将来时,用于虚拟语气中,如:
If I were you, I would not do that. 要是我是你的话,我就不会那样做。
动词的语态
一. 语态的概述。
英语的语态是通过动词的变化表现出来的,英语中有两种语态:主动语态和被动语态。
主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者。
被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者,即行为动作的对象。
主动语态和被动语态指的是动词形式,是词法概念,而主动句和被动句则指的是句子结构,因此是句法概念。所谓主动句就是由主动语态动词或词组作谓语动词的的句子,而被动句则是由被动语态动词或词组做谓语的句子。
He opened the door . The door was opened .
二被动语态
(一)被动语态的定义
被动语态是动词的一种特殊形式,用来说明主语与谓语动词之间的关系。如果主语是动作的执行者即某人做某事便叫主动语态,如果主语是动作的承受者即某事被做,便叫被动语态。主动语态与被动语态的区别不是词序的区别,而是主语与谓语意义上的区别。在英语中只有及物动词和一些相当于及物动词词组才有被动语态的形式。
(二)被动语态的基本时态变化。
被动语态由 be +过去分词 构成,be 随事态的变化而变化,各种时态的被动语态形式为(以动词do 为例。
时态
语态
动词形式
例 句
一般现在时
主 动
Do/ does
We study English .
被 动
Am/is / are +done
English is studied by us .
一般过去时
主 动
Did
He mended his bike yesterday .
被 动
Was/were +done
His bike was mended by him yesterday .
一般将来时
主 动
Will /shall +do
We will finish the work tomorrow .
被 动
Will/shall+be +done
The work will be finished by us tomorrow .
过去将来时
主 动
Would /should +do
He said they would take down the old building.
被 动
Would /should +be +done
He said the old building would be taken down by them .
现在进行时
主 动
Am/is /are +doing
They are planting trees by the river .
被 动
Am/is/are+being+done
Trees are being planted by the river .
过去进行时
主 动
Was/were +doing
I was writing a letter to my uncle at eight yesterday .
被 动
Was/were+being+done
A letter was being written to my uncle by me at eight yesterday .
现在完成时
主 动
Has/have+ done
She has found the lost box.
被 动
Has/have+been +done
The lost box has been found by her .
过去完成时
主 动
Had +done
They had finished the work before
yesterday
被 动
Had +been +done
The work had been finished by them before yesterday.
说明:主动变被动,时态不变动。
(三)由情态动词构成的被动语态:情态动词+be +done
Your homework must be handed in before class.
(四) 动词不定式的被动语态:to +be +done .
There are till twenty trees need to be planed .
(五) 被动语态的用法
1.当我们不知道谁是动作的执行者时或没有必要指出谁是动作的执行者
This watch was made in China .
2.当我们需要强调动作的承受者,而不是执行者。 English is spoken in many parts of the world .
3.为了强调动作的执行者而用by修饰时。Such songs are usually sung by girls .
4.出于礼貌措辞等原因,不愿说出动作的执行者时。You are invited to a party at eight tomorrow .
5.在文章的标题广告新闻等中常省略动词be 的被动语态。 Girl wanted (招女工)
6.当动作的执行者不是人时,也往往用被动语态。 The house was washed away by the flood .
(六)主动语态如何改为被动语态。
1.把主动语态的宾语变为被动语态的主语。
2.把谓语变成被动结构(be +过去分词)。根据被动语态句子里的主语的人称和数,以及原来主动语态句子中动词的时态来决定be 的形式。
3.把主动语态中的主语放在by 之后作宾语,将主格改为宾格。
4.其它部分的词放在原来位置上。
5.当主动语态的宾语补足语是省略to 的不定式时,变被动语态为主语补足语时,要把to 补出。
6.短语动词作谓语的句子变被动语态时不可丢掉介词或副词。
All the people laughed at him -----he was laughed at by all the people .
They often make us laugh .---we are made to laugh by them .
歌诀是:宾变主,主变宾,by短语后面跟。 谓语动词变被动,be后“过分”来使用。
(七) 被动语态变主动语态。
被动语态便主动语态与主动语态变被动语态方法相反。
被动语态by 宾语是主动语态的主语,宾格变成主格。将谓语的被动形式改为主动结构,改动时注意人称、数、时态的变化。把被动结构的主语变成主动结构的宾语。
It has been done by them .------they have done it .
(八) 被动语态的注意点
(1)时态保持一致。I have repaired my computer.---My computer has been repaired.
(2)谓语为动词短语的被动语态不能丢掉动词短语的介词或副词。
His best friend often looks after him. --He is often looked after by his best friend.
(3) 主动语态中若有双宾语,将其中一个宾语变为被动句的主语,另一个宾语不变。动词make/buy//get用for;动词give//send/lend/take用to) Vivian gave me a book. (双宾语,人间物直, me为间接宾语,a book 为直接宾语) -- I was given a book by Vivian.
--A book was given to me by Vivian.(直接宾语提前时,要在间接宾语前加介词)
(4)主动语态若有复合宾语,(即句子结构为主+及物动词+宾+宾补),将主动句的宾语变为被动句的主语,宾补不变。 They call him Louis. --He is called Louis.
(5)当“动词+宾语+宾语补足语”结构变为被动语态时,将宾语变为被动结构中的主语,其余不动。
Someone caught the boy smoking a cigarette.
可改为The boy was caught smoking a cigarette.
(6)主动语态句中动词make, have, let(使sb做sth), notice. see. watch, look at, hear, listen to, feel等变成被动语态时,后面的不定式需要加上to.
Mr. Lee made him wash the dishes. --He was made to wash the dishes.
(7)有些相当于及物动词的动词词组,如“动词+介词”,“动词+副词”等,也可以用于被动结构,但要把它们看作一个整体,不能分开。其中的介词或副词也不能省略。
例The meeting is to be put off till Friday.
(8)非谓语动词的被动语态 v.+ing 形式及不定式 to do 也有被动语态(一般时态和完成时态) 。
例I don't like being laughed at in the public.
(9)It is said that+从句及其他类似句型
一些表示“据说”或“相信”的动词如believe, consider, expect, report, say, suppose, think等可以用于句型“It+be+过去分词+that从句”或“主语+be+过去分词+to do sth.”。有:
It is said that„ 据说,It is reported that„据报道,It is believed that„大家相信,It is hoped that„大家希望,It is well known that„众所周知,It is thought that„大家认为,It is suggested that„据建议。
It is said that the boy has passed the national exam.
(=The boy is said to have passed the national exam. )
(九)主动形式表示被动意义。
1.英语中有很多动词如break , catch , clean, drive , lock, open, read , write , wear , wash , sell ,等,当它们用作不及物动词来描述主语(常识物)的特征,而非人为的原因时,常用主动形式表达被动意义。句中状语往往与表示效果或程度的副词连用如well, easily, fast, badly, smoothly .
This kind of cloth washes well .
注意:主动语态表被动强调的是主语的特征。而被动语态则强调外界作用造成的影响。
2.表示发生进行的不及物动词和短语happen ,take place, last ,break out , come out , come true , run out give out , turn out , belong to ,own , appear , agree with , rise , 等以主动形式表示被动意义。
How do the newspapers come out ?
3.有些表示状态的及物动词fit , mean , cost, weight , wish, measure equal ,等,没有被动语态。
4.系动词没有被动形式,但有些表示感受感官的连系动词,feel, look .sound . taste ,smell, turn ,get ,等在主系表结构中常以主动形式表示被动意义。
The mooncakes taste good ..
5.在need , want , require , bear 等词后面。动名词用主动形式表示被动意义,其含义相当于动词不定式的被动形式。 The house needs repaired (to be repaired )
6. worth 后面跟动名词的主动形式表示被动意义,但不能跟动词不定式。而worthy 后面跟不定式的被动形式
This picturebook is well worth reading .-----This picturebook is very worthy to be read .
7.动词不定式在名词后面作定语,不定式和名词之间有动宾关系,,又和句中另一名词或代词构成主谓关系时,不定式的主动形式表示被动意义。
I have a lot of things to do this afternoon. (to do与things是动宾关系,与I是主谓关系。)
试比较:I’ll go to the post office. Do you have a letter to be posted? ( 此处用不定式的被动语态作定语表明you不是post动作的执行者。)
(8) 在某些“形容词+不定式”做表语或宾语补足语的结构中,句子的主语或宾语又是动词不定式的逻辑宾语时,这时常用不定式的主动形式表达被动意义。这些形容词有nice,easy,fit,hard,difficult,important,impossible,pleasant,interesting等。
This problem is difficult to work out .(可看作to work out省略了for me).
(9) 在too„ to„结构中,不定式前面可加逻辑主语,所以应用主动形式表示被动意义。 例This book is too expensive (for me) to buy.
(10) 在there be„句型中,当动词不定式修饰名词作定语时,不定式用主动式作定语,重点在人,用被动形式作定语,重点在物。
There is no time to lose(to be lost).(用 to lose可看成for us to lose;用to be lost,谁 lost time不明确。)
(11) 在be to do结构中的一些不定式通常应用主动表主动, 被动表被动。然而,由于古英语的影响,下列动词rent,blame,let等仍用不定式的主动形式表示被动意义。 Who is to blame for starting the fire?
(12).介词in, on, under等+名词构成介词短语表被动意义 表示方位的介词与含动作意义的名词合用,含被动之义,其意义相当于该名词相应动词的被动形式,名词前一般不用冠词。
“under +名词”结构,表示“某事在进行中”。
常见的有:under control(受控制), under treatment(在治疗中), under repair(在修理中), under discussion(在讨论中), under construction(在施工中)。
例The building is under construction( is being constructed).
非谓语动词
概述:英语的动词就其功能而言有谓语动词和非谓语动词,谓语动词是可以单独做谓语的动词,非谓语动词在句中不可以单独作谓语,谓语动词有人称和数的变化,而非谓语动词则不受主语的人称和数的变化,和时态的限制。在什么情况下都是一样的。谓语动词只具备动词特点。非谓语动词具有动词和其它词的特点,在句中可做定语,状语,宾语补足语,主语,宾语,表语。非谓语动词有动词不定式,动名词,分词(现在分词和过去分词)
一不定式
(一)基本形式:to +动词原形,有时to 可以省略,这里的to 只是动词不定式标记和符号。本身没有词义,动词不定式没有人称和数的变化,动词不定式和它的宾语或状语构成不定式短语。
动词不定式是非谓语动词的一种,由不定式符号(to)加动词原形构成。不定式的形式有五种:
1. 一般式to do I like to read English.
2. 进行式to be doing He seemed to be reading something at that time.
3. 完成式to have done He seemed to have cleaned the room.
4. 被动式to be done The work is to be done soon.
5. 完成被动式 to have been done
The boy is said to have been sent to hospital yesterday.
(二)用法:动词不定式具有名词,形容词,副词特性,可做主语,宾语, 状语,表语,定语
1.作主语,
(1)不定式做主语时,可以直接放在谓语动词之前。
To see is to believe. Not to get there in time is your fault.
(2)注:常用it做形式主语,将to do放在位于之后,使句子保持平衡。
句型1:It + 谓语 + to do
It takes us an hour _to__ get there by bus.
句型2. Its + n. + to do
Its our duty _to_ help the poor. It is a great enjoyment _to_ spend our holiday in the mountains.
句型3: It is + adj + for sb to do sth(是形容事物的性质的 )
It is + adj + of sb to do sth(是形容人的品质的 )
It is easy for me to finish this work before ten.
learn English well is not easy .----It’s not easy to learn English well.
2.作定语:动词不定式作定语时应该放在所修饰的词后面,不定式做谓语与它所修饰的名词之间有逻辑上的动宾关系。如果是不及物动词,且与所修饰的名词有动宾关系,要在不定式后面加上适当的介词。当不定式所修饰的名词如果是time ,place, way, 不定式后面的介词习惯上要省略。
He has lots of things to do . he is looking for a room to live in . they found a place to stay .
1) 不定式与它所修饰的词有动宾关系 Do you have anything to wash today?
2) 不定式用来说明所修饰词的内容 I have no chance to go there.
3) 被修饰词是不定式的逻辑主语 She is always the last to leave the room.
4) 不定式为不及物动词且和所修饰的名词是动宾关系时,须加介词
A.The house is not big enough for us all to live in
B. Would you please pass me the knife to cut the fruit with
C.I have something important to say. Please find a piece of paper to write on
3.作宾语:
(1)有一些谓语动词后只能跟动词不定式作宾语,构成:动词+to do sth 结构。
这样的动词有:
想要 拒绝 忘记 want would like refuse forget
需要 努力 学习 need try learn
喜欢 同意 帮助 like love agree help
计划 决定 开始 plan decide start begin
希望 答应 命令 要求 hope wish promise order demand
记住 假装 设法 选择 remember pretend manage choose
(2)不定式的复合宾语:在find ,feel, think , make ,后面跟不定式作宾语时,常用it 代替,而将真正的宾语放在句末。构成主语+make(feel, think, find)+it +adj +to do sth 结构
I find it easy to read English every day .
(3)不定式作宾语补足语。不定式做宾语补足语时与宾语有逻辑上的主谓关系。
A. 下列动词后面不定式作宾补一定要带to 的不定式。构成动词+ sb+ to do sth
Want ,would like, ask ,tell , teach , wish ,invite , order , beg, get ,allow, encourage等
Lucy asked him to turn down the radio .
B.下列动词的不定式做宾补时,to必须省略 构成 动词+sb +do sth 结构。但改为被动语态时to 要补出来。这样的动词有:
一感feel. 二听 listen to ,hear ,三让 have ,make , let 四看 look at, watch , see , notice .
We often hear her sing in her room -----she is often heard to sing in her room .
C. help 后用动词不定式做宾语补足语时to 可有可无。
She often helps her mother (to )do housework .
4. 不定式做表语。 Her hobby is to collect stamps .
5. 做状语:
(1)目的状语。 I came here to see you .
(2) 结果状语。 Too to enough to in order to so as to
In order to pass the exam ,he worked very hard .
(3)原因状语。 不定式用在表语形容词或分词后,用来说明产生这种情况的原因,构成
Be +adj +to do sth 这样的形容词有 kind , nice , happy , sad , glad , sorry , afraid , worried , surprised, pleased , excited 等。 I’m sorry to hear that .
对比To learn English well, he needs a good dictionary. To learn English well, a good dictionary is needed. To get there in time, he told me to get up early. 不定式的主动形式表示被动意义
I have something important to do. In the accident, the driver was to blame. This question is difficult to answer. The box is not easy to carry.
6.其它用法。
(1)不定式与疑问词who,which , when , where,what, how等连用,在句子中起名词作用,可以充当主语,表语宾语等。How to do it , want to do 但没有why to do it 的结构。
He didn’t know what to do how to solve the problem is very important .
My question is when to start .
(2) 不定式的复合结构。
当句子中的不定式需要逻辑上的主语时,常用for 或of sb +to do sth 来构成不定式的复合结构。
It’s +adj +for/of sb +to do sth
如果需要说明动词不定式的动作是谁做的,就要用for ,但表语是kind , right , wrong clever , polite , nice 等描述行为者的性格品质的形容词,则用of .
It’s difficult for us to learn a foreign language . It’s kind of you to help me .
(三)注意含有介词to 的固定短语。
含有介词to 的固定短语,后接名词代词动名词。
Make a contribution to 为……做贡献 devote to 献身,致力于…… look forward to 期望……
Prefer to 两者之间更喜欢…… be used to 习惯,适应……give one's life to为……而献出生命”
二 动名词
动名词由动词+ing构成,动名词具有动词和名词性质,在句子中起名词总用,可以做主语,宾语, 表语, 定语, 同时动名词仍保留了动词的一些特性,可以有自己的宾语和状语。
1作主语。谓语动词用单数。动名词和不定式都可作主语,动名词表示的是一般的抽象的多次性的行为,不定式作主语往往表示具体的或一次性的动作。Seeing is believing .
2 做表语 :多数情况下,动名词做表语可转化成主语。
my job is feeding animals . Feeding animals is my job .
3.作宾语。 I like swimming. Thank you for helping me .
4.作定语。 I have a reading room .
5.no +动名词。 No smoking .
6. 英语中有一些动词后面跟动名词作宾语,这样的动词有
完成实践值得忙finish practice be worth be busy
继续习惯别放弃 keep/go on be used to give up
考虑建议不禁想 consider suggest ,can’t help. feel like
喜欢思念要介意 enjoy miss mind
When we heard the news ,we couldn’t help laughing .
7. 动名词可以有自己的宾语或状语。从而构成动名词短语。
She is good at speaking English . Shouting aloud in public is bad manners .
8.有些动词后接动名词和不定式的区别。
A.remember doing sth. 表示“记得曾经做过某事”
remember to do sth. 表示“记住要去做某事”,
B.forget doing sth. 表示“忘了曾经做过某事”,
forget to do sth. 表示“忘了去做某事”,如:
I remember meeting her at a party once. Did you remember to get the bread?
Remember to close the windows before you go out.
Don’t forget to bring your book tomorrow .
C.stop to do sth 停下正在做的事情,去做另一件事。
Stop doing sth 停止正在做的事
When the teacher came in ,they stopped taking . Let’s stop to have a rest .
D. Try to do sth 尽力做某事
Try doing sth 尝试着走某事,想知道结果,而尝试做做看。
Why don’t you try keeping a study diary? It’s a good way to learn .
E.stop to do sth 停下来去做另一件事
Stop doing sth 停止正在做的事情
We stopped to talk with him when we saw him .
She stopped talking when the teacher came in .
F. go on doing sth 继续做同一件事
Go on to do sth 做完一件事后接着做另一件事。
We had supper and went on to watch TV last night . We didn’t have a rest and went on working .
G.allow doing sth 允许做某事
Allow sb to do sth 允许某人做某事
We don’t allow smoking here . We don’t allow students to go out on school day .
H. regret to do sth 对要做的事情遗憾(还没有做)
Regret doing sth 对做过的事情遗憾,后悔。
I regret to have to do this ,but I have no choice .
I don’t regret telling her what I thought .
I.mean to do sth 打算或想做某事
Mean doing sth 意味着做某事。
I mean to go . but my father would not allow me to . Doing that means wasting time .
9. 动词 “like, love, hate, prefer”后接动名词表示“习惯性动作”,后接不定式表示“心理或一次具体动 作”。当用在 , would之后时,只跟不定式。例如:
I like swimming, but I dont like to swim this afternoon.
What would you like to eat tonight?
10. 动名词的复合结构
动名词前可以加一个 物主代词或 名词所有格来表示 这个动名词逻辑上的主语 ,构成动名词的复 合结构或动名词短语
a.动名词复合结构作主语时一般用名词所有格或形容词性的物主代词。例如:
Nixon’s visiting China marked a new year between U.S. and China diplomatic relations.
尼克松访问中国标志着中美外交关系进入一个新的时代
Their coming to help was a great encouragement to us.
b. 在口语和非正式语体中,只要不是作主语,动名词复合结构中的逻辑主语常采用名词通格或人 称代词宾格。例如: The doctor does not mind me /my eating a little meat occasionally
三 分词
英语中的分词有两种:现在分词和过去分词。及物动词的现在分词表示正在进行和主动意义,过去分词表示已经完成和被动意义。现将常用的英语分词的用法归纳如下:
1.作定语
分词可用来修饰名词或代词,并和所修饰的词在逻辑上有主谓关系。
(1)前置定语
单个分词作定语时,通常放在被修饰名词之前,作前置定语。例如: What exciting news it is!
这是多么令人振奋人心的消息!
There were a lot of excited people at the concert.演奏会上,很多人兴奋不已。
(2)后置定语
a、少数单个分词(尤其是过去分词为多)作定语时,也可作后置定语。例如: Make sentences with the words given .用所给的词造句。
The goods ordered will be delivered soon. The money left is far from enough.
Many people are dubious about the announcement from the authorities concerned.
b、单个分词作不定代词的定语时,要放在被修饰代词之后,作后置定语。例如: Is there anything unsolved ? 还有没解决的问题吗?
There is something missing . 有东西丢失了。
c、分词短语作定语时,要放在被修饰名词之后,作后置定语。这时的分词短语相当于一个定语从句。例如:
Do you know the old woman sitting under the tree ?(=Do you know the old woman who is sitting under the tree ?)
你认识坐在树下的那个老太太吗?
There comes a girl dressed in red .(=There comes a girl who is dressed in red .) 一个穿红衣服的女孩走过来了。
2.作表语
分词作表语,相当于形容词。现在分词作表语通常表示主语所具有的性质或特征,含有“令 人……的”意思。过去分词作表语多表示主语所处的情形或状态,含有“感到……的”意思。例如:
The match was very disappointing . 这场比赛令人失望。
They were very disappointed . 他们都非常失望。
3.作补语
(1)作宾语补语
a、分词作宾语补足语,宾语和现在分词(主动意义)有逻辑上的主谓关系,宾语和过去分词 (被动意义)有逻辑上的动宾关系。 分词通常用在see,hear, watch,notice,feel,find等感官动词或have,get,make等使役动 词的宾语之后,补充说明宾语的动作或状态。例如:
I found the man beating his dog there .
(=I found that the man was beating his dog there .)
我发现那个人在那儿打狗。
I found the man beaten black and blue .
(=I found that the man was beaten black and blue .)
我发现那个人被打得浑身青一块紫一块儿的。
过去分词在动词have,get之后作宾语补足语时,常常表示这动作不是由主语完成的,而是由 别人完成的。例如:
I want to have my shoes repaired .
(= My shoes are repaired by somebody .) 我想修鞋。
b、现在分词和不定式作宾语补足语在意义上有所不同。现在分词作宾语补足语,表示动作正 在进行,即动作处在发生过程中,还没有结束;而不定式作宾语补足语表示动作的全过程,即动作已结束了。例如:
I saw him going out.我看见他正在往外走。(正在发生)
I saw him go out.我看见他出去了。 (全过程)
Do you hear someone knocking at the door? 你听见有人在敲门吗?(正在发生)
Yes,I heard him knock three times.是的,我听见他敲了三下。(全过程)
(2)作主语补足语
带有分词作宾语补足语的句子如果改为被动语态时,分词不变,但这时分词就不再作宾补足语,而是作主语补足语。
A man was seen sitting under the tree .
看见有个人坐在那棵树下。
The door was found opened. 发现门被打开。
4.作状语
现在分词作状语,一般句子主语就是分词的主语。
(1)时间状语
分词作时间状语相当于when引导的时间状语从句,若两个动作同时发生,可以在分词前加入连词when或while。
Seeing the teacher entering the roomthe students stood up.
(= When the students saw the teacher entering the room,they stood up.)
学生们看到老师进来,都站了起来。
Seen from the moonthe earth looks like a ball.
(= When the earth is seenfrom the moon,it looks like a ball.)
从月球上看,地球像个圆球。
(2)原因状语
分词作原因状语时相当于as,since或because所引导的原因状语从句。
Not knowing what to do about it,I asked my teacher for advice.
(= Because I didn’t know what to do about it,I asked my teacher for advice.)
由于我不知道该怎么办,就征求老师的意见。
Encouraged by his speech the students decided to work hard.
(= As the students were encouraged by his speech,they decided to work hard.)
受他讲话的鼓舞,学生们决定努力学习。
(3)条件状语
分词作条件状语时相于if或unless引导的条件状语从句,也可在分词短语前加if或unless。例如:
Reading more carefully,you’ll learn something new.(
= If you read more carefully,you’ll learn something new.)
如果你读得更认真些,你就会学到一些新东西。
Given another chance,he’ll succeed.
(= If he is given another chance,he’ll succeed.)
如果再给他一次机会,他一定会成功。
(4)结果状语
分词作结果状语时相当于that引导的结果状语从句或并列句。例如:
The bottle dropped to the ground, breaking into pieces.
(=The bottle dropped to the ground that it broke into pieces.) 瓶子掉在地上摔碎了。
The old writer died all of a sudden, leaving his works unfinished.
(=The old writer died all of a sudden,and he left his works unfinished.)
这位年迈的作家没有完成他的著作就突然离开人世了。
(5)让步状语
分词短语作让步状语相当于让步状语从句。例如:
Tired,the old man continued to work.
(= Even though the old man was tired ,he continued to work.)
尽管老人累了,他仍继续干活。
Although built many years ago, the machines are still working in perfect order.
(= Although the machines were made many years ago, they are still working in perfect order.) 虽然这些机器是很多年前制造的,但现在仍然运行良好。
(6)方式状语或伴随状语
分词短语作方式状语或伴随状语时,没有对应的状语从句。例如: He came,running back to tell me the good news. 他跑回来告诉我这个好消息。
The teacher hurried to the office, followed by five students. 五个学生跟着老师匆匆忙忙地走进了办公室。
形 容 词
形容词
一、形容词的定义、用法
表示人或事物的属性或特征的词叫形容词(Adjective)。形容词修饰名词,它的基本用法就是为名词提供更多的信息,它分为性质形容词和叙述形容词两类,一般放在所修饰的名词之前;若修饰不定代词,则需后置。
形容词的判断方法
判断一个词是不是形容词,可以从其结构特点和句法特点两方面来确定。
(1)结构特点。
以-able,-al,-ful,-ic,-ish,-less,-ous,-y等后缀结尾的词,一般是形容词,如:changeable(多变的),medical(医学上的),careful(仔细的),atomic(原子的),foolish(愚蠢的),careless(粗心的),delicious(美味的),healthy(健康的),rainy(下雨的)等。
(2)句法特点。
大多数形容词都可以作定语;在be,look,seem等词之后作表语;可用very来修饰,有比较级和最高级形式。
形容词的用法
1.形容词用作定语
Li Mei is a beautiful city girl.李梅是一个漂亮的城市女孩。
The new student comes from Japan.那个新来的学生是日本人。
2.形容词用作表语
My father’s car is very expensive.我父亲的小车很贵。
The English story is very interesting.那个英文故事很有趣。
3.形容词用作宾语补足语
Don’t keep the door open. 别让门敞着。
His success made him happy.他的成功让他感到幸福。
We finally found the dictionaries very useful.我们最后发现词典很有用。
4.“the+形容词”用作主语及宾语
The old often think of old things.老年人经常回想往事。
The new always take the place of the old.新生事物总是会取代旧的事物。
5.形容词有时也可用作状语或补语
Please speak loud and clear.请说话大声一点、更清楚点。
These soldiers spent three days in the cold weather,cold and hungry.
士兵们又冷又饿在严寒的气候中过了三天。
After seven days, the children came back from the forest safe.
七天之后,孩子们安全地从森林中返回。
6.少数形容词只能作表语
这些形容词包括 ill,asleep,awake,alone,well,worth,glad,unable,afraid等,只能作表语,不能作定语。例如:
(正)Don’t be afraid.(误)Mr Li is an afraid man.
(正)The old man was ill yesterday.(误)This is an ill person.
(正)This place is worth visiting.(误)That is a worth book.
7.少数形容词只能作定语
这些形容词包括 little,live(活着的),elder,eldest 等,只能作定语,不能作表语。例如:
(正)My elder brother is a doctor.(误)My brother is elder than I.
(正)This is a little house.(误)The house is little.
(正)Do you want live fish or dead one?(误)The old monkey is still live.
二、形容词的位置
1.形容词一般放在名词前作定语
单个形容词修饰名词时,一般要放在名词的前面。它们的前面常常带有冠词、形容词性物主代词、指示代词、数词等。例如:
a red flower一朵红花an interesting story一个有趣的故事
six blind men 六个盲人my own house我自己的房子
1).当形容词所修饰的词是由some,any,every,no等构成的不定代词时,形容词必须置于名词 之后。例如:
She has something new to tell me.她有一些新的情况告诉我。
I have nothing important to do today.今天我没有重要的工作要做。
Do you know anybody else here?这儿你还有认识的人吗?
2).形容词后面有介词短语或不定式短语时,形容词必须置于名词之后。例如:
It is a problem difficult to work out.这是一道难以解决的问题。
Edison is a student difficult to teach.爱迪生是个很难教的学生。
This is a kind of flowers easy to grow.这是一种易栽的花。
3).在以下特殊用法中,形容词置于所修饰的名词之后。
All people,young or old,should be strict with themselves.
所有的人,无论老少,都应该严格要求自己。
We are building a new school, modern and super.
我们正在建一所现代化的高档次的新型学校。
All countries, rich and poor, should help one another.
所有的国家,无论穷富都应该互相帮助。
4).有少数形容词,如enough和possible,既可置于所修饰的名词前面也可以置于它所修饰的名词之后。例如:
Do you have enough time(time enough)to prepare?你有足够的时间做准备吗?
Maybe it will be a possible chance(chance possible)for you
.或许它将成为一次可能的机遇。
5).有些形容词,置于名词之前与之后,含义不尽相同。例如:
the writer present 出席的作者 the present writer 现在的作者
2. 两个以上的形容词修饰一个名词时的排列顺序
限定词→一般描绘性形容词→表示大小、长短、高低的形容词→表示形状的形容词→表示年龄、新旧的形容词→表示色彩的形容词→表示国籍、地区、出处的形容词→表示物质、材料的形容词→表示用途、类别的形容词→名词中心词。例如:
an exciting international football match 一场令人激动的国际足球赛
a new red sports shirt 一件新的红色运动衫
a light black plastic umbrella 把轻的黑塑料伞
a small old brown wooden house 一座小的旧的棕色的木头房子
巧记形容词的排列顺序
即请你记住“限观形令色国材”这几个字,这似乎有点不大好记,那就请你记住“县官行令谢国材”吧。其分别的含义是:
“县”(限)代表限定词,包括:冠词、指示代词、形容词性物主代词、名词所有格、
数词等。
“官”(观)代表表示观点的描绘性形容词,如:fine,beautiful,interesting等。
“行”(形)代表表示大小、长短、高低及形状的形容词,如:small,tall,high,little, round等。 “令”(龄)代表表示年龄、新、旧的形容词,如old,young等。
“谢”(“色”的近似音)代表表示颜色的形容词,如:white,black,yellow等。
“国” 代表表示国籍、地区、出处的形容词(名词),如:English,American,mountain
等。
“材” 则代表形成中心名词的材料的形容词,如:stone,wooden,silk,plastic等。
多个形容词同时修饰同一个名词时,就按上述顺序排列,然后加上中心名词。
.a fine old stone bridge一座古老漂亮的石头桥
. two big round new Chinese wooden tables 两张新的中国式的木制大圆桌
. his large new black foreign car 他那辆新的大型黑色外国进口汽车
特别连接.常见的后跟形容词作表语的词:
①become,come,fall,get,go,grow,make,turn,wear(表示“变成某种状态”)
②continue,hold,keep,lie,remain,stay(表示“保持某种状态”)
③appear,feel,look,smell,sound,taste,know,write(表示“感觉”)
He turned red when he heard the news.听到这个消息,他的脸变红了。
It’s going to stay cold for some time.天气还要冷一阵子。
The beer tastes very delicious.这啤酒尝起来很可口。
三、形容词的比较等级
1.形容词原级的用法
1.只能修饰原级的词,very,quite,so,too
He is too tired to walk on.他太累了以至于不能再继续走了。
My brother runs so fast that I can‘t follow him.我弟弟跑得那么快以至于我跟不上他。
形容词的原级常用于“as…as”及“not as(so) …as”两种句型中。
1).句型“as…as”,表示两者相比较,程度相同。例如:
The old man walks as fast as a young man.这位老人走路与青年人一样快。
Science is as important as maths.自然科学与数学一样重要。
This coat is as expensive as that one.这件上衣与那件一样贵。
2).句型“not as(so) …as”,表示两者相比较,程度不一样。例如:
I’m not as tall as Jack. 我不如杰克高。
She doesn’t run so fast as I. 她不如我跑得块。
This warship is not so big as that one.这条军舰不如那条大。
同级比较歌诀
同级比较用原级,as…as不分离;若是否定加not,as…as否前者。
as…as加not,只说两者有区别。so…as加not,后者总是强前者。
3).在使用“as…as”与“not as(so) …as” 句型,应该特别注意“as…as”或“not as(so) …as”中间的形容词必须是形容词的原级。例如:
(正)Today is as warm as yesterday.(误)Today is as warmer as yesterday.
(正)I’m not so careful as my brother.(误)I’m not so more careful as my brother.
4).需要注意的原级形容词用法:
①“数词+times+as+形容词原级+as”(是……的几倍)。例如:
This tree is twice as short as that one.这棵树比那棵树矮两倍。
My scores are three times as many as yours.我的比分是你的三倍。
This road is four times as wide as that one.这条马路的宽度是那条的四倍。
②“half+as+形容词原级+as”(……的一半……)。例如:
My English is not half as good as yours.我的英语不如你的一半好。
This town is half as big as ours.这个城镇有我们的城镇一半大。
The rivers in the north aren’t half as many as those in the south.
北方的河流不如南方的一半多。
③“as…as”结构中,若形容词作定语修饰可数名词单数,不定冠词a(an)应置于形容词与名词之 间。例如:
English is as important a subject as maths.英语和数学是同样重要的一门学科。 Uncle Wang is as good a man as my father.王叔叔是与我父亲同样好的一个人。 This is as famous a school as ours.这是一所与我们学校同样著名的学校。
④“as…as”结构若指同一个人或物,则并无比较意义,而只是说明某人或某物具有两种性质。译为“又……又……”或“不但……而且……”。例如:
This computer is as good as it is cheap.这台电脑质量又好又便宜。
The boy is as strong as he is brave.这个男孩又健壮又勇敢。
The city of Suzhou is as beautiful as it is clean.苏州城既美丽又干净。
⑤The same as 表示与……相同。
The coat is the same as that one .
⑥表示比喻。 A +be = as + A +be = as +原级+ as +B
He is as busy as a bee .
2.形容词的比较等级的构成:比较级和最高级
1.一般在词尾直接加er或est,例如,tall-taller-tallest,long-longer-longest
2.以不发音的字母e结尾的单词在词尾直接加r或st,例如,nice-nicer-nicest
3.以辅音字母+y结尾的词,把y变为i,再加er或est,例如,heavy-heavier-heaviest
4.重读闭音节,末尾只有一个辅音字母,双写这个辅音字母,再加er或est,例如,big-bigger-biggest
5.部分双音节词和多音节词分别在原级前加more构成比较级和most构成最高级,例如,slowly-more slowly-most slowly;beautiful-more beautiful-most beautiful
二、不规则变化
下列单、双音节词只能加more和most.
3.形容词的比较级的用法
1)表示两者之间比较时,用“形容词比较级+than” 或more (less) ….than….. 两种句型。例如:
Your mother looks healthier than before.你妈妈看上去比以前健康了。
I’m less interested in basketball than you.我对篮球的兴趣不如你大。
2)“甲+be+(倍数)+形容词比较级+than+乙” “甲比乙…几倍”
Tom is three years older than jim .
This room is three times bigger than that one.这个房间比那个大三倍。
3).形容词的比较级还可以用于以下句型中。
①比较级+and +比较级, more and more+原级(越来越……)。例如:
The park is getting more and more beautiful.这个公园变得越来越美了。
China had become stronger and stronger.中国已变得越来越强大了。
②the +比较级,the+比较级(越……就越……)。例如:
The more books we read, the cleverer we will become.
我们读的书越多,就会变得越聪明。
The more trees, the better. 树越多越好。
The sooner, the better. 越早越好。
The more exercise we take, the healthier we are.我们越锻炼,身体就越健康。
③“the+比较级+of the two……(两个中较……的一个)”。例如:
I’d like to go to the farther of the two places.
两个地方相比较,我愿意去更远的一个。
She is the fatter of the two girls.她是那两个女孩中较胖的一个。
④ 比较级+than any other +n. (单) (适用于范围一致时)
(all) other +n.(复)
any +n.(单) (适用于范围不一致时)
The Yangtze River is longer than any other river in China.
=The Yangtze River is longer than any of the other rivers in China.
长江比中国的任何一条其他的河都长。
=The Yangtze River is longer than the other rivers in China.
长江比中国的其他所有的河都长。
=The Yangtze River is the longest river in China.长江是中国最长的河流
注意:The Yangtze River is longer than any river in Japan.
长江比日本的任何一条河都长。
(5)“特殊疑问词+be+形容词比较级,甲or乙?”
Which is bigger,the earth or the moon?哪一个大,地球还是月球?
3).形容词的比较级前还可以用much,a lot, far, even, still, a little, no, any等表示程度的词来修饰.
I feel a little better than yesterday.我感觉比昨天好一点儿了。
The job is far more difficult than before.这工作比以前要难得多。
4.形容词的最高级的用法
1)三者或三者以上相比较用 “主语+be+the+形容词最高级+单数名词+in/of/among短语”表示“…… 是……中最……的”。
Tom is the tallest in his class./of all the students.汤姆是他们班上/所有学生当中最高的。
This apple is the biggest of the five.这个苹果是五个当中最大的。例如:
This is the cleanest place of the city.这是这个城市最清洁的地方。
Hu Yun is the fastest of all the girls in our class.胡云是我们女生中跑得最快的。 2).表示“最……之一”,用“one of the+形容词最高级+复数名词”。例如:
The Great Wall of China is one of the greatest buildings in the world.
中国的长城是世界上最伟大的建筑之一。
This is one of the most interesting books that I’ve ever read.这是我读过的最有趣的书之一。
3) 序数词+最高级+名词单数 表示第……
Yellow river is the second longest river in china .
4)特殊疑问词+be+the+最高级+甲,乙,or丙?
Which is the biggest , Beijing , shanghai or Guangzhou ?
注意. 形容词的最高级前面必须加定冠词the,但当形容词最高级前面有物主代词,指示代词,名词所有格等修饰时,则不加the。例如:
(正)This is my best friend. (误)This is my the(the my) best friend.
(正)Today is the happiest day of my life.(误)Today is happiest day of my life.
四.相关词语辨析
(1)和冠词连用
the +形容词原级+v(复),指一类人或物
the + 形容词比较级,指两者中“较…的”的那一个, the younger of the two
a/ an +形容词比较级eg. The pen is expensive. I want a cheaper one.
( a) +most+形容词最高级 “非常…” a most beautiful city
2).very 和much
A)very修饰形容词、副词的原级;
much修饰比较级;修饰动词用much或very much ,
I very like English.(×),因改为:I like English very much.
B) 表示状态的过去分词前用very。a very frightened boy, a very tired child .一般的情况下,以-ed结尾的分词多用much、very much / greatly等修饰。
如:We were greatly /much shocked by the news about Tom..
C) 已转化为形容词的现在分词前用very。 :very interesting / worrying / exciting
D)too前用much/ far ,不用very。 You are much / far / a lot too nice.
另外,在too many / much, too few / little前用far。
We’ve got far too many eggs and far too few egg cups.
E)还有修饰词既不用very,也不用much. be well worth doing, be well above the tree
2. so和such
A)so … that … 与such … that … 的区别。
so + 形容词 / 副词 + that …
so + 形容词 + a(n)+ 单数可数名词 + that …
so + many / much / little / few + 名词 + that …
such + a(n)+ 形容词+单数可数名词 + that …
such + 形容词 + 不可数名词 + that … such + 形容词 + 复数名词 + that …
注意: 但当little表示“小”时用such。
如:These are such little boys that they can’t dress themselves.
下列so的用法是错误的:
so a difficult problem, so difficult problems, so hot weather。
B) some/ any/ every/ no/ each/ all/ another/ several/ few/ many/ one/ two
+such+n. eg. no such word
3. be too much + n. be much too+ adj.
be too much for sb. 对…太过分了
4. can’t be too +adj.= can’t be +adj.+ enough “无论…都不为过”
You can never be careful enough.= You can never be too careful.你越小心越好
5. more…than…结构,其意往往是…rather than…,可译为“是……而不
是……”或颠倒词序译作“与其说是……,不如说是……”。
That little girl is more tired than hungry. 那个小姑娘是累了而不是饿了。 She is more a mother than a wife或She is more of a mother than a wife.
她是贤妻,更是良母。
6. A is to B what C is to D A和B的关系就像C和D的关系
Air is to man what water is to fish. 空气 对于人类就像水和鱼的关系。
7. no more than= only “只不过”,言其少
not more than=at most “不多于”,“至少”,指事实。
no more …than… 和…一样不… 如单音节使用比较级形式
not more…than… 不比…更…
no less than= as much as “多达”
no fewer than= as many as
例:I have no more than five yuan in my pocket. 我口袋里的钱只不过5元。
I have not more than five yuan in my pocket. 我口袋里的钱不多于5元。
He is no richer than I.他和我一样穷。
He is no less determined than you. 他的决心不亚于你。 (no less determined than等于“其决心不亚于你”,言其大) He is not less determined than you. 他的决心不比你小。
(not less determined than等于“其决心不小于”,无言其大或小的含义)
8.farther与further都是形容词和副词far的比较级:
far—farther—farthest far—further—furtherst 但是它们在词义和用法上却有区别。
(1)farther一般只用于表示有形距离的“较远”、“更远”:
On the farther side of the steet there was a large shop. 在街的那一边有一家大商店。
We can't go any farther without a rest. 我们不休息就不能再走了。
(2)(A)further既可表示有形距离的“较远”、“更远”:
There is a cottage on the further side of the hill. 在小山的那一边有一个茅舍。
It turned out a further distance than he had imagined. 原来距离比他想象的要远。
It's not safe to go any further. 再往远走,就不安全了。
(B)further也还可表示“更多的”;“另一些”;“进一步的”;“而且”;“此外”等等:
. Have you any further questions to ask? 你们还有问题要问吗?
We intend to stay for a further two months. 我们打算再停留两个月。
If you need further information, I suggest you go to the library.
如果你需要进一步的资料,我建议你去图书馆查查。
9. older、elder elderly
elder、older这两个词均是old的比较级,在用法上有所区别。elder本身也是形容词。
1).elder表示“前辈的”、“年纪较长的”,仅用于同一家庭成员的比较;older则不限于此。
My younger son is five and my elder son is nine。我的小儿子5岁,大儿子9岁。
Tom is two years older than I.汤姆比我年长两岁。
2).elder在句中只用作定语,不作表语;older两者皆可。
My elder sister does her homework all by herself. 我的姐姐独自做作业。
His elder son got married last week. 他的长子是上星期结婚的。
I think his mother is older. 我认为他的母亲年龄大引起。
3.)elder只能用来指人;older既可修饰人,也可修饰物。例如:
My elder brother joined the army when he was only fifteen.我哥哥年仅15岁就参了军。
This dog is older than any other dogs here.这条狗在这里是最老的一条。
I have a sister older than myself.我有位比我大的姐姐。
It is said Mr Chen is over ten years older than Mrs Li.据说陈先生比李女士大10多岁。
4.)elderly是形容词,“较老的”。elderly是委婉用语意为上了年纪的,一般不说old man而用elderly man代替,the elderly泛指老人。
His mother's elder sister is an elderly woman now.
10. -ed形容词与-ing 形容词的用法区别
1. 以后缀-ed结尾的形容词(如ashamed, delighted, excited, frightened, interested, moved, pleased, surprised, worried等)通常用于说明人,不用于说明事物,即使它们所修饰的名词是事物,那它们指的也是与该事物相关的人。如:
He had a pleased smile on his face. 他脸上露出了满意的微笑。
He told me the news in a very excited voice. 他告诉了我这个消息,声音很激动。
第一句中的a pleased smile 意为“满意的微笑”,它指的是某人因感到满意发出的微笑;第二句中的 excited voice 指的是“激动的声音”,即指的是带有这种声音的某人感到激动。
原则上,-ed 形容词通常直接用于说明人,若修饰事物,则多为 air(神态), appearance(外貌), cry(哭声), face(表情), voice(声音), mood(情绪)等与显示某人的情感状况的名词。
2. 以后缀-ing结尾的形容词(如delighting, exciting, frightening, interesting, moving, surprising, worrying 等)主要用于说明事物,表示事物的性质或特征,若用它们说明人,则表示此人具有此性质或特征。如(from www.yygrammar.com):
The story is very interesting. 这个故事很有趣。
The man is very interesting. 这个人很有趣。
11. One Ones That Those在比较结构中的用法区别
在比较结构中,为了避免重复,常用替代词替代名词词组或它的中心词。可以这样用的替代词常用的且较难掌握的有one,ones,that和those。
I.替代词one和ones的用法:
1.one只能替代单数名词,one的复数形式ones只能替代复数名词。例如:
My child doesn't like this book.Show her a more interesting one.
2.替代词one或ones必须带有一个限定或修饰词,它们和所替代的名词中心词所指不一定是同一对象,这是替代词one或ones在用法上的一个重要特征。例如:
I don't like this book.I'd like a more interesting one.
3.当替代词one或ones带有后置修饰语时,它们前面总有定冠词。例如:
Our new cassette is more expensive than the one we had before.
4.当替代词one或ones在形容词比较级、最高级以及某些限定词如this,that,which和序数词等之后,可以省略。例如: This book is much better than that(one).
5.替代词one或ones通常不用在物主代词和名词所有格之后。如不可说my one(s),your one(s),Peter's one(s)等等。one或ones也不能用在own之后。
但是,如果有了形容词,one(s)可以和物主代词及名词所有格连用。如:
My cheap camera seems to be just as good as John's expensive one.
6.one作替代词时,在of前面不能用the one来表示所属关系和类似概念。如不可说:
*He put down his gun and picked up the one of Henry. 该用一个所有格来表示He picked up Henry's.
7.当两个形容词表示对照的意思时,不能使用替代词one。仅在其中一个形容词后加上名词即可。例如:
Don't praise the younger child in the presence of the elder.
8.替代词one如果不带任何前置修饰语,即它的前面既没有限定词,又没有形容词时,便不是替代名词词组的中心词,而是替代整个名词词组。这时,one=a+单数名词。例如:
A cake made of wheat costs less than one made of rice.(one=a cake)
one的这种用法是泛指同类事物中的任何一个,相当一个不定冠词,因此它没有复数形式。要泛指复数事物,只能用some。例如:
Here are a few apples.Would you like some(=some of them)?
II.替代词that和those的用法:
1. that和those通常用作指使代词,也可用作替代词。它们总是伴随着限定性的后置修饰语,分别等于the one和the ones。
The houses of the rich are generally larger than those of the poor.
2.that也可替代不可数名词,但是the one则不能。例如:
The resistance of a thicker wire is less than that of a thin one. 以上两例中的that都不能换成the one。
3.that作替代词,只能指物,不能指人。those作替代词,既可指物,也可指人。例如:
The blonde girl I saw was older than the one you were dancing with. 该句中的the one不能换成that。
4.that用作替代词和它所替代的名词词组的中心词的“数”可以不一致。替代单数名词时,只替代“the+单数名词”,不可替代“a+单数名词”。例如:
The song by Schubert is more tuneful than that by Britain.(that=the song。song为可数名词。)
请注意,这里说的that只替代“the+单数名词”,不可替代“a+单数名词,系指that在句子中实际的作用,并非要求它在句子中所代表的前面出现的词组必须是“the+单数名词。例如: In those days they lived a life worse than that of a beast of burden. 在该句中,前面出现的词组为a life,但that替代的却是the life。 that作为替代词,它不能用于零关系分句(即没有关系代词的定语从句)之前。例如:
The problem confronting us today is not dissimilar from that which the nation confronted in the 1930s
数 词
表示数目多少或顺序的词叫数词。数词分为基数词和序数词两种,在英语中表示事物数目的词称为基数词;表示事物顺序的数词称为序数词。
一、基数词
一)基数词的读法。
1)1---10 : one two three four five six seven eight nine ten
2)11---19: 词尾加-teen :thirteen fourteen fifteen sixteen seventeen eighteen nineteen 其中eleven, twelve, thirteen, fifteen, eighteen为特殊形式
3)20,30,40,50,60,70,80,90 : 逢十词尾加-ty
twenty thirty forty fifty sixty seventy eighty ninety 其中twenty,thirty, forty,fifty,eighty为特殊形式
4)21----99: 在十位与个位之间加连字符构成
. 21--- twenty-one 99---ninety-nine
5)101---999 :百位数与十位数之间要加and ,再加末尾两位数或个位数.
101---one hundred and one
238----two hundred and thirty-eight 320 three hundred and twenty
6)1000以上的数要使用计数间隔或,先将数字从右往左数,每三位数用一个逗号隔开, 从右往左第一个逗号表示 “千”读thousand 第二个逗号表示 “百万”读million 第三个逗号表示 “十亿”读billion且hundred, thousand, million等用单数形式。注意,百位数hundred与十位数(或个位数)之间要用and连接。十位数与个位数之间要用连字符号“-”,如:
52,368读作:fifty-two thousand, three hundred and sixty-eight.
18,657,421---eighteen million ,six hundred and fifty-seven thousand ,four hundred and twenty-one.
2,648 two thousand six hundred and forty-eight
16,250,064 sixteen million two hundred and fifty thousand sixty-four
5,237,166,234 five billion,two hundred and thirty-seven million,one hundred and sixty-six thousand,two hundred and thirty-four
7)在基数词中只有表示百,千,百万,十亿的词,没有表示万和亿的词,而是用thousand 和million来表达。一万=ten thousand 一亿=one hundred million
二)基数词表计量
基数词表计量大于1时,它所修饰的名词要用复数形式。如: two bottles of water (两瓶水); three boxes of apples(三箱苹果)。
三)基数词表番号(编号)
编号的事物如果数字较大,一般用基数词表达,且放在编号的事物名词之后。注意大小写字母。如:No.102 Middle School (102中学);Room 206 (206房间) 第207房间:Room 207
如果编号的事物数字不大,也可用序数词表达,但它应放在编号名词之前。如:the first lesson (第一课) 第五课: Lesson 5 = the fifth lesson
四)基数词表时刻
1)英语时刻表达法有两种:一种顺读法,是先说小时后说分钟。
6:36 six thirty-six
逆读法:先说分钟数,后说钟点数,中间要用past或to连接。
即:1~30分钟(含30分钟)用“分钟数+past+钟点数”;31~59分钟用“(60-分钟数)
+to +下一个钟点数”。
4:20 four twenty或 twenty past four 3:25 twenty-five past three
5:45 five forty-five或 fifteen to six或 a quarter to six
3:35 twenty-five to four
以小时、分钟为单位分别读出数字。
2)一些时间段的表达。
半小时half an hour 一两天one or two days =a day or two
每两天,每隔一天 every other day =every two days
几个半的表达 一天半 a day and a half=one and a half days
再几个的表达 再多两个小时 two more hours=another two hours
注:时刻表上的时间大多采用24小时表示法,这样就不需要用a.m.表示上午,p.m.表示下午了。
五)基数词复数表岁数或年代
注意:表示“几十”的基数词的复数形式,可用来表示某人的大概岁数或年代。
In his forties.在他四十多岁时
世纪可以用定冠词加序数词加世纪century表示,也可以用定冠词加百位整数加`s表示
the sixth(6th)century 公元六世纪
the eighteenth(18th)century 公元十八世纪
the 1900`s 二十世纪 the 1600`s 十七世纪
in the eighties 在八十年代
这里,用百位数整数表示的世纪比这一百位阿拉伯数字本身多一个世纪。 年代用定冠词及基数词表示的世纪加十位整数的复数形式构成
in the 1930`s(in the thirties of the twentieth century或 in the nineteen thirties)在二十世纪三十年代
in the 1860`s(in the sixties of the 19th century或 in the eighteen sixties) 在十九世纪六十年代
My uncle went to England in his twenties. 我叔叔在20多岁时去了英国。
He became a professor in his thirties.
It was in the 1960s.那是在二十世纪六十年代。
These eggs were found in the Gobi Desert by a group of scientists in the 1920s.
这些恐龙蛋是20世纪20年代由一群科学家在戈壁沙漠发现的。
表达年代的早起中期晚期可在定冠词后年代之前加early mid- late .
In the early 1820’s in the mid-1950’s
六)含基数词的复合形容词
“基数词+名词(+形容词)”构成的复合形容词作定语时,其中的名词用单数形式。如:two-week holiday 两周的假 ; an eighteen-metre-wide street 一条18米宽的街道
但注意它与名词所有格形式作定语的区别。如:How far is it from your home to your school? It’s about ten minutes’ walk.
从你家到到学校多远?大约十分钟路程。
七)基数词与“多少又一半”的表达
“多少又一半”的表达有种方法:一种是“数词+n.(单数或复数)+and a half”;另一种是“数词+and a half +n.复数”。如:“两个半月”可译为:two months and a half或two and a half months
八)hundred, thousand, million等表示大约数与确切数的区别
基数词表示具体数目时,hundred, thousand, million用单数形式。但在表示“数百”、“数千”、“数百万”等不确切数目时,hundred, thousand, million要用复数形式,且后接“of +名词复数”。此种结构前可以加 some ,several , many等词。如:
There are nine hundred and forty-seven students in our school. 我校有947个学生。
Thousands of students come to visit the Museum of Natural History every year.
每年有数千学生来参观这个自然历史博物院。 Many thousands of girls are singing
注意此题:
Three______the students are boys. A hundred of B hundreds of C hundreds Dhundred
正确答案时A。
.
九)年月日表示法
月 日,年 日 月 年 (the +序数词+of +月, 年)
注:年份的读法: 日用序数词,读日时要加the。月用英语单词,年用基数词。先读前两位数,再读后两位数.
1949年10月1日 : October the first , nineteen forty-nine
=the first of October, nineteen forty-nine
2007年3月21日---the twenty-first of March ,two thousand and seven. 2000年: the year two thousand = twenty hundred 2001年: twenty o one
3月1日: March the first = the first of March
A.年份用基数词表示,一般写为阿拉伯数字,读时可以以hundred为单位,也可以以世纪、年代为单位分别来读。
1949 读作 nineteen hundred and forty-nine 或 nineteen forty-nine 1800 读作 eighteen hundred
253 读作 two hundred and fifty-three或two fifty-three 1902 读作 nineteen hundred and two或 nineteen o two
表示在哪一年,一般在年、月前加介词in,使用year时,year放在数词之前。日期前用on,时刻前用at.
in the year two fifty-three B.C. 在公元前253年 但是,通常采用in加表示年份的阿拉伯数字。
B. 月份,在哪个月用介词in加第一个字母大写的月份词表示。例如:in May在五月; in July在七月。为了简便起见,月份与日期连用时,月份常用缩写形式表示。缩写形式除May,June,July外,其它的月份都由其前三个字母表示,但September除外。
January——Jan.一月 February——Feb.二月 March——Mar. 三月 April——Apr.四月 August——Aug.八月 September——Sept.九月 October——Oct.十月
November——Nov.十一月 December——Dec.十二月
注:这里缩写形式后面加点不能省略,因为它是表示缩写形式的符号。 C.日期用定冠词the加序数词表示。在哪一天要添加介词on。 National Day is on Oct. 1.国庆节是十月一日。(读作 October the first)
此句也可以表示为 National Day is on the 1st of October. May 5 五月五日(读作May the fifth)
也可以表示为the fifth(5th)of May
Mar. 1(st) 三月一日(读作March first或 the first of March)
十)基数词和某些单数名词构成复合形容词,它在句中只能做定语,但在数词和名词之间要用连字符,如有形容词,也要用连字符。
A six-year-old girl a five-foot-deep hole An eight-hundred-meter-long bridge A two-thousand-word report
十一)表示一些数学公式时用基数词
2+4 two plus four is (makes) six. 6-3 six minus three
5×7 five times seven
8÷2 eight divided by two
等号读equals,makes,is, is equal to 等。小数点读point
加”用plus,and或add表示;“减”用 minus或 take from表示
乘”用time(动词)或multiply表示除”用divide的过去分词形式表示
十二)倍数表达法
一倍用once,两倍用twice, 三以上的倍数times
数词+times +as形容词/副词原级+as 数词+times+比较级+than
The room is twice as large as that one. The earth is 49times the size of the moon.
My age is three times older than yours .
十三).数词前加every ,表示每……/每隔…… .
every ten days =every ninth day 每十天(每隔九天)
注:every +基数词 +复数名词 = every + (序数词-1) +单数名词
十四)年龄表示法:
(1)、基数词(+years old)
(2)、at the age of + 基数词
(3)、a + 基数词-year-old + 名词
(4)、of + 基数词 (+ years)
When she was 11,she began to work.
at the age of 14
a 54-year-old man
a boy of 14 (years
十五)、表示长宽高面积等时,基数词+单位词 metre kilogram ,inch )+形容词(long, wide ,high,weigh )=基数词+单位词+in+名词(length , width , height weight)
More than six thousand metres long = More than six thousand metres in length .
十六)表示整体概念(时间,距离,价格,重量,数目,数学运算等)的词或短语做主语时,谓语动词用单数。
Ten dollars isn’t enough . five years has passed .
十七)基数词的句法功能
基数词在句中可作主语、宾语、定语、表语、同位语。
The two happily opened the box。两个人高兴地打开了盒子。(作主语)
I need three altogether.我总共需要三个。(作宾语)
Four students are playing volleyball outside.四个学生在外面打排球。(作定语)
We are sixteen.我们是16个人。(作表语)
They three tried to finish the task before sunset.
他们三个人尽力想在日落前完成任务。(作同位语)
二、序数词
一) 序数词的构成及基本用法。
A.从第一至第十九
其中,one— first, two— second, three— third, five— fifth,eight—eighth,nine—ninth,twelve— twelfth为特殊形式,其它的序数词都是由其相对应的基数词后面添加“th”构成。例如: six— sixth、nineteen— nineteenth.
整十的序数词。Twenty ,thirty forty fifty sixty seventy ,eighty ninety
B.从第二十至第九十九
整数第几十的形式由其对应的基数词改变结尾字母y为i,再加“eth”构成。 twenty——twentieth thirty——thirtieth 表示第几十几时,用几十的基数词形式加上连字符“-”和个位序数词形式一起表示。
thirty-first 第三十一 fifty-sixth 第五十六 seventy-third 第七十三 ninety-ninth 第九十九
C.第一百以上的多位序数词
由基数词的形式变结尾部分为序数词形式来表示。 one hundred and twenty-first 第一百二十一
one thousand,three hundred and twentieth 第一千三百二十
D.序数词的缩写形式
有时,序数词可以用缩写形式来表示。主要缩写形式有。 first——lst second——2nd third——3rd
fourth——4th sixth——6th twentieth——20th
twenty-third——23rd
其中lst,2nd,3rd为特殊形式,其它的都是阿拉伯数字后加上th。
注意:序数词一般以与之相应的基数词后加-th 构成,少数几个需特别记忆。为方便大家记忆,请看下面口诀。
基变序,有规律,first, second, third要牢记; 其它变化有公式,基数词尾加-th;
eight去t , nine去e ,ve则以f替;
从twenty, thirty到ninety, 需变y为ie; 若是遇到“几十几”,只变个位就可以。
注意:序数词前要加定冠词the, 在句中作定语放在所修饰的名词前。如:December is the twelfth month of the year. 十二月是一年中的第12个月。
二) 序数词与冠词a/an连用。
序数词前加不定冠词a/an, 表示“又一”、“再一”的意思。 如:Please try it a second time. 请再试一试。 Why not try a fourth time?
但基数词与more连用,并放在more前,表示“另外有”、“还有”的意思。
数词+more +名词=another+ 数词+名词。
如:I’l take one more (=another) pencil. 我还要一支铅笔。
We ‘ve just started! There were twenty more trees to be planted!我们才刚开始呢!还有20棵树要栽呢!
三)分数、小数、百分数 的表达法。
1.分数以基数词和序数词合成的。分子用基数表示,分母用序数词表示,分子大于1,分母要用复数(-s)。如: 分子基,分母序,分子大于1,分母加S
1/2 二分之一 a half 1/3(三分之一) :one third 2/3 :two thirds分子与分母之间不用连字符,含分数的短语作主语由分数后的词决定谓语
One third of the students are girls. One third of the milk is mine.
Three quarters (3/4) of the workers are young.
分数的特殊形式:
1)one second = one half= a half
2)one fourth = a/one quarter three fourths = three quarters
3)one and a half hours
带分数也是常见的英语数词表达。所谓带分数,实际上是“整数+分数”,表达时分而述之,只是整数部分与分数部分要用连词 and连接。当带分数修饰名词时,该名词通常是复数,但若名词置于整数one或a之后,则用单数。“带分数+名词”作主语时,要用复数。例如:
You should finish the work within one and a fourth hours.
你应在1.25小时内完成工作。
当分数后面接名词时,如果分数表示的值大于1,名词用复数;小于1,名词用单数。
1/2 hours 一个半小时(读作 one and a half hours)
3/4 meters 二又四分之三米(读作two and three-fourths meters)
4/5 meter 五分之四米 5/6 inch 六分之五英寸
2.小数是以基数词加小数点表示,小数点前面的数按基数词的规则读,小数点后面的数按个位基数词依次读出,当小数后面接名词时,如果小数表示的值大于1,名词用复数;小于1,名词用单数。
如: 0.5 — zero point five
0.006 — zero point zero zero six
0.257 — zero point two five seven
148.06 — a/one hundred and forty-eight point zero six
其中zero可替换为naught或读作oh。
3.百分数是由基数词或小数加百分号组成,百分号(%)读作per cent,如:
0.6% — zero point six per cent
5% — five per cent
100% — one hundred per cent
12.34% — twelve point three four per cent
分数或百分数修饰名词作主语,构成分数或百分数+of +名词,谓语动词的数有of 后的名词确定。(population 除外)
70% of population in china are farmers .
One quarter of students in the class are girls .
四)序数词前通常应有定冠词the,除非序数词前有了物主代词,指示代词或其它修饰语,以及做表语时才能省略定冠词。
This is his twelfth birthday .
五)序数词的句法功能
序数词在句中可作主语、宾语、定语和表语。
The second is what I really need.第二个是我真正需要的。(作主语)
He choose the second.他挑选了第二个。(作宾语)
We are to carry out the first plan.我们将执行第一个计划。(作定语)
She is the second in our class.在我们班她是第二名。(作表语)
连 词
一.概述:
连词是连接字、短语、从句与句子的词,是虚词,因此它不能独立担任句子成分。连词主要分为两大类:并列连词和从属连词。并列连词用来连接并列关系的词、词组或分句。它包括:and,or,but,so,for,both…and,either…or,neither…nor,not only…but also。从属连词用来引导从句,它包括: that, when, till, until, after, before, since,because,if,whether,though,although,so…that,so that,in order that,as soon as
二、并列连词的用法
并列连词用来连接具有并列关系的词,短语或句子。常见的并列连词有:
(1)表并列关系的and, both…and, not only…but also, neither…nor as well as 等。
(2)表选择关系的or, either…or等。
(3)表转折关系的but, while yet等。
(4)表因果关系的for, so等。
一)并列连词
1 and:和,并且 I like basketball, football and table-tennis.
1)and表示“和”、“而且”的意思,用来连接对等关系的字和字,片语与片语,句子与句子。单词或词组如果是三个以上连接,一般在最后的单词或词组前加and。另外“and”在译成中文时不一定要翻译出“和”来。
He got up and put on his hat.
I went to the Summer Palace and he went to Beihai Park.
2).and在祈使句中的作用 句型:祈使句, and…=If you…, you'll…
Use your head,and you'll find a way.动动脑筋,你就会想出办法来。
=If you use your head,you'll find a way.如果你动动脑子,你就会想出办法。
Hurry up,and you'll catch the bus.快点,你就会赶上公共汽车。
=If you hurry up,you'll catch the bus.如果你快点,你就会赶上公共汽车。
2.both…and:和,既……也……构成的词组作为主语时,谓语动词用复数。句型中,and连接的词或词组要对等
He can play both the violin and the piano.他既会拉小提琴,又会弹钢琴。
Both Li Ming and Li Li are good students.(Li Ming和Li Li都是人,所以两者对等)
both…and的否定句表示部分否定。
He can't play both the violin and the piano.他会拉小提琴或者会弹钢琴。(不全会)
Both Li Ming and Li Li are not good students.
李明和李莉不都是好学生。(其中一个是好学生)
3.neither…nor既不……也不……
a.当此词组担任主语时,谓语动词由nor后面的词而定。
Neither you nor I am right.你和我都不对。
b.此句型本身是全否定,因此不能再用否定式,即不能再加not。
4. not only… but also:不但……而且担任主语时,此句型的谓语动词随 but also后面的部分而定not only…but also连接对等的词或词组。该句型可以和“as well as”互换,但注意汉语翻译。
(1)Not only you but also your father is coming.不但你,而且你父亲也要来。
(2)Jane is not only beautiful but also kind. 珍妮不但漂亮,而且为人很好。
Your father as well as you is coming.不但你,而且你父亲也要来。
注意: not only… but also 关联两个分句时,一个分句因有否定词not 而必须倒装。 Not only does he like reading stories, but also he can even write some.
as well as的句子谓语动词随它前面的词“Your father”而定,所以用is coming.
Jane is kind as well as beautiful.
二)选择连词
1. or:或,或者,否则
Is Li Ming from Beijing or from Shanghai.
李明是北京人还是上海人呢?
1)or表示“~或”的意思,使用于两者之中选择一个的时候。
Would you like coffee or tea?你喜欢咖啡还是茶?
Tom or I am right.我或者汤姆是对的。
Li Ming or his classmates are cleaning the room.李明或者是他的同班同学在打扫房间
注意
“A or B”作主语时,谓语动词随or后面的词(B)而定,因此例子中的谓语动词服从I,用am。
2.)句型:祈使句, or…=If you don't…, you'll…
同and一样,or在祈使句中的用法,译成“请…,否则…”,有转折的意思。
Hurry up,or you'll miss the bus.快点吧,否则你就会误了公共汽车。
=If you don't hurry up,you'll miss the bus.如果你不快点,你就会误了这班车。
Study hard,or you'll fail in the exam.好好学吧,否则你考试就会不及格。
=If you don't study hard,you'll fail in the exam.
如果你不努力学习,你考试就会不及格。
注意
or疑问句的读法or前面的部分用升调,后面的部分用降调。
2..either…or:或……或……;不是……就是……
a.《either…or…》构成的词组作为主语时,谓语动词随其邻近的词,即or后面的词而定。
Either you or he is right.不是你,就是他是对的。
b.此句型的否定句是全否定。
Either you or he isn't right.你和他都不对。
I don't want to visit either Tianjing orShanghai.天津和上海我都不想参观。
三)转折连词
1 but:但是,可是,而
but所连接的句子,句中如果某些成分与前面相同,则可以省略。
He is old, but he looks very young.他老了,但他看起来很年轻。
Li Li likes violin but doesn't like piano.李莉喜欢小提琴,(但是)不喜欢钢琴。
(but 后面省略了主语Li Li,因为与前面的主语成分相同)
Mary likes violin, but Tom doesn't.
玛丽喜欢小提琴,而汤姆不喜欢。
(doesn't后面省略了like violin,因为与前面的成分相同)
He isn't a teacher but a doctor.
他不是(一个)老师,而是医生。
They came here not for money but for the life.
他们到这儿来,不是要钱,而是要命。
2while “而,然而”,表对比。
Some people waste food while others haven't enough.
有些人很费粮食,然而有些人却吃不饱。
.The son was having a good meal at home,while the parents were working in the fields. 儿子在家吃好饭而父母却在田里辛勤劳作。
3.yet用作连词时,与but一样也主要用于转折,意为“但是”“而”:
I have failed, yet I shall try again. 我失败了,但我还要尝试。
有时用在句首。Yet the house was cheerful. 但屋子里显得很欢快。
Yet its population has doubled. 但它的人口翻了一番。
■yet有时可与并列连词and或but连用,构成习语and yet和but yet,且两者大致同义(均相当于表转折的but):
I gave him ten pounds (and) yet he was not satisfied. 我给了他十镑但他仍不满足。
She’s vain and foolish, and yet people like her. 她很虚荣愚蠢,但人们却喜欢她。
She drove very fast to the airport, but [yet, and yet, but yet] she missed the plane. 她开快车去机场,可还是误了飞机。
■although不能与表示转折的but连用,但是却可以与yet连用。如:
Although we have made some progress, yet we still have a long way to go. 我们虽然取得了些进步,但还是远远不够的。
四)因果连词
1.so:所以,因此,于是
My teacher asked me to go, so I went.
我们老师让我去,因此我就去了。
so除了作连词外,也可以作副词。
I hope you can pass the exam.我希望你能通过考试。
I hope so.我也希望。 Don't walk so fast.别走得太快。
2.for:因为
I soon went to sleep, for I was tired.
我很快就入睡了,因为我太累了。
The sun has risen,for the birds are singing.
太阳升起来了,小鸟在唱歌。
for和because for也可译为“因为”,但是它没有什么因果关系,不像because那样,而for只是说明解释而已。for表示结果通常不能放句首,也不能单独使用。
二. 从属连词
常见的从属连词有:
(1)引导时间状语从句的after, before, when, while, as, until, till, since, as soon as等。
(2)引导条件状语从句的if, unless等。
(3)引导原因状语从句的because, as, since等。
(4)引导目的状语从句的so that, in order that等。
(5)引导让步状语从句的though, although, even if等。
(6)引导结果状语从句的so that, so…that, such…that等。
(7)引导比较状语从句的than, as…as等。
(8)引导名词从句的that, if , whether等。
1. 引导时间状语从句的从属连词
(1) 表示“当…时候”或“每当”的时间连词。主要的 when, while, as, whenever。如:
Don’t talk while you’re eating. 吃饭时不要说话。
Vegetables are best when they are fresh. 蔬菜新鲜时最好吃。
He came just as I was leaving. 我正要走时他来了。
(2) 表示“在…之前(或之后)”的时间连词。主要的有before, after。如:
Try to finish your work before you leave. 离开前设法把工作做完。
After we have finished tea, we will sit on the grass. 喝完茶之后我们将坐在草地上。
(3) 表示“自从”或“直到”的时间连词。主要的有since, until, till。如:
She’s been playing tennis since she was eight. 她从八岁起就打网球了。
Hold on until I fetch help. 坚持一下,等我找人来帮忙。
Never trouble trouble till trouble troubles you. (谚)不要无事惹事。
(4) 表示“一…就”的时间连词。主要的有as soon as, the moment, the minute, the second, the instant, immediately, directly, instantly, once, no sooner…than, hardly…when等。如:
I’ll let you know as soon as I hear from her. 我一接她的信就通知你。
The moment I have finished I’ll give you a call. 我一干完就给你打电话。
I came immediately I heard the news. 我一听到这个消息,马上就来了。
Once you begin you must continue. 你一旦开始, 便不可停下来。
(5) 表示“上次”、“下次”、“每次”等的时间连词。主要的有every time(每次),each time(每次),(the) next time(下次),any time(随时),(the) last time(上次),the first time(第一次)。如:
I’ll tell him about it (the) next time I see him.
我下一次见到他时,我就把这个情况告诉他。
We lose a few skin cells every time we wash our hands.
每当我们洗手的时候,我们都要损失一些皮肤细胞。
You can call me any time you want to. 你随时都可以给我打电话。
注意:A.every time, each time, any time前不用冠词,(the) next time, (the) last time中的冠词可以省略,而the first time中的冠词通常不能省略。
B.when, while, till, until, since, after, before, as soon as等是连接时间状语从句的连词。在时间状语从句中要特别注意时态的搭配:当主句是将来时,从句要用一般现在时。
C.while所引导的从句的谓语动词只能是延续性的,不能用点动词。(如begin,stop…)
When I arrived there, it was raining.当我到那儿时,天正在下雨。
I entered the room while(when) Li Ming was talking with her.
我进屋时,李明正在和她谈话。
I didn't go to sleep until(till)I finished my homework.
直到我做完作业,我才上床睡觉。
We won't work until(till) our teacher teaches us how to do it.
老师教给我们如何做这工作之后,我们才会开始做。
He came to China after the war was over.
比较
连词连接从句不同,意思不同。
He had been in China before the war was over.战争结束前,他已经在中国了。
=The war was over before he came to China.
=The war had been over before he came to China.
战争结束后,他来到中国。
I have learned more than two thousand English words since I began learning English two years ago.
自从两年前我开始学习英语以来,我已经学习了两千多个英语单词了。
注意
D.since引导的是一个过去时的句子,说明自当时以来到现在(自从两年前以来),主句一般要用现在完成时。
As soon as I get enough money,I'll buy it.我一得到足够的钱,就买它。
2. 引导条件状语从句的从属连词。这类连词主要有if, unless, as [so] long as, in case 等。如:
Do you mind if I open the window?我开窗你不介意吧?
Don’t come unless I telephone. 除非我打电话,否则你别来。
As long as you’re happy,it doesn’t matter what you do.
只要你高兴,你做什么都没关系。
In case it rains they will stay at home. 万一下雨,他们就呆在家里。
注意:在条件状语从句中,通常从句用一般现在时态主句用一般将来时态。
3. 引导目的状语从句的从属连词。主要的有 in order that, so that, in case, for fear等。如:
He raised his voice so that everyone could hear. 他提高了嗓音,以便每个人都能听见。
Take your umbrella (just) in case it rains. 带上雨伞,以防下雨。
She repeated the instructions slowly in order that he should understand.
她把那些指示慢慢重复了一遍好让他听明白。
4. 引导结果状语从句的从属连词。主要的有so that, so…that, such…that等。
I went to the lecture early so that I got a good seat.
我去听演讲去得很早, 所以找个好座位。
I had so many falls that I was black and blue all over.
我摔了许多跤,以致于全身都是青一块紫一块的。
He shut the window with such force that the glass broke.
他关窗子用力很大, 结果
so…that:太……以致……
He is so old that he can't work. = He is too old to work.他太老了,不能工作。
The box is so heavy that I can't lift it.
=The box is too heavy for me to lift. 箱子太沉了,我抬不起来。
The girl is so beautiful that everybody likes her.
这个小女孩太漂亮了,每个人都喜欢她。
注意此句型与too…to的互换。
so…that在肯定句中不能转换成too…to…。
5. 引导原因状语从句的从属连词。主要的有because, as, since, seeing (that), now (that), considering (that) 等。
He distrusted me because I was new. 他不信任我,因为我是新来的。
As you are sorry,I’ll forgive you. 既然你悔悟了,我就原谅你。
Since we’ve no money, we can’t buy it. 由于我们没钱,我们无法购买它。
Seeing that he’s ill he’s unlikely to come. 因为他病了,他大概不会来了。
Now that she has apologized, I am content. 既然她已经道了歉, 我也就满意了。
She didn't go there,because she was ill.因为她病了,所以她没去那儿。
回答Why问句时,只能用because,不能用for或 as.
Why are you late?你为什么迟到?
Because I met a traffic accident on my way here.因为在我来这儿的路上,遇到了车祸。汉语中,我们经常说因为……所以,但在英文中有了because,就不能再用so。
(×)Because he was tired, so he couldn't walk there.
因为他累了,所以他不能走到那儿了。:
6. 引导让步状语从句的从属连词。主要的有although, though, even though, even if, while, however, whatever, whoever, whenever, wherever等。如:
Although they are twins, they look entirely different.
他们虽是孪生, 但是相貌却完全不同。
I like her even though she can be annoying. 尽管她有时很恼人, 但我还是喜欢她。
You won’t move that stone, however strong you are.
不管你力气多大, 也休想搬动那块石头。
Whatever we have achieved, we owe to your support.
我们取得的一切成就都归功于你们的支持。
Whoever you are, you can’t pass this way. 不管你是谁,你都不能从这里通过。
Whene4 if,though (although)
If it doesn't rain,we'll go to the park.
如果不下雨,我们就去公园。
Though I was tired, I still worked hard.
虽然我很累,可是我仍然努力地工作。
如果用了though,although (虽然)就不能再用but(但是)。
Although(Though) I live near the sea, I'm not a good swimmer.
=I live near the sea,but I'm not a good swimmer.
虽然我住在海边,可是我游泳并不好。
注意
注意时态一致,和时间状语从句一样。主句是将来时之时,从句要用一般现在时。
7. 引导方式状语从句的从属连词。主要的有as, as if, as though, the way等。如:
Why didn’t you catch the last bus as I told you to?
你怎么不听我的话赶乘末班公共汽车呢?
He bent the iron bar as if it had been made of rubber.
他将铁棍折弯,仿佛那是用橡皮做成的。
Nobody else loves you the way(=as) I do. 没有人像我这样爱你。
8. 引导地点状语从句的从属连词。主要的有where, wherever, everywhere, anywhere等。如:
The church was built where there had once been a Roman temple.
这座教堂盖在一座罗马寺庙的旧址。
I’ll take you anywhere you like. 你想到哪儿我就带你到哪儿。
Everywhere I go,I find the same thing. 不管我走到哪里,我都发现同样情况。
9. 引导比较状语从句的从属连词。主要的有than和as…as。如:
She was now happier than she had ever been. 现在她比过去任何时候都快活。
I glanced at my watch. It was earlier than I thought. 我看了看表,时间比我想像的早。
He doesn’t work as hard as she does. 他工作不像她那样努力。
10. 引起名词从句的从属连词。主要有that, whether, if 等,它们用于引导主语从句、表语从句、宾语从句和同位语从句。其中that 不仅没不充当句子成分,而且没有词义,在句子中只起连接作用;而 if, whether 虽不充当句子成分,但有词义,即表示“是否”。如:
He replied that he was going by train. 他回答说他将坐火车去。
I wonder if it’s large enough. 我不知道它是否够大。
I worry about whether I hurt her feelings. 我为是否伤了她的感情而担心。
1) that
I think(that) he likes football.我想他喜欢足球。
that引导名词性从句(主语从句、表语从句、宾语从句和同位语从句)和定语从句,
1).that在宾语从句、间接引语中可以省略,主句与从句时态一致。
I think(that) he is tired.我想他累了。
I thought(that) he was tired.
要特别注意主句与从句时态的呼应。如果主句是过去时,从句一律改为过去的时态,
2).如果主句的动词是 think, believe…;如果主句的主语是第一人称,变为否定句时,要否定主句,译成中文时,则否定从句。
I believe you will leave here.我相信,你会离开这儿的。
I don't believe you will leave here.我相信,你不会离开这儿的。
必背!
I hope that~我希望~ I think that~我认为~ I say that~我说~
I know that~我知道~ I find that~我发现~ be afraid that~恐怕~
be sure that~确认~ be glad(happy) that~很高兴~
(以上的that都可以省略)
2.if, whether
if和whether都可作“是否”讲,在引导宾与从句是一般可互换。例如:
I wonder whether (if) you still study in that school.
I don’t know whether (if) he likes that film.
只用whether
1) 引导主语从句时。例如:
Whether he will come to the party is unknown.
2) 引导表语从句时。例如:
The question is whether I can pass the exam.
3) 在不定式前。例如:
I haven’t made up my mind whether to go there or not.
四连词比较
I and 与or
1) 并列结构中,or通常用于否定句,and用于肯定句。
2) 但有时and 也可用于否定句。请注意其不同特点:
There is no air or water in the moon. There is no air and no water on the moon.
在否定中并列结构用or 连接,但含有两个否定词的句子实际被看作是肯定结构,因此要用and。
---I don't like chicken or fish. ---I don't like chicken, but I like fish very much.
(错) We will die without air and water. (错) We can't live without air or water.
(对) We will die without air or water. (对) We can't live without air and water.
3 )表示选择的并列结构
(1) or 意思为"否则"。I must work hard, or I'll fail in the exam.
(2) either…or 意思为"或者……或者……"。注意谓语动词采用就近原则。
Either you or I am right.
注意:and 还可以和祈使句或名词词组连用表示条件。(or也有此用法)
Make up your mind, and you'll get the chance.
= If you make up your mind, you'll get the chance.
One more effort, and you'll succeed. = If you make one more effort, you'll succeed.
II but,while
but表示转折,while表示对比。
Some people love cats, while others hate them.
典型例题
--- Would you like to come to dinner tonight?
--- I'd like to, but I'm too busy.
III so, therefore
He hurt his leg, so he couldn't play in the game.
注意
a. 两个并列连词不能连用,但therefore, then, yet.可以和并列连词连用。
You can watch TV, and or you can go to bed.
He hurt his leg, and so / and therefore he couldn't play in the game.
b. although… yet…,但although不与 but连用。
(错) Although he was weak, but he tried his best to do the work..
(对) Although he was weak, yet he tried his best to do the work.
Ⅵ.比较so和 such
其规律由so与such的不同词性决定。such 是形容词,修饰名词或名词词组,so是副词,只能修饰形容词或副词。so 还可与表示数量的形容词many,few,much, little连用,形成固定搭配。
so + adj. such + a(n) + n.
so + adj. + a(n) + n. such + adj. + n. (pl.)
so +many/much/few/lille +n such + adj. + n. [不可数]
so foolish such a fool
so nice a flower such a nice flower
so many/ few flowers such nice flowers
so much/little money. such rapid progress
so many people such a lot of people
so many 已成固定搭配,a lot of 虽相当于 many,但 a lot of 为名词性的,只能用such搭配。
so…that与such…that之间的转换既为 so与such之间的转换。
注意:too .... to .. ,so ..... that .... , such .... that .... , enough ..... to ...., 的互换.
so that to = in order to /that 的用法.
Eg A .He is too young to go to school.
B .He is such a young boy that he can't go to school .
C .He is so young that he can't go to school .
D .He isn't old enough to go to school
易错分析:
①关于not…until
He stayed there until it was very late.句中,stay是可延续性动词,所以不用not。
He didn't leave until it was very late.句中,leave是不可延续性动词,所以用not
②both …and ,either…or ,neither …nor 这三个句型的相互关系如下:
1.肯定句:I like both A and B.我喜欢A和B。
I like both coffee and tea.
我喜欢咖啡和茶。(茶和咖啡我都喜欢)
2.否定句:I don't like both A and B. =I like either A or B.
我不喜欢A 或B。
I like either coffee or tea .
咖啡和茶,我喜欢一样儿。
=I don't like both coffee and tea .
3.I don't like either A or B .=I like neither A nor B.
A和B 我都不喜欢。
咖啡和茶,我都不喜欢。
I like neither coffee nor tea .
I don't like either coffee or tea .
③or还是and
祈使句+or+陈述句前后是对立的
祈使句+and+陈述句前后是统一的
(or或and后的陈述句,常用一般将来时)
Study hard, or you won't pass the exam.
Study hard, and you will pass the exam.
两句都可以转换成“If条件句+主句”形式,注意:要去掉or和and:
If you don't study hard, you won't pass the exam.
If you study hard, you will pass the exam.
④because, since, as, for表示原因时的区别
尽管because, for, since, as都表示原因,但是用法上有不同.
because通常表示说话人认为这种理由或者原因是听话人所不知道的.
He didn't attend the meeting because he had too much work to do.
since表示的原因是人们已知的事实,常译作“既然”。
Since he can't answer this question, you'd better ask someone else.
as表示原因与since差别不大,只是语气更弱,多译为“由于”
As I haven't seen the film, I can't tell you what I think of it.
for表示因果关系时,只能放在主句之后,不能放在句首。而且经常是对主句补充说明理由或推断原因。
It rained last night, for the ground is wet.
⑤ as, when, while
这三个连词都可引导时间状语从句,但用法有所不同。
1) 当某事正在进行的时候,又发生了另一件事。While, when, as 都可用来引导表示“背景”的时间状语从句。例如:
As/When/While I was walking down the street I noticed a police car.
2) 当两个长动作同时进行的时候,最常用的是while。例如:
While mother was cooking lunch, I was doing my homework.
3) 当两个动作都表示发展变化的情况时,最常用的是as。例如:
As children get older, they become more and more interested in things around them.
4) 当两个短动作同时发生时,或表示“一边…一边…”时,最常用as。例如:
Just as he caught the fly, he gave a loud cry.
She looked behind from time to time as she went
5) 当从句的动作先于主句的动作时,通常用when。例如:
When he finished his work, he took a short rest.
6) 当从句是瞬间动作,主句是延续性动作时,通常用when。例如:
When John arrived I was cooking lunch.
副 词
一.副词的概念
副词(adverb,简写为adv)是一种用来修饰动词、形容词、全句的词,说明时间、地点、程度、方式等概念的词。副词是一种半虚半实的词。副词可分为:地点副词、方式副词、程度副词、疑问副词、连接副词。
二分类
一). 常见的时间副词
1.常见的时间副词有
now, then, soon, ago, recently, lately, later, finally, before, early, today tomorrow, yesterday, tonight, suddenly, immediately, already, just 等。
2. 时间副词在句中的位置
(1) 表确定时间的副词(如today, yesterday等)通常位于句末,有时也位于句首:
He went home yesterday. / Yesterday he went home. 他昨天回家了。
而那些表示非确定时间的副词(如 soon, recently, suddenly等)除可用于句末或句首外,还可位于句中(通常位于实意动词之前,动词be、助动词、情态动词之后):
He went to Paris recently. / He recently went to Paris. / Recently he went to Paris. 最近他去了巴黎。
(2) still, already, just 等几个表示时间的副词通常位于句中(实意动词之前,动词be、助动词、情态动词之后):
He’s just left for school. 他刚刚去学校。
I have already finished my work. 我已经做完了工作。
当要表示强调时,still和already也可位于动词be、助动词等之前:
She was still [still was] beautiful at the age of forty. 她到了40岁仍然很美。 I already have told him about it. 我已经把情况告诉他了。
still若用于否定句,则总是位于助动词之前:
I still don’t understand what you mean. 我还是不明白你的意思。
另外,still 和already 还可位于句末,表示惊奇:
Are you on page one still? 你还在看第1页?
Is your mother back already? 你妈妈就已经回来了?
二)、地点副词
1. 常见的地点副词
here, there, up, down, away, nearby, home, ahead, abroad, indoors, overseas, halfway, upstairs, downstairs 等。
2. 地点副词在句中的位置
地点副词在句中通常位于句末或句首,但从不位于主语和谓语之间。若有多个副词排列,地点副词通常位于方式副词之后,时间副词之前:
Can you help to carry this table upstairs? 你能帮忙把桌子搬到楼上去吗?
The boy read quietly over there all afternoon. 这男孩整个下午都在那儿静静地看书。
三)、方式副词
1. 方式副词的特点
方式副词表示动词的行为方式,许多以-ly结构的副词都是方式副词,如carefully, happily, quietly, heavily, warmly, correctly, politely, angrily 等。
2. 方式副词在句中的位置
(1) 方式副词通常位于动词(及其宾语)之后:
He read the letter slowly. 他从容不迫地看了那封信。
方式副词通常不位于动词与宾语之间,除非动词后的宾语很长:
不可说:We like very much it. (应改为We like it very much.) 但可说:We could see very clearly a strange light ahead of us. 我们可以很清楚地看到在我们前方有一道奇怪的光。
若遇到“动词+介词+宾语”结构,方式副词既可位于“介词+宾语”之前,也可位于“介词+宾语”之后,但是若该结构的宾语较长,则方式副词通常位于“介词+宾语”之前:
He looked at me curiously. / He looked curiously at me. 他好奇地打量着我。
He looked curiously at everyone who got off the plane.
他好奇地打量着从飞机上走下来的每一个人。
(2) 方式副词(主要是单个的方式副词)有时也可位于主语与动词之间:
He quickly got dressed. 他赶紧穿好衣服。
He angrily tore up the letter. 他很生气,把信撕碎了。
(3) 有的方式副词(如
bravely, cleverly, cruelly, foolishly, generously, kindly, secretly, simply等)位于动词之前和位于句末会导致句子意思的变化:
They secretly decided to leave the town. 他们秘密决定离开这个城市。
They decided to leave the town secretly. 他们决定秘密地离开这个城市。
He answered the questions foolishly. 他对这个问题作了愚蠢的回答。
He foolishly answered the questions. 他愚蠢地回答了这个问题。
(4) 有的方式副词(如gently, quietly, slowly, suddenly 等)有时可位于句首,以达到某种戏剧性的效果(这主要见于书面语中):
Suddenly, the driver started the engine. 突然地,司机启动了发动机。
四)、频度副词
1. 频度副词的特点
频度副词表示动作发生的次数,常见有的
ever, never, rarely, seldom, once, often, occasionally, constantly, frequently, usually, continually, always 等。
2. 频度副词在句中的位置
频度副词通常位于实意动词之前,动词be、助动词、情态动词之后: He often comes to see us. 他常来看我们。
He is seldom late for school. 他上学很少迟到。
有时为了强调,频度副词也可位于动词be、助动词等之前: She always was late. 她老是迟到。
有的频度副词可位于句末(尤其受very, only修饰时):
I get paid on Fridays usually. 我通常在星期五领工资。 We go out very seldom. 我们很少外出。
Do you go to the cinema very often? 你常去看电影吗?
有的频度副词(如sometimes, often, usually, frequently, occasionally等)可位于句首(此时多半是因为强调或对比):
Sometimes he went there by bus. 有时他坐公共汽车去那儿。
Very often the phone rings when I’m in the bath. 电话经常在我洗澡时响。
【注】含有否定意义的频度副词置于句首时,其后要用倒装语序: Never have I been there. 我从未去过那儿。
Seldom does he see a film. 他很少看电影。
另外,频度副词always 和 never通常不位于句首,除非是祈使句: Always remember this. 时刻记住这一点。 Never go out at night. 晚上千万不要出去。
3. 频度副词在否定句中的位置
在否定句中,有的频度副词可位于否定词not之后或之前(如usually, often),有的频度副词则必须位于否定词之后(如always, constantly, continually, continuously,均含有“连续不断”
之意),而有的频度副词却必须要位于否定词not之前(如sometimes, frequently):
He doesn’t usually come here. / He usually doesn’t come here. 他通常不来这儿。
She doesn’t always come late. 她并非总是迟到。(不能说 always doesn’ t)
He is sometimes not responsible for what he does. 他有时对所做的事不负责任。
五)、程度副词
1. 程度副词的特点
程度副词用于表示程度,常见的有
fairly, pretty, rather, quite, very, much, too, greatly, almost, nearly, half, highly, awfully, deeply, partly, perfectly, really 等。
2. 程度副词的用法注意点
(1) 程度副词主要用于修饰形容词和副词,有的还可修饰比较级(如much, rather 等)和最高级(如quite, much, almost 等):
Houses are much more expensive these days. 如今的房价贵多了。
This is quite [much] the most expensive radio here. 这是这里最贵的收音机。 【注】quite 有时也修饰比较级,但只用于quite better(身体康复)这一表达。
(2) 有的程度副词(如quite, rather, almost等)可修饰动词,但有的(如fairly, pretty, very等)则不能修饰动词:
I quite agree with you. 我完全同意你的意见。(不用fairly, pretty, very) We rather like the film. 我们很喜欢这部电影。(不用fairly, pretty, very)
(3) 个别的程度副词(主要是quite和rather)还可修饰名词(注意词序):
It’s quite [rather] a good idea. / It’s a quite [rather] good idea. 那可真是个好主意。 若此结构中没有形容词,则 quite 和 rather 则只能放在冠词之前:
It was quite [rather] a success. 那事相当成功。
六)、连接副词
1. 连接副词的分类
连接副词可分为两类,一类是用于连接句子或从句,常见的有therefore, besides, otherwise, however, moreover, still, thus, meanwhile等;另一类是用于引导从句或不定式,主要的有when, why, where, how 等。
2. 连接句子或从句的连接副词
其性质类似于并列连词,使用时其前通常用分号或句号;若其前用逗号,则通常带有并列连词(如and):
I don’t like it; besides, it’s too expensive. 我不喜欢它,而且也太贵了。
We all tried our best; however, we lost the game. / We all tried our best. However, we lost the game. 我们都已尽了最大的努力,不过我们还是输了。
注意,有的连接副词(如however等)后通常有逗号与句子的其他成分隔开。另外,这类副词有的还可位于句中或句末:
He may, however, come later. 不过,他也许一会儿就到。
We all tried out best. We lost the game, however. 我们都已尽了最大的努力,不过我们还是输了。
Peter is our youngest child, and we have three others besides. 彼特是我们最小的孩子,我们另外还有三个。
3. 引导从句和不定式的连接副词
用于引导从句(名词性从句)或不定式的连接副词主要有when, why, where, how等: Tell me when we shall leave. / Tell me when to leave. 告诉我什么时候离开。
I don’t know how I can find him. / I don’t know how to find him. 我不知道如何找到他。
三、副词在句中的用法
1.修饰动词
Advertisements appear everywhere in modern society. 广告在现代社会无处不在。
I haven’t read that book carefully.I’ve just only dipped into it. 我没有认真读过那本书,只是随便翻阅过。
2.修饰形容词
Training by yourself in a gym can be highly dangerous。 你独自在体育馆训练是非常危险的。
I think at the beginning we’d rather have some fairly quiet and peaceful music. 我认为开始时我们应该来点稍微轻柔平和的音乐。
3.修饰副词
He worked out just how much the light would bend; he could also work out how far the stars would appear to have moved.他把光的弯曲度计算了出来;他还能把星球看上去移动了的距离也计算出来。
If the feeding place was toward the sun, the dancer headed straight upward during the straight part of the wagging dance.
如果喂食地点向着太阳,跳舞的蜜蜂在跳摆尾舞的直线部分就一直向上。
4.修饰全句
You are obviously a person of great courage. 显然你是个极有勇气的人。
Often, all we need is a good friend who will listen to us while we“talk things through”.
往往我们所需要的,不过是一位能倾听我们“畅叙衷肠”的好朋友。
Then it turned in a semicircle, ran straight again, and turned in another semicircle to the opposite side然后它转半个圈,再沿直线跑,在另一边又转半个圈。
四.副词的主要句法功能:
1. 用作状语。如:
He speaks English very well. 他英语说得很好。
I often get up at six in the morning. 我经常是在早晨6点钟起床。
He went home yesterday. / Yesterday he went home. 他昨天回家了。
2. 用作表语。如:
I’ll be back in five minutes. 我五分钟就回来。
I must be off now. 我现在得走了。
Is the radio on or off? 收音机是开着的还是关着的?
在一般情况下,作表语时不用副词而用形容词:
误:He looks very angrily.
正:He looks very angry. 他看上去很生气。
误:Mr. Smith is very carefully.
正:Mr. Smith is very careful. 史密斯先生很仔细。
英语中可用作表语的副词主要是表地点的副词以及某些与介词同形的副词,常见的有here, there, up, down, away, nearby, back, in, home, ahead, upstairs, downstairs, off, through, on, over 等。而且这些副词只能用于连系动词be 后作表语,而不用于其他连系动词后作表语,如:
误:He seems here. / He seems away.
正:He is here. / He is away.
3. 用作宾语。如:
It’s hot in here. 这里面很热。
It’s not far from here. 从这儿去不远。
I’ll stay at home tonight. 今晚我将呆在家里。
副词用作宾语的用法十分有限,通常只用作介词宾语,并且只限于某些表示时间和地点的副词,而且不同的副词有不同的搭配特点,如 here和there 可与along, around, down, from, in, near, round, up 等介词连用,但通常不与介词to连用,如不说come to here, go to there 等(注:from here to there是例外)。
4用作宾语补足语。如:
Please ask him in, please. 请叫他进来。
I’m pleased to see you back. 看到你回来了我很高兴。
一般说来,只有能用作表语的副词才可用作宾语补足语。
5用作定语。如:
Is there anything on tonight? 今晚有什么活动吗?
The people there were very friendly. 那儿的人很友好。
在通常情况下,副词用作定语总是放在被修饰的名词或代词之后。
五.副词的比较等级
节副词的比较级是在副词后面加上 -er 构成的,最高级是在副词后面加上 -est 构成的。
near nearer nearest hard harder hardest
多音节副词的比较级是在副词的前面加上 -more 构成的。 最高级是在副词前面加上 -most 构成的。
warmly more warmly most warmly
successfully more successfully most successfully
有些副词的比较级和最高级形式是不规则的。 well-better - best little - less - least Much- more - most badly - worse - worst far-farther(further)-farthest(furthest)
但是,开放类副词即以后缀ly结尾的副词不能像形容词那样加er或est, 如
quickly →more quickly →most quickly quietly →more quietly →most quietly 〔注〕: early中的ly不是后缀,故可以把y变i再加er和est
副词的比较级和最高级用法同形容词的比较级用法基本一样。 最高级形式句中 the 可以省略。
He works harder than I. 他比我工作努力。
1. 原级主要的句型:
1)as+副词原级+as Tom runs as fast as Jones.
not as/so+副词原级+as He didn’t come as/so early as Li Lei.
2)too+副词原级+to do sth. Jean rides too slowly to catch up with me.
3)so +副词原级+ that Jean rides so slowly that she can’t catch up with me.
4)副词原级+enough to do sth. Jean doesn’t ride fast enough to catch up with me.
2. 比较级的用法:
1)比较级+than。当前后使用的动词相同时,通常用助动词来代替后面的动词,该动词或助动词可以省略。
Lily run faster than Mary(did).
2)比较级+and +比较级 The days are getting longer and longer in summer.
3)the more…the more… The harder you work, the better you will learn. 3
3. . 最高级的用法:
副词最高级前一般有the,也可省略。
He works (the) hardest of all the students in the class.
甲+实意动词+副词比较级+than+any other+单数名词(+介词短语)”
表示“甲比同一范围的任何一个人/物都……”,含义是“甲最……”。
Mike gets to school earlier than any other student in his class.
= Mike gets to school earlier than any of the other students in his class.
迈克比他们班上任何一个其他的同学到校都早。
= Mike gets to school earlier than the other students in his class.
迈克比他们班上其他的同学到校都早。
= Mike gets to school earliest in his class.迈克在他们班到校最早。
注意:Mike gets to school earlier than any student in Tom’s class.迈克比汤姆班上任何一个学生到校都早。(迈克和汤姆不是同一个班)
3.最高级常用句型结构
“主语+实意动词+(the)+副词最高级+单数名词+in/of短语”表示“……是……中最……的”。
I jump (the) farthest in my class.我是我们班跳得最远的。
3、 某些副词在用法上的区别
(1) already, yet, still
already表示某事物已经发生,主要用于肯定句;yet表示期待某事发生,主要用于否定句和疑问句;still表示某事还在进行,主要用于肯定句和疑问句,有时也可用于否定句。如:
We've already watched that film.
I haven't finished my homework yet.
He still works until late every night.
(2) too, as well, also, either
too, as well和 also用于肯定句和疑问句,too和as well多用于口语,一般放在句末,而also多用于书面语,一般放在句中与动词连用。either用于否定句和否定的疑问句,往往放在句末。如:He went there too.
He didn't go there either.
I like you as well.
I also went there.
(3) hard, hardly
hardly意为"几乎"与hard在词义上完全不同。如:
I work hard every day.
I can hardly remember that.
(4) late, lately
lately意为"最近、近来",late意为"晚、迟"。如:
He never comes late.
Have you been to the museum lately?
注意:
以辅音字母+y(读作/i/)结尾的形容词变为副词时,要把y变为i,再加-ly,如easily,happily
以-l结尾的形容词变为副词时,直接加-y,如chilly,fully等;
以辅音字母+le结尾的形容词变为副词时,去-le加-ly,如ably,idly,simply等;
以-ue结尾的形容词变为副词时,去-e加-ly,如truly等;
以-ic结尾的形容词变为副词时,加-ally,如basically,heroically,tragically等。
有些副词有两种不同的形式,一种和形容词同形,另一种由形容词加后缀-ly构成,二者有时没有什么区别,如high—highly,slow—slowly等。
副词除了常见的后缀-ly外,还有一些后缀,如:-wise, -ward (s), -ways等。有些副词带有前缀a-,如:abroad, ahead, around, aloud, alike, alone等。
少数以ly结尾的词却是形容词,一定要注意;friendly, weekly,monthly, daily, lovely, lively, yearly
六.多个副词连用的位置关系
副词主要用来修饰动词,形容词,副词或其他结构。
一、)副词的位置:
1) 在动词之前。
2) 在be动词、助动词之后。
3) 多个助动词时,副词一般放在第一个助动词后。
注意:
a. 大多数方式副词位于句尾,但宾语过长,副词可以提前,以使句子平衡。
We could see very clearly a strange light ahead of us.
b. 方式副词well,badly糟、坏,hard等只放在句尾。
He speaks English well.
二、)副词的排列顺序:
1) 时间,地点副词,小单位的在前,大单位在后。
2) 方式副词,短的在前,长的在后,并用and或but等连词连接。
Please write slowly and carefully.
3) 多个不同副词排列:程度+地点+方式+时间副词。
注意:副词very 可以修饰形容词,但不能修饰动词。
改错:(错) I very like English.
(对) I like English very much.
注意:副词enough要放在形容词的后面,形容词enough放在名词前后都可。
I don't know him well enough.
There is enough food for everyone to eat.
There is food enough for everyone to eat.
一定要和形容词结合才能分清副词的用法:
七.兼有两种形式的副词
1) close与closely
close意思是"近"; closely 意思是"仔细地"
He is sitting close to me.
Watch him closely.
2) late 与lately
late意思是"晚"; lately 意思是"最近"
You have come too late.
What have you been doing lately?
3) deep与deeply
deep意思是"深",表示空间深度;deeply时常表示感情上的深度,"深深地"
He pushed the stick deep into the mud.
Even father was deeply moved by the film.
4) high与highly
high表示空间高度;highly表示程度,相当于much
The plane was flying high.
I think highly of your opinion.
5) wide与widely
wide表示空间宽度;widely意思是"广泛地","在许多地方"
He opened the door wide.
English is widely used in the world.
6) free与freely
free的意思是"免费";freely 的意思是"无限制地"
You can eat free in my restaurant whenever you like.
You may speak freely; say what you like.
介 词
.介词是 preposition 缩写prep
介词是一种用来表示词与词、词与句之间的关系的虚词,在句中不能单独作句子成分。介词后面一般有名词代词或相当于名词的其他词类,短语或从句作它的宾语。介词和它的宾语构成介词词组,在句中作状语,表语,补语或介词宾语。介词可以分为时间介词、地点介词、方式介词、原因介词和其他介词
1.表示地点位置的介词
1)at ,in, on, to,for
at (1)表示在小地方; (2)表示“在……附近,旁边”
in (1)表示 在大地方; (2)表示“在…范围之内”。
on 表示毗邻,接壤,“在……上面”。
to 表示在……范围外,不强调是否接壤;或“到……”
2)above, over, on 在……上
above 指在……上方,不强调是否垂直,与 below相对;
over指垂直的上方,与under相对,但over与物体有一定的空间,不直接接触。
on表示某物体上面并与之接触。
The bird is flying above my head. There is a bridge over the river. He put his watch on the desk.
3)below, under 在……下面
under表示在…正下方 There is a cat under the table.
below表示在……下,不一定在正下方 Please write your name below the line.
4)in front of, in the front of在……前面
in front of…意思是“在……前面”,指甲物在乙物之前,两者互不包括;其反义词是behind(在……的后面)。
There are some flowers in front of the house.(房子前面有些花卉。)
in the front of 意思是“在…..的前部”,即甲物在乙物的内部.反义词是at the back of…(在……范围内的后部)。
There is a blackboard in the front of our classroom. 我们的教室前边有一块黑板。
Our teacher stands in the front of the classroom. 我们的老师站在教室前.(老师在教室里)
5)beside,behind
beside 表示在……旁边 behind 表示在……后面
2.表示时间的介词
1)in , on,at 在……时
in表示较长时间,如世纪、朝代、时代、年、季节、月及一般(非特指)的早、中、晚等。
如 in the 20th century, in the 1950s, in 1989, in summer, in January, in the morning, in one’s life , in one’s thirties等。
On表示确定的时间。表示具体某一天及其早、中、晚。
on May 1st, on Monday, on New Years Day, on a cold night in January, on a fine morning, on Sunday afternoon等。
at表示某一时刻或较短暂的时间,或泛指圣诞节,复活节等。
at 3:20, at this time of year, at the beginning of, at the end of …, at the age of …, at Christmas, at night, at noon, at this moment等。
时间名词前介词用法口诀 年前周前要用in 具体日子要用on 遇到几号也用on 上午下午得是in 要说某日上下午
用on换in记清楚 午夜黄昏用at 黎明用它也不错 at用在时分前 说“差”可要用上to 说"过''要用past
注意:在last, next, this, that, some, every ,tomorrow ,yesterday等词之前一律不用介词。如:We meet every day.
2)in, after 在……之后
“in +段时间”表示将来的一段时间以后;
“after+段时间”表示过去的一段时间以后;
“after+将来的时间点”表示将来的某一时刻以后。
3)from,for, since 自从……
from仅说明什么时候开始,不说明某动作或情况持续多久;
since表示某动作或情况持续至说话时刻,后接点时间,通常与完成时连用。since表示"自(某具体时间)以来",还可以用做连词引导 时间状语从句。
For+一段时间意为已经多长时间了,强调某动作或状态持续了多长时间,可与过去,现在,将来多种时态连用,谓语动词只能用延续性动词
She has worked there for three years.
since liberation(1980)自从解放(1980年)以来
They have been close friends since childhood.
他们从小就是好朋友。
(1)since the war是指"自从战争结束以来",若指"自从战争开始以来",须说"since the beginning of the war"。
(2)不要将since与after混淆。
比较:He has worked here since 1965.(指一段时间,强调时间段)自从1965年以来,他一直在这儿工作。
He began to work here after 1965.
(指一点时间,强调时间点)从1965年以后,他开始在这儿工作。
4)after, behind 在……之后
after主要用于表示时间; behind主要用于表示位置。
5)till until到……为止,直到……之时,直到 肯定句中要用延续性动词。
You’d better stay in bed till/until tomorrow.
Not …until 直到……才……谓语动词用非延续性动词。
I didn’t go to bed until eleven last night.
6) by+时间点表示最迟在某一时刻或某一日期之前,若by+过去的的时间点,句中的谓语动词用过去完成时态。
They had seen three English films by last night .
7)before指时间在……以前,后接点时间。I will get to Beijing before Friday.
8)during 在……期间,强调自始至终。
During those three months ,he asked a lot of questions.
3.表示运动方向的介词:
across, through 通过,穿过
across表示横过,即从物体表面通过,与on有关,为二维 through穿过,即从物体内部穿过,与in有关,为三维。
By, beside, near
By 在……旁边 比near 更近 my house is by the river.
Beside 近旁,紧靠,相当于next to Come and sit beside me
Near 在……附近,表示空间,时间关系等。He sits near the window .
4.表示“在……之间”的介词:
between指在两个人或两个事物之间;between …and…在……和……之间
among指在三个或三个以上的人或事物之间。
5.表示其他意义的介词
1)on ,about 关于
on 表示这本书,这篇文章或演说是严肃的,或学术性的,可供专门研究这一问题的人阅读;
about表示内容较为普通,不那么正式。
2)by, with, in ,on 表示方法、手段、工具
by 以……方法、手段或泛指某种交通工具; 交通工具前不用任何限定词。 In,on时交通工具前用限定词。 He makes a living by teaching.
with 表示用 …工具、手段,一般接具体的工具和手段;
with 和,具有,带有,用,以,由于等,常表示伴随。
She came back with a letter in her hand .
I do my homework with a pen,
in 表示用…方式,用…语言(语调、笔墨、颜色)或材料等
I can say it in English .
on 以……方式,最常见的搭配是 on the phone.
3)except, besides ,but, except for
except 除……之外,不包括在内; besides 除……之外,包括在内。
Except for 排除不同类的事物
But 与except同义,表示除了,常与no one,nobody, all, nothing等代词连用。
Besides Mr. Wang, we also went to see the film.(王先生也去了)
The shop is open every day except Sunday .
I have nothing on except for my trousers.
There is no one but me.
4)against 反对,靠着,倚着are you for or against the plan?
看似相同,但意义有别的词组
英语中有一些介词词组和动词词组,它们从形式上看似乎基本相同,但在意义上却截然不同。要是我们在记忆上对这类词组不加以重视,使用时就很容易望文生义,甚至张冠李戴。为此,把这类词组归纳如下:
(1) at table在进餐at the table在桌子旁(=beside the desk)
(2) at desk在读书或做作业at the desk在书桌旁
(3) at school在校上学(指学生)at the school在学校(指教职工)
(4) in front of the bus在公共汽车的前面(不在车上)
in the front of the bus在公共汽车的前部(在车上)
(5) at sea在航海中at the sea在海边
(6) by day白天by the day按日,论日
(7) behind time误期behind the time落后于时代
(8) in class在上课,在课内in the class在这个班
(9) in bed 卧床,在睡觉in the bed在床上
(10) in prison坐牢in the prison在监狱
(11) in red穿着红色的衣服in the red负债,亏损
(12) in hospital住院(指病人)in the hospital(因事)在医院
(13) in office在办公,执政in the office在办公室
(14) in secret秘密,私下in the secret参入秘密,参入阴谋
(15) in place of 代替,而不是in the place of在……地方
(16) in case of万一,如果in the case of就……来说,至于
(17) of age成年人of an age同龄人
(18) out of office离职out of the office离开办公室
(19) out of prison(因犯罪)出狱out of the prison(因事)从监狱出来
(20) out of question毫无疑问out of the question不可能,办不到
2).含有介词的动词词组
(1) come out of hospital(病好)出院come out of the hospital(因事)从医院里出来
(2) come out of prison(刑满)释放come out of the prison(因事)从监狱里出来
(3) go to school去上学go to the school(因事)去学校
(4) go to college上大学go to the/a college去一所学校(办事)
(5) go to bed上床睡觉go to the bed去床边
(6) go to hospital去住院go to the hospital(因事)去医院
(7) go to prison去坐牢go to the prison(因事)去监狱
(8) go to sea当海员 go to the sea去海边
(9) go to court起诉 go to the court(因事)去法庭
(10) go to church做礼拜go to the church(因事)去教堂
(11) keep house管理家务keep the house守在家里
(12) take place发生 take the place代替
3).有无冠词,意义无多大区别的介词词组
(1)at(the)most至多 (2)at(the)first起初 (3)all(the)day 整天
(4)catch(a)cold感冒 (5)in(the)future 将来 (6)in(the)memory of纪念
(7)go to(the)office 上班,去办公室
(8)go to(the)market 赶集,去市场 (9)on(a)holiday 在度假
(10)(the)day before yesterday 前天 (11)(the)most of 大多数
(12)with(a)smiling face 面带微笑
初中介词搭配
1)at once 立刻 2)at last 最后 3)at first 起先,首先
4)at the age of… 在……岁时 5)at the end of… 在……之末
6)at the beginning of… 在……之初 7)at the foot of… 在……脚下
8)at the same time 同时 9)at night/noon 在夜里/中午
10)with one's help 在某人的帮助下,由于某人的帮助
11)with the help of … 在……的帮助下 12)with a smile 面带笑容
13)with one's own eyes 亲眼看见 14)after a while 过了一会儿
15)from now on 从现在起 16)from then on 从那时起 1
17)for example 例如 18)far away from 远离
19)from morning till night 从早到晚 20)by and by 不久
21)by air mail 寄航空邮件 22)by bike/air/train/bus 骑自行车/乘飞机/火车/汽车
23)by ordinary mail 寄平信 24)by the way 顺便说
25)by the window 在窗边 26)by the end of… 到……底为止
27)little by little 逐渐地 28)in all 总共 29)in fact 事实上
30)in one's twenties 在某人二十几岁时 31)in a hurry 匆忙
32)in the middle of 在……中间 33)in no time (in a minute) 立刻,很快
34)in time (on time) 及时 35)in public 公众,公开地
36)in order to 为了…… 37)in front of 在……前面
38)in the sun 在阳光下 39)in the end 最后,终于
40)in surprise 惊奇地 41)in turn 依次 42)of course 当然
43)a bit (of) 有一点儿 44)a lot of 许多 45)a little 一点儿
46)on one's way to 某人在去……的路上 47)on foot 步行,走路
48)a talk on space 一个关于太空的报告 49)on the other hand 另一方面
50)at/on the weekend 在周末 51)on the left (right) 在左(右)边
52)on the other side of 在……另一边
53)on the radio 通过收音机(无线电广播)
54)to one's joy 使……高兴的是 55)to one's surprise 使……惊讶的是
介词与动词搭配
arrive in/at到达 ask for要,请求
do well in在……方面做得好 give in投降 go on继续
hear from收到……来信 hear of听说
help's B.with sth.帮助……做 laugh at嘲笑
learn from向……学习 leave for离开一地去另一地
talk to与……谈话 go in for从事,致力于 put up穿上,挂上
take down拿下,取了 look at(有意识地)看 speak to对某人说
send for派人去请 shout at大声叫喊,吼叫 take away拿走,带走
think of考虑,关心 turn into把……变成 wait for等候,等待
take off脱下,起飞 turn on/off打开(关上) listen to听
look after照顾,照看 look for寻找 look like 看上去像
get to 到达 point to 指着…… fill with充满,装满
begin with以……开始 deal/do with处置,对待speak up 大声说
meet with偶尔遇见,遭遇 pass on传递
belong to属于 write to写信给…… die of死于……
call on号召,访问,邀请 depend on依靠,依赖
smile at向……微笑 believe in信任 look around t向四下看,到处看
介词用法总结
(和前面讲的内容多有重复,这里补充和悄记得内容较多)
早、午、晚要用 in,at 黎明、午夜、点与分。
年、月、年月、季节、周,阳光、灯、影、衣、帽 in。
将来时态 in ... 以后,小处 at 大处 in。
有形 with 无形 by,语言、单位、材料 in。
特征、方面与方式,心情成语惯用 in。
介词 at 和 to 表方向,攻击、位置、恶、善分。
早、午、晚要用 in
例:in the morning 在早上in the afternoon 在下午
in the evening 在晚上in the day 在白天
at 黎明、午、夜、点与分
at dawn, at daybreak 在黎明时候at noon 在中午at night 在夜间at midnight 在午夜
at ten thirty a.m. 在上午10点30分也可以写成 seven to five 5点差7分(半小时以上)
five minutes after two 2点过5分at a quarter to two 1点45分at the weekend 在周末
年、月、年月、季节、周
即在“某年”,在“某月”,在“某年某月” (但在某年某月某日则用 on),在四季,在第几周等都要用 in。
例:
in 1986 在1986 年in April 在四月in December, 1986 1986年12月
in spring 在春季 in the fist week of this semester 这学期的第一周
in the third week 在第三周
阳光、灯、影、衣、冒 in,即在阳光下,在灯下,在树阴下,穿衣、着装、冒雨等都要用 in。
例:Don't read in dim light. 切勿在暗淡的灯光下看书。
They are reviewing their lessons in the bright light. 他们在明亮的灯光下复习功课。
They are sitting in the shade of a tree. 他们坐在树阴下乘凉。
a prisoner in irons 带着镣铐的囚犯
He went in the rain to meet me at the station. 他冒雨到车站去接我。
The poor dressed (clothed) in rags in old society. 旧社会穷人们衣衫褴褛。
以及:in the bright sunlight 在明亮的阳光下
a merchant in disguise 乔装的商人
the woman in white (black, red, yellow) 穿着白(黑、红、黄)色衣服的妇女
将来时态 in … 以后
We'll be back in no time. 我们一会儿就回来。
Come and see me in two days' time. 两天后来看我。(从现在开始)
After … (从过去开始)
小处 at 大处 in
例:Li and I arrived at Heishan county safe and sound, all is well. Don't worry.
李和我平安地到达黑山县,一切很好,勿念。
I live in a great city (big city), my sister lives at a small town while my parents live at a village.
有形 with 无形 by,语言、单位、材料 in
例:The workers are paving a road with stone. 工人们正用石子铺路。(有形)
“Taking Tiger Mountain by Strategy”is a good opera. <<智取威虎山>>是—出好戏。(无形)
The product is separated by distillation into gasoline and gas oil. 这种产品是用蒸馏分离出汽油和粗柴油。(表示方式、手段、方法——无形)
I really can't express my idea in English freely in-deed.
我确实不能用英语流利地表达我的思想。(表示某种语言用 in)
I wrote a novel in Russian. 我用俄语写了一本小说。(同上)
The kilometer is the biggest unit of length in the metric system.
公里是米制中最长的长度单位。(表示度、量、衡单位的用 in )
The length is measured in meter, kilometre, and centimetre.
长度是以米、公里、厘米为单位来计算的。(同上)
This board was cast in bronze not in gold. 这个牌匾是铜铸的,不是金铸的。
特征、方面与方式、心情、成语惯用 in
特征或状态:
He has not been in good health for some years. 他几年来身体一直不好。
Many who came in despair went away in hope. 许多人带着绝望情绪而来,却满怀希望而去。
The house was in ruins. 这房屋成了废墟。
The poor girl was in tears. 这个贫苦女孩泪流满面。
Her clothes were in rags. 她的衣服穿破了。
His shoes were in holes. 他的鞋穿出窟窿了。
I only said it in fun. 我说这话只是开玩笑的。
She spoke in grief rather than in anger. 与其说她讲得很气愤,不如说她讲得很伤心。
“介词 at、to 表方向,攻击、位置、善、恶、分”
介词 at 和 to 都可以表示方向; 用 at 表示方向时,侧重于攻击的目标,往往表示恶意;用to 表示方向时,突出运动的位置或动作的对象,侧重表示善意。
试比较下列各句:
1. A.She came at me. 她向我扑过来。
B.She came to me. 她向我走过来。
2.A.Jake ran at John. 杰克向约翰扑过去。
B.Jake ran to John. 杰克朝约翰跑去。
3.A. He rushed at the woman with a sword. 他拿着剑向那妇女扑过去。
B. He rushed to the woman with a sword. 他带着剑向那妇女跑过去。
4.A.He shouted at the old man. 他大声喝斥那老人。
B. He shouted to the old man. 他大声向那老人说。
5.A.I heard her muttering at Xiao Li. 我听见她在抱怨小李。
B.I heard her muttering to Xiao Li. 我听见她在同小李低声说话。
6.A. She talked at you just now. 她刚才还说你坏话呢。
B.She talked to you just now. 她刚才还同你谈话呢.
7.A.She threw a bone at the dog. 她用一块骨头砸狗。
B.She threw a bone to the dog. 她把一块骨头扔给狗吃。
8.A.He presented a pistol at me. 他用手枪对着我。
B.He presented a pistol to me. 他赠送我一支手枪
日子、日期、年月日,星期加上早、午、晚,
收音、农场、值日 on,关于、基础、靠、著论。
着、罢、出售、偷、公、假,故意、支付、相反,准。
特定时日和“一……就”,on 后常接动名词。
年、月、日加早、午、晚,of 之前 on 代 in。
步行、驴、马、玩笑 on,cab,carriage 则用 in。
at 山脚、门口、在当前,速、温、日落、价、核心。
工具、和、同随 with,具有、独立、就、原因。
就……来说宾译主,对、有、方状、表细分。
海、陆、空、车、偶、被 by,单数、人类 know to man。
this、that、tomorrow,yesterday,next、last、one。
接年、月、季、星期、周,介词省略已习惯。
over、under 正上下,above、below 则不然,
若与数量词连用,混合使用亦无关。
beyond 超出、无、不能,against 靠着,对与反。
besides,except 分内外,among 之内 along 沿。
同类比较 except,加 for 异类记心间。
原状 because of, owing to,due to 表语形容词。
Under 后接修、建中,of,from 物、化分。
Before,after 表一点, ago,later 表一段。
before 能接完成时,ago 过去极有限。
since 以来 during 间,since 时态多变换。
与之相比 beside,除了 last but one。
复不定 for、找、价、原,对、给、段、去、为、作、赞。
快到、对、向 towards,工、学、军、城、北、上、南。
but for 否定用虚拟,复合介词待后言。
ing 型由于鉴,除了除外与包合。
之后、关于、在……方面,有关介词须记全。
in 内 to 外表位置,山、水、国界 to 在前。
英语中的介词搭配比较复杂,是初学英语的难点。本文讲时态的使用制成口诀,可以帮助大家更快的掌握介词的使用方法。如大体掌握如上介词用法口诀,就不易出错。后面会有文章对口诀的使用做专门解释。
日子、日期、年月日,星期加上早午晚; 以下皆用 on。
例: on October the first 1949 1949年10月1日
on May the first 5月1日on the first 1号
on the second of January 或 on January the second 1月2日
on a summer evening 在夏天的一个夜晚
on Boxing Day 在节礼日(圣诞节次日) n New Year's Day 在元旦
on my birthday 在我的生日
但 in the Christmas holidays 在圣诞节假期; in the eighteenth century 在十八世纪; in ancient times 在古代; in earlier times 在早期; in modern times 在现代,则用 in,at the present time 现在,at the present day 当今 则用 at。
on winter day 在冬天on Sunday 在星期天on Tuesday morning 星期二早晨
on Saturday afternoon 星期六下午on Friday evening 星期五晚上
但 last night 昨夜;in the evening 在晚上; on time 准时,in time 及时,等则不同。
年月日,加早午晚,of 之前 on 代 in
例:on the morning of 18th 18日早晨on the evening of 4th 4日晚上
On the eve of their departure they gave a farewell banquet and their head gave a farewell speech. 他们在临行前夕举行了一次告别宴会,他们的团长发表了告别讲话。
收音、农场,值日 on
例:Did your supervisor like the story over (or on) the radio last night?
您的导师喜欢昨天从收音机里听到的故事吗?
I heard the news over (or on) the radio. 我从收音机里听到了这一条消息。
talk over the radio 由无线电播音
on TV 从电视里……
hear something on the wireless 在无线电里听到
My brother works on an Army reclamation farm. 我哥哥在一个军垦农场工作。
Who is on duty, today? 今天谁值日?
关于、基础、靠、著论
例: This afternoon we are going to listen to a report on the international situation.
今天下午我们要听关于国际形势的报告。
You are wrong on all these issues. 在这些问题上你的看法都错了。
Theory must be based on practice. 理论必须以实践为基础。
The people in the south live on rice. 南方人主食大米。(靠)
You can't afford luxuries, on an income of 100 yuan a month.
靠月薪100 元的收入,你是买不起奢侈品的。
Her pet dogs were fed on the choicest food. 她用精饲料喂养她心爱的狗。
Keep the kettle on the boil (=boiling). 让水壶的水一直开着。
着、罢、出售、偷、公、假,故意、支付,相反、准
注:口诀中的“着”是指着火,“罢”指罢工,“偷”指偷偷地,“公”指出差、办公事;“假”指休假,“准”指准时。
例:The house next to mine was on fire. 我邻居的房子着火了。
The workers of the railway station were on strike. 铁路工人罢工了。
Grapes and big water melons from Sinkiang are on sale on a large sale.
新疆葡萄和西瓜大量上市了。
Do something on the sly (quiet). 秘密地(暗地里,偷偷地)做某事。
I've come here on business. 我是有公事来的。
They went to Bern on a mission. 他们到伯尔尼去执行一项使命。
They have been away on a long trip. 他们出去做一次长途旅行。
I'll go home on leave next month. 下月我将休假回家。
I went on business to Shanghai. I did not take leave. 我是公出去上海的,不是不告而别。
P1ease come on time. (on schedule). 请准时来。
注:in time 是“及时”的意思。
The train arrived on schedule. 火车准时到达。
特定时间和“一……就”,左右 on 后动名词
例:Gases expand on heating and contract on cooling. 气体加热时膨胀,冷却时收缩。(特定时间)
On entering the room, he found his friends dancing in high spirits.
一进屋,他就发现他的朋友们在愉快地跳舞。
以及 on the left, right 向左向右,on the stair 在台阶上等
主谓一致
一. 语法一致原则
主语和谓语通常要在语法形式上取得一致。即主语是单数形式时,谓语动词也用单数形式,主语是复数形式时,谓语动词也用复数形式。
1. 当and 或both and 连接两个或三个名词作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。
Tom and Mike are good friends . Both Lucy and Lily are students .
2. 不定代词either, neither, each one, the other, another anybody, everything, nothing,no one, nobody,等作主语时,谓语动词用单数形式。
Is anything wrong with your bike ?
3. 由each, each…and , each… every…and , every…作主语时,谓语动词用单数形式。
Each boy and each girl was given a new book .
4. 主语后面接有with,along with ,together with , as well as , no less than ,more than , including , besides, like , except , but 等词或短语时,谓语动词的数由主语的单复数决定。
Mr Green with his wife and his two daughters is coming to Beijing .
5. a number of +名词复数作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。The number of +名词复数作主语时,谓语动词用单数。
A number of trees are cut down . the number of students in our class is 32.
6. a lot of ,lots of, plenty of, a pile of ,piles of , most of后加名词,分数或百分数 +名词,谓语动词的单复数取决于名词,如果名词是不可数名词,则谓语动词用单数形式,如果是可数名词复数,则谓语动词用复数形式。
Lots of people have been there .
7. 由a pair (a kind , a series …)+of +复数名词作主语时,谓语动词用单数,pairs (kinds …)+of+复数名词,谓语动词用复数形式。
A pair of sunglasses is lying on the table .
8. 某些只有复数形式的名词如clothes , trousers , shorts , pants , shoes , gloves …作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。
My shoes were worn out
9. 以S结尾的词本身不表达复数意思,谓语动词用单数news ,maths , physics , politics 等,
No news is good news.
10. the +姓氏名词复数 表示一家人,或…..夫妇,当它作主语时谓语动词用复数形式。
The Blacks enjoy working in China .
11. 非谓语动词作主语谓语动词用单数形式。 Reading is learning . to see is to believe .
12. one of +名词复数,作主语时谓语动词用单数。
One of the women is from America .
二.意义一致原则。
意义一致又叫概念一致,即谓语动词用单数还是复数要看主语所表达的概念。
1. 由and 连接的两个名词作主语,如果是指的同一概念(即and 后面无关词),则谓语动词用单数形式。The teacher and writer is coming to give us a talk next week.
2. 表示金钱、价格、时间、长度等复数名词或词组作主语时,一般被看作一个整体谓语动词用单数。 Three year is a long time .
3. 集体名词如family, team. Crowd, company, class, group, government ,nation, 等如果表示整体概念则谓语动词用单数形式,如果表示集体中的成员,则谓语动词用复数形式。
My family is a small one with three people . All my family enjoy skiing .
4. people , police , cattle 等集合名词作主语时谓语动词用复数形式。
The police are helping a girl find her mother .
5. 表示国家,城市, 人名,报纸杂志,组织机构等专有名词作主语,通常作整体看待,谓语动词要用单数形式。
The New York Times is read by all over the USA.
6. 有些以sh, ese,iss 结尾的表示国家 民族 的形容词与the 连用,指整个民族,表示复数含义,谓语动词用复数。
The Chinese are kind friendly .
7. town, city , country , school , village 等表示总称的镇民时,作主语,谓语动词用单数。
The whole town is talking about it .
8. 算式中加法和乘法可用单数,也可用复数,但减法和除法必须用单数。
What is /are three times five ? Ten minus five is five .
9. one and a half 的后面要接复数名词,作主语时谓语动词用单数。
One and a half cakes is a good meal for the monkey .
10. 主语由many a +名词, more than one +名词, 谓语动词用单数。
More than one worker is playing cards . Many a student has passed the exam .
11. 引号中的词若为整体看待,作主语时,谓语动词用单数。
“bikes” is the plural” of the bike” “ they” is a pronoun .
12. 某些形容词加上the 如old ,young , dead , poor ,rich , sick ,blind ,deaf 等,用来表示一类人,其意义为复数,谓语动词常用复数形式。 The old are taken care of .
13. 当表示一两个的词组做句子主语时,谓语动词的变化如下。
(1) 当a/an+名词单数+or two 做句子的主语时,谓语动词用单数形式。
An apple or two is enough .
(2) one or two +复数名词作主语谓语动词用复数形式。
One or two girls have come here .
14. 两个或两个以上的单数名词用and 连接起来做主语时,谓语动词有以下三种情况。
(1) 当两个并列主语不是同一事物时,谓语动词用复数形式。
The boy and the girl are from Japan .
(2) 当两个名词指的是同一人同一物同一概念,谓语动词用单数形式。
The singer and dance has been invited to the party .
(3) 当这两个词分别被each , every , no , many a 等词修饰时,谓语动词用单数。
Every teacher and every student needs a dictionary .
15. none ,all, most ,,more, some ,any , 等做主语时,要根据这些代词表达的意思再决定谓语动词的单复数,若指不可数名词或可数名词单数谓语动词用单数,若指的是可数名词复数,谓语动词复数。
All of the work has been finished . all of the people have gone .
16. 疑问代词作主语时,谓语动词也有两种情况,主语表示复数意义,谓语动词用复数,主语表示单数,谓语动词用单数。
Who is your brother ? who are league members ?
17. half , the rest 等表示不定数量的名词作主语时,如果所指为复数含义,谓语动词用复数,如果所指为单数含义谓语动词用单数。
I have a large part of the book , the rest is more difficult .
Only ten students attended the class ,because all the rest were off sick .
18. 由what 引导的主语从句时,通常谓语动词用单数,但如果所指内容为复数意义时,谓语动词用复数。
What she said is correct . what she left me are a few old books .
19. 定语从句中的谓语动词由先行词来决定。
Who is the boy that is playing football .
I want to read all the books that were written by luxun .
三. 就近原则。
有时谓语动词的形式与主语并不一致,而是与靠近它的名词一致。
1. 由either…or …, neither….nor …, not only …but also…,not …but …,或or 连接连个并列主语时,谓语动词与较近的主语在数上保持一致。
Not only my parents but also I am looking forward to meeting my uncle .
2. there be …和here be …这两个句式中的动词be 常与最近的主语保持一致。
There is a book and some pens on the desk .
倒装句
英语句子的基本语序是比较固定的,一般主语在前,谓语在后。但有时因为语法结构的要求或由于修辞的要求,往往要改变句子的自然顺序,把一些本应置于主语之后的成分提前,我们称这种语序为倒装语序。倒装语序又分为全部(完全)倒装和部分倒装。
A全部倒装
1. 表示方位的副词Out, up ,down, in ,away置于句首时。
Out rushed the children.
注意;当主语是人称代词时,句子的语序不倒装。
2. 表示方位的介词短语置于句首时。
In front of the school is the hospital.
注意:介词短语在倒装句中要整体前移,不能拆开。
3. 以here ,there 等副词开头的句子里,
Here comes the bus .
注意:以here ,there 等副词开头的句子里,谓语动词常为:be, come, go 等,时态为一般现在时,如果主语是人称代词则不用倒装。
Here they are.常考点:
Here/there +谓语动词+名词主语
Here/ there comes a bus .
There goes the bell.
Here/there we are
B部分倒装如果只把助动词,情态动词,be动词放在主语之前,这种语序称为部分倒装
1. 否定副词never, hardly seldom little,not 等置于句首时。
Hardly could he believe his own eyes.
2. only+状语置于句首时
only in this way can you learn English well.
3.So+助动词/be 动词/情态动词+主语,如 so do I . 我也如此
4.Neither +助动词be 动词/情态动词+主语,如 neither do I . 我也不会
这两个结构常用来说明前面所说的情况也同样适用于后面的人或物,意思是某人/物也是这样。这种结构中的助动词be 动词/情态动词在形式上与前句的谓语保持一致,而且单复数由后面的主语决定,
Lucy is a good student, so is Lily .
这两种结构的不同点是
So+助动词/be 动词/情态动词+主语,依附于肯定句中,表示前边的肯定情况也适用后边的人或情况,意为某人也……相当于I do ,too .
Neither +助动词be 动词/情态动词+主语,依附于否定句,表示前边的否定情况也适合后边的人或情况。意为某人也不……相当于I don’t ,either.
Tom watched TV last night , so did Ann .
Mary didn’t watch TV last night , neither did Jim .
5.not only but also 连接并列句子,前一部分倒装后一部分不倒装。
not only does he learn to speak English but also he learns to write in English .
注意:如果置于句首的not only but also 连接两个并列主语,则句子不用倒装结构
Not only he but also I like football..
6. there be 句型。
there be 句型是表示存在的一个句型,是一个主语在be 动词后面的倒装句。
There is a tree in front of the building .
.
there be
表示某地某时存在某人某物 There be +某人/某物+某地/某时
① There be结构的主语
a, There be结构的there 是引导词,无实义,其主语是be 后的名词或名词短语。且名词或名词短语通常用不确定的限定词,如a ,no , all 等修饰。也不用确定的限定词the ,this ,that ,these ,those 等修饰。
b. There be结构的主语不能是人称代词,专有名词及被物主代词或名次所有格修饰的名词。
误:There is China in the east of the world . there are their books on the desk .
There are they under tree .
c.若要说明被限定的某人某物在某处时,常用某人某物+be +地点 Tom is in the room .
②There be结构的谓语
a, There be结构的谓语是be ,它在人称数上应和后面的主语即名词保持一致,即主语是不可数名词或可数名词单数时用is /was ,主语是复数时用are /were .主语是两个或两个以上的名词时,be的形式采取临近原则,即与离它最近的主语的数保持一致。
There is a picture on the wall . there is an orange and apples in the basket .
b, There be结构的谓语动词有时不用be 而用其它动词,如live , stand , lie, seem 等使语言表达更生动。
Long long ago , there lived a king .
③There be结构的常见时态。
一般现在时态。 There is /are +名词
一般过去时态 There was /were +名词
一般将来时态 There is going to /will be +名词
现在完成时态 There has /have been +名词
④ There be结构可与情态动词连用,表示推测。There must be no one in the room .
⑤There be结构的句型转换。
a , 若对主语提问,无论主语是单数还是复数都用what’s +地点?
There are some flowers in the garden . There is a book on the desk .
What’s in the garden ? What’s on the desk ?
b ,对修饰名词的数词或表示不确定数目的词提问,如果是可数名词用how many +名词复数+are there +其它?如果是不可数名词用how much +不可数名词+is there +其它?
There are some flowers in the garden .----- how many flowers are there in the garden ?
There is a little milk in the glass . ----how much milk is there in the milk ?
There is a cat in the room ---- How many cats are there in the room ?
⑥ 反义疑问句用be not there .
⑦ there be 与have/has 区别
a , There be 与has /have 都当有讲,但have表示所属关系,即持有,拥有,占有,而there be 表示客观存在,不说明所有关系。 He has a pen .
b . 当主语是物或时间名词时,而且表示整体与局部,两者可互换。
The building has 6 floors . there are 6 floors in the building .
A week has seven days . there are seven days in a week .
c,在一般时态是,there 不能与have 连用。
句子的结构类型
句子按其语法结构可分为简单句、并列句和复合句。
一简单句:由一个主语或并列主语和一个谓语或并列谓语构成的句子。
简单句的基本类型:
1. 主语+不及物动词(S+V) his father is cooking .
2.主语+及物动词+宾语(S+V+O) 及物动词后接名词代词动名词和动词不定式作宾语。
He didn’t like the film .
1. 主语+系动词+表语(S+V+P )
系动词:be ,get ,turn ,get ,become , go , feel .look .taste, sound, seem, smell, keep ,stay
表语:名词,代词,形容词。
Your match looks very nice .
2. 主语+及物动词+间接宾语+直接宾语(S+V+INO+DO)
人是间接宾语,物是直接宾语,通常情况下,间接宾语在前,直接宾语在后,直接宾语在前时,常用介词 for, to 引导间接宾语。接to 的动词有give, bring , show , tell lend 接for 的的动词有buy , choose , find , cook , draw , sing ,get , make 等。
He gave me his English book .
当两个并与都是代词时, 一定要把指物的代词放在前面。 Please give it to me .
3. 主语+及物动词+宾语+宾语补足语(S+V+O+OC)
宾语和宾语补足语之间存在着逻辑上的主谓和主表关系,可做宾补的词有名词,形容词, 现在分词,动词不定式,介词短语等。
A接名词作宾补的动词有call , make , think , name . We call him Tom for short .
B. 接形容词作宾补的动词有,keep , make , find , think . I find Chinese very hard .
C. 接动词不定式作宾补。 The boy tells them not to do it .
D. 接现在做宾补的动词有hear, see, watch 等。 In the country ,he can hear the birds singing .
E. 接介词短语作宾补的动词有find ,take , keep .
如何区别宾补和双宾。
在宾语后加be ,成立的是宾补,不成立的是双宾。
F.
二并列句
由并列连词把两个或两个以上的简单句并列在一起而构成的。
其构成为:简单句+并列连词+简单句
1. 表顺承并列关系的连词及并列句。And, both…and, as well as , not only…but also,neither…nor
My father bought me a present ,and I like it very much .
2. 表示转折关系的连词及并列句 but, yet , while , however
Lucy likes red while lily likes white .
3. 表示选择关系的连词及并列句。 Either…or , not …but , or
Study hard , or you’ll fail the exam .
4. 表示因果关系的连词及并列句.for ,so . therefore .(所以)
Kate was ill so she didn’t go to school . I have to study up late ,for I have lots of homework to do .
三复合句:由一个主句和一个或一个以上从句构成的句子。
(一) 状语从句
在复合句中,修饰主句中的动词,形容词,副词等的从句。状语从句由从属连词引导,与主句连接,位于句首时,常用逗号与主句分开,位于句末时,其前一般不用逗号,,状语从句根据其用途 可分为时间,地点,原因,目的,结果,让步,方式,条件等类。
1. 时间状语从句
在复合句中,担任状语成分的从句称为状语从句。时间状语从句说明主句动作发生或进行的时间。状语从句由连词引导,其位置通常可以放在句首或句末。放在句首是,常用逗号与主句分开;放在句末时,从句前面往往不加逗号。
时间状语从句的引导词:when ,as , while , as soon as , before , after ,since, till ,not…until
一)en“当……时”,引导时间状语从句时,从句用于表示主句动作发生的特定时间。
The days get longer when spring comes. = When spring comes, the days get longer.春天到来时,白天变得更长了。
二)fore“在……之前”,引导时间状语从句时,表示主句动作发生在从句动作之前。如:
Close the door before you leave the room.离开房间前关上门。
三)ter“在……之后”,引导时间状语从句时,表示主句的动作发生在从句的动作之后。如I went to school after I finished my breakfast.吃完早饭后我就去上学了。
四)soon as“一……就……”,引导时间状语从句时,表示主句动作紧接着从句动作发生。如:I’ll call you as soon as I get home.我一到家就给你打电话。
五)ntil, till“直到”,引导时间状语从句。当主句谓语动词是延续性动词时,主句常用肯定形式;当主句谓语动词是非延续性动词时,主句要用否定形式,即“not…until/till…”意为“直到……才……”。如:
I’ll wait here until/till the rain stops.我将在这里等着,直到雨停。
You can’t go home until/till you finish your work.直到你完成你的工作,你才能回家。
六)since引导的时间状语从句。
since引导的从句的谓语动词可以是延续性的动词,又可以是瞬时动词。一般情况下,从句谓语动词用一般过去时,而主句的谓语动词用现在完成时。但在It is +时间+since从句的句型中,主句多用一般现在时。例如:
I have been in Beijing since you left. 自从你离开以来,我一直在北京了。
Where have you been since I last saw you? 自上次我和你见面以后,你到哪里去了?
It is four years since my sister lived in Beijing. 我妹妹不在北京住有四年了。
七)by the time引导的时间状语从句。
注意时态的变化:在一般情况下,如果从句的谓语动词用一般过去时,主句的谓语动词用过去完成时;如果从句的谓语动词用一般现在时,主句的谓语动词用将来完成时。例如:
By the time you came back, I had finished this book.到你回来时,我已经写完这本书了。
By the time you come here tomorrow, I will have finished this work. 你明天来这儿的时候,我将已经完成此工作了。
八)each time, every time等引导的时间状语从句。
Each time he came to Harbin, he would call on me. 他每次来哈尔滨,总是来看我。
Whenever that man says“To tell the truth”, I suspect that he's about to tell a lie.每当那个人说“说实在话”的时候,我猜想他就要说谎了。
You grow younger every time I see you. 每次遇到你,见你更年轻了。
九)as long as和so long as引导的时间状语从句。
这两个连词表示“只要“例如:
You can go where you like as long as you get back before dark. 你可以随意到哪里去,只要在天黑以前回来就行。
I will fight against these conditions as long as there is a breath in my body! 只要我一息尚存,我就要反对这种境况。
when, while和as的区别
when引导的从句的谓语动词可以是延续性的动词,可以是瞬时动词。并且when有时表示“就在那时”。例如:When she came in, I stopped eating.她进来时,我停止吃饭。(瞬时动词)
When I lived in the countryside, I used to carry some water for him.当我住在农村时,我常常为他担水。(延续性的动词)
We were about to leave when he came in.我们就要离开,就在那时他进来了。
While引导的从句的谓语动作必须是延续性的,并强调主句和从句的动作同时发生(或者相对应)。并且while有时还可以表示对比。例如:
While my wife was reading the newspaper, I was watching TV. (was reading是延续性的动词,was reading和was watching同时发生) 。
I like playing football while you like playing basketball.我喜欢踢足球,而你喜欢打篮球。(对比)
As表示“一边……一边”,as引导的动作是延续性的动作,一般用于主句和从句动作同时发生;as也可以强调“一先一后。例如:
We always sing as we walk.我们总是边走边唱。(as表示“一边……一边”)
As we were going out, it began to snow.当我们出门时,开始下雪了。(as强调句中两个动作紧接着先后发生,而不强调开始下雪的特定时间)
2.原因状语从句
如果从句表示的是主句的行为元音就构成原因状语从句
A导原因状语从句的连词because, as, since,now that引导。
B、because, as, since和now that的区别:
1、because“因为”,表示直接的原因,语气最强。
1)why提问的句子,必须用because回答。
2)because的从句常放在主句之后。
3)because 不能与so连用。
4)because+ 从句;because of+ 名词短语
I missed the train because I got up late.
He was angry not because we were late but because we made a noise.
-Why didn’t he come yesterday? -Because he was ill.
2、as“因为”,语气较弱,一般放在主句前,中间用逗号隔开,表示的是明显的原因。
As he was not well, I decided to go there without him.
As it was raining hard, we had to be indoors.
3、since/ now that“既然”,一般放在主句前,中间用逗号隔开,表示的是明显的原因或众所周知的事实。
Since/ Now that this method doesn’t work, let]s try another.
Since/ Now that you feel ill, you'd better not go to work.
C、for 引导的并列句与原因状语从句的辨析
并列连词for“因为”,引导的不是从句,而是并列分句,只能放在主句之后,不能放在句首,常用逗号把它和前面的分句隔开。对主句补充说明理由或推断原因。
It rained last night, for the ground is wet.
She must have gone out early, for she had not come for breakfast.
3目的状语从句:
用来说明主句中谓语动词发生的目的的从句叫做目的状语从句。
表示目的状语的从句可以由 that(以便),so that(以便), in order that(为了;以便),Lest(免得;唯恐), for fear that(生怕;以免)等词引导;目的状语从句的谓语常含有may, might, can, could, should, would等情态动词。
学习目的状语从句应注意以下两点:
(1)目的状语从句中常含有can,could,may,might,should等情态动词。 例如:
I got up early so that I could catch the first bus.
(2)在口语中so可以引导目的状语从句。例如:
We'll sit nearer the front so we can hear better. 我们坐的靠前一点,因此,我们听得清楚一点。
1、in order that与in order to的区别:
in order that 从句 in order to 动词原形 ( in order to后面加的那个不叫目的状语从句,叫目的状语) 例如:
He got up early in order to take the first bus.
= He got up early in order that he could take the first bus.(他起床很早是为了赶上第一班 公共汽车)
目的状语从句的一个特点:由于目的都是未来的行为,所以从句中一般用表示未来可能性时态,比如上面句中的could。当然还可以用will,would,can,等 。
2、so that既可引导目的状语从句,也可以引导结果状语从句。
1)其引导结果状语从句时,so that翻译为“以至于...”,经常可以和so/such...that...转换,且从句只能放在主句之后。如:He got up late so that he was late for school. = He got up so late that he was late for school.
2)其引导目的状语从句时,从句只能放在主句之后,此时可以和in order that换用。如:He got up early so that he could take the first bus. = He got up early in order that he could take the first bus.
如何区别目的状语从句中的so that与结果状语从句中的so that的用法,这是我们需要注意的。目的状语从句的so that是连着的,结果状语从句是分开的,即so…that. so that是目的状语从句,是为了什么什么,有目的的含义。而so…that是结果状语从句,是“如此怎么怎么样结果是什么”
4.结果状语从句:
在句中作结果状语的从句称为结果状语从句,结果状语从句一般置于句尾。常用来引导结果状语从句的词或短语有:that , so, so that ,so ```that ```等
1、 so that与so···that···引导的结果状语从句
①、 so that引导的结果状语从句
It was dark,so that we could see nothing in front of us.
天很黑,我们看不见前面的任何东西。
②、 so···that···引导的结果状语从句
so···that···引导的结果状语状语从句可以构成如下结构
so+ 形容词或副词
so+ many/few(+可数名词复数)
so+ much/little(+不可数名词) +(that)+从句
so+ 形容词+a/an+可数名词复数
Kathy is so lovely that we all like to play with her. 凯西很可爱,我们都愿和她玩。 2、 such···that···引导的结果状语从句
such···that···引导结果状语从句,可以构成如下结构:
such| + a/an +形容词+可数名词复数
such+ 形容词+可数名词复数 +(that)+从句
such+ 形容词+不可数名词
Kathy is such lovely girl that we all like to play with her. 凯西很可爱,我们都愿和她玩。 特别提示!:
为了强调形容词或副词,so/such···that···引导的结果状语从句,可把so/such部分置于句首,主语用倒装语序。 So excited was he that he could not fall into sleep. 他太激动不能入睡。
3.that引导的结果状语从句 What have we done that you should be so angry with us? 我们做了什么使你这么生气?
4.So that,so,that引导的结构状语从句和目的状语从句的区别:
1根据上下文意思理解;
2从结构形式上进行判别:
A.从句之前有逗号(或停顿),为结果状语从句;否则为目的状语从句。
Miller slammed the door, so(that)he awakened his sister. (结果)
米勒砰地关上门,结果把他妹妹惊醒了。
Miller slammed the door so(that)his sister would know he was home. (目的)
米勒砰地关上门,以便使他妹妹知道他在家。
B.有时由so that引导的结果状语从句之前并没有逗号,这时就要看:从句中表达的是意图还是可能性,有can, may, might, could, should, will, would等情态动词,则多为目的状语从句;如果表达的是事实或客观事实,没有上述情态动词,则多为结果状语从句。
He got up early so that he caught the first bus. (结果)
他早早地起了床,结果赶上了首班公共汽车。
He got up early so that he might catch the first bus. (目的)
早早地起了床以便赶上首班公共汽车。
C.目的状语从句可以移到句首,而结果状语从句只能位于主句之后。
例如: We turned the radio up so that everyone could hear the announcement. (结果)我们开大收音机音量,结果大家都能听到通知。
So that everyone could hear the announcement, we turned up the radio. (目的)
为了大家都能听到通知,我们开大了收音机音量。
D.能用too···to或enough to结构代替so that从句,便是结果状语从句;能用in order to代替so that,或so that从句转换为in order to或so as to+动词原形或不定式短语,则为目的状语从句。
He walks fast so that we can’t catch up with him. (结果)
(这句可为:He walks too far for us to catch up with.)他走得很快,我们赶不上他。
I am saving money so that I can buy a house. (目的)
(这句可为: I am saving money in order to/so as to buy a house.)
我在省钱以便买一间房子。
5.让步状语从句
是状语从句中的一种,其本身也是状语从句。一般翻译为“尽管……”或“即使……”,就是我们日常生活中用的“退一步说……”的感觉。 使用的连词 引导让步状语从句的连词主要有以下这些:though, although,while, as; even if, even though; whether...or...; no matter+疑问词,疑问词-ever, regardless of+名词/名词短语/名词从句,despite,in spite of。切记although不可与but连用 用法
(1)though, although表示“虽然,纵然”之意。 这两个连词意思大致相同,在一般情况下可以互换使用。在口语中,though较常使用,although比though正式,二者都可与yet, still或never,the less连用,但不能与but连用。
Although/Though he was exhausted, (still) he kept on working.
虽然他已经精疲力竭了,但仍然继续工作。
(2)as, though表示“虽然……但是”,“纵使……”之意。 as引导的让步状语从句必须以部分倒装的形式出现,被倒装的部分可以是表语、状语或动词原形,though也可用于这样的结构中,但although不可以这样用。
Object as you may, I’ll go.(=Though/Although you may object, I’ll go.)
纵使你反对,我也要去。
(3)even if, even though 表示“即使……”,“纵使……”之意,含有一种假设。 这两个复合连词的意思基本相同。它们常互换使用,但意义有细微差别。even if引导的让步从句含有强烈的假定性,可用来表示与事实相反的假设,但不能用来描述已经发生的事实。而even though引导让步状语从句时,是以从句的内容为先决条件的,即说话人肯定了从句的事实,表示已经发生了的事。
We’ll make a trip even if/though the weather is bad.
即使天气不好,我们也要作一次旅行。
(4)whether...or...表示“不论是否……”,“不管是……还是……”之意。 由这一个复合连词引导的让步状语从句旨在说明正反两方面的可能性都不会影响主句的意向或结果。
You'll have to attend the ceremony whether you're free or busy.
不管你忙不忙,都要参加这个典礼。
Whether you believe it or not, it's true.无论你是否相信,这都是真的。
(5)“no matter+疑问词”或“疑问词-ever”的含义为“……都……;不管……都……” 它们引导的让步状语从句可以互换。
No matter what happened, he would not mind. (=Whatever happened, he would not mind.)无论发生了什么,他都不会介意的。
No matter who you are, you must keep the law.(=Whoever you are, you must keep the law.不管你是谁,你都要遵纪守法。
但“no matter+疑问词”结构只能引导让步状语从句,而“疑问词-ever”还可以引导名词性从句。 Whatever (=No matter what) you say, I won’t believe you. (Whatever 引导让步状语从句)无论你说什么,我都不会相信你。
I'll eat whatever (≠no matter what) you give me. (whatever引导宾语从句)
你给我吃什么,我就吃什么。
Whoever comes will be welcome. (Whoever 引导主语从句) 不管谁来都受到欢迎。 此外,有时while也可以引导让步状语从句,但一般要位于句首。
While I like the colour, I don't like the shape.我虽然喜欢那颜色,但不喜欢那形状。 综上所述,我们可以看出,学习让步状语从句的关键是关联词的选用;其次,要注意的是由as引导的让步状语从句要用倒装语序。 让步状语从句表示:虽然,尽管,即使等概念,由although, though(尽管,即使), however(无论怎样), whatever(无论什么), whoever(无论谁), whomever(无论谁), whichever(无论哪个), whenever(无论何时), wherever(无论哪里), whether(是否), no matter (who, what, where, when, etc) (无论……), even if(即使), even though(即使)等词引导。
We won’t be discouraged even if(=even though) we fail ten times.
我们就是失败十次也不泄气。
It was an exciting game, though / although no goals were scored.
那是一场精彩的球赛,尽管一个球都没进。(though, although不能与 but连用) Whether you believe it or not, it’s true.不管你信不信,这是真的。
However (=No matter how) expensive it may be, I’ll take it.
无论它有多贵,我也要买下它。
Don’t let them in, whoever(=no matter who) they are.不管他们是谁,别让他们进来。 No matter what I say or how I say it, he always thinks I’m wrong.
无论我说什么或怎么说,他总认为是我错。 特别提醒
1.no matter what(who,which,when,etc.)
与whatever(whoever,whichever,whenever,etc.)的区别:
当引导让步状语从句时,两者相同,可以互换,但当引导名词性从句(主语从句,宾语从句,表语从句和同位语从句)时则只能用whatever(whoever,whichever,whenever,etc)。如上面最后两个例句可改为:
However pure the water looks,I do not want to drink it.
I want to marry the man I love, no matter who he may be.
下面句子不能用no matter结构(no matter不能引导名词性从句):
Whoever comes back first is supposed to win the prize.(主语从句)
I am ready to do whatever you want me to .(宾语从句)
Whatever you did, I will accept.为让步状语从句.
I will accept whatever you did.为宾语从句.
2. as 引导让步状语从句的用法 引导让步状语从句时,as意为“虽然,尽管”,通常从句要倒装,倒装的方法是将从句的表语或状语放在as之前,而用though引导让步状语从句时句字则不必倒装(口语中也可倒装)。
Heavily as it was raining outside, they started out very early.
Young as he is, he knows a lot=Though he is young 或Young though he is, he….
他虽然年轻,但懂得很多。(though 也有这种用法,可以替换as,但although没有这种用法) though还可以用作副词,放在句末。
It was hard work;; I enjoyed it, though=It was hard work, but I enjoyed it.
那工作很苦,但是我喜欢干。
3.用though/although, as 引导让步状语从句时,句中不能用but表示转折语气。 不能说:Though he looks weak, but he is healthy. 而要说:Though he looks weak, he is healthy. 或者说:He looks weak, but he is healthy. 我自己认为让步就是存在一定条件下的说法.
4 . however 用作副词,不可连接句子。 但可置于第二句的句首、句末或句中。要特别注意标点的使用。 eg: Alice is a good student.However, she has one shortcoming. He has not arrived. He may, however, come later. The composition is all right. There is room for improvement, however.
2. 5. 除以上提到的从句连词外,表示让步的介词短语有despite, in spite of, 后接名词。. Despite all these facts, we cannot ignore the advantages of learning through internet.结果状语从句。
6.条件状语从句
在句子中做条件状语的从句称为条件状语从句。可置于句首、句尾,有时还可置于主语和谓语之间。引导条件状语从句的连接词有:if ,unless,as/so long as等
1.if引导的条件状语从句 表示在某种条件下某事很可能发生。
If we pay much attention to the earth, we'll have a better world.
如果我们多关爱地球,就会拥有一个更美好的世界
If it rains tomorrow, what shall we do? 如果明天下雨,我们怎么办?
注意:if还可以引导虚拟条件句,表示不可实现的条件,从句中多用一般过去时或过去完成时。 What would happen if there were no water ? 如果没有水会怎样?
2.unless引导的条件状语从句 unless的意思是如果不,除非。可与if...not互换。
You will fail in English unless you work hard. 你英语考试会不及格的,除非你更加努力。
3.as /so long as引导的条件状语从句 as /so long as意思是“只要”
So long as you're happy,i will be happy. 只要你高兴,我就高兴。
4.once引导的条件状语从句 once引导的条件状语从句,意为“一旦...,就”,从句可置于主句前或后
Once you begin,never stop. 一旦开始,就绝不要停止
Maths is easy to learn once you understand the rules. 一旦你理解了规则,数学就不难学了。
提示:在条件状语从句中,用一般现在时代替一般将来时,用一般过去时代替过去将来时。 If the weather is bad next week, we'll put off the climbing. 如果下周天气不好,我们将推迟爬山。 Father told me if I worked hard he would buy me a gift. 爸爸告诉我,如果我努力学习,他会给我买一份礼物。
注意 :
学习" if " 引导的条件状语从句的用法,现在总结一下:
一、 if 条件句不一般,几个要点记心间;
条件句,放在前,逗号要放句中间。
条件句表可能,主句多用将来时;
条件句表事实,主句常用现在时。
在 if 引导的条件状语从句中,如果从句谈论的是一个有可能发生的事实及其产生的相关的结果,主句用一般将来时态,从句用一般现在时态。如:
We can walk there if we can't find a bus .
If it rains tomorrow ,we will not go to the zoo.
What will you do if you find a panda in danger.
如果 if 条件句谈论的是重复发生和预示要发生的情景和事件,则主从句大多用一般现在时态。如:
If bears are in danger ,they attack people.
在 if 引导的条件状语从句中,if 和条件句位置灵活,可直接放在主句后面,若 if 条件句放句首, 从句后面要加逗号,和主句隔开。还要注意前后时态一致原则
二、if引导的条件状语从句
(1)“if从句+祈使句”的句子。其实,if作为一个连词,主句也可以是其他形式的句子。 例如:If you want to go, please let me know. If the green light isn’t on, wait for a minute.
(2)“祈使句 + and (or)+ 陈述句” 在意思上相当于一个带有条件状语从句的复合句。 注意:
A. “祈使句 + and + 陈述句”可以转化为if引导的肯定条件状语从句,而且主语是第二人称。
B. “祈使句 + or + 陈述句”可以转化为if引导的否定条件状语从句,而且主语是第二人称。
Study hard and you will pass the exam. =If you study hard, you will pass the exam. Hurry up, or you’ll be late. =If you don’t hurry up, you’ll be late. 三、if从句与主句具有以下特点:
1.If从句中用一般现在时,表示未来的一种条件,从句中可以加时间状语。
If you can’t come tomorrow, we can hold the party a little later.
明天你如果不能来,我们可迟一点举行宴会。
If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we’ll go to the Great Wall. 明天如果不下雨,我们就去长城。
2.当if表示未来的条件时,主句中用一般将来时,从句用一般现在时,即“主将从现”。表示如果某种条件存在,就有可能/不可能发生什么事情。 E
If you don’t get up early, you will be late for school.你如果不早点起床,上学就会迟到。
If I play games on it, it will go wrong. 如果我用它玩游戏,它就会坏掉。
3.if从句可放在主句前或主句后,从句置于主句前时,须用逗号与主句隔开,反之则不用逗号。 .If it’s fine tomorrow, we can go out. 如果明天天气好,我们就能出去。
She will be happy if she joins the party. 如果她参加聚会她会很开心的。
I’ll ask the teacher for help if I don’t understand. 如果我不懂我会求助老师的。
三.注意if引导的条件状语从句和宾语从句的区别
if可以用来引导宾语从句也可以用来引导条件状语从句,主要是要弄清if引导从句的时态。if在引导宾语从句时,意为“是否”。要根据实际情况来确定时态,而if在引导条件状语从句时意为“如果,假设”,要用一般时代替将来时,即“主将从现”。
.I want to know if he will come here tomorrow.我想知道他明天是否到这儿来。 (if在上句引导的是宾语从句,从句中有很明显的表将来的时间状语tomorrow,所以if从句要用一般将来时。)
If it rains tomorrow, we’ll put off the sports meeting.如果明天下雨,我们就推迟运动会。 (if在上句引导的是条件状语从句,尽管从句中也有表将来时的时间状语tomorrow,从理论上讲也应该用一般将来时,但是在if引导的条件状语从句中要用一般现在时代替一般将来时,故从句谓语用rains而不用will rain. )
(二)宾语从句
在复合句中做及物动词介词或某些形容词宾语的句子。
I often think about how to improve my English . We all know she is a singer.
1. 宾语从句的连接词。
(1)当宾语从句是陈述句时,用that引导。That通常情况下可以省略。并非所有动词后面后面都可接that,常接that 引导的宾语从句的谓语动词:believe, expect, explain, feel, hope, hear, imagine, prefer, promise , report , say, tell, see, think, understand ,warm, with等
She is a good teacher . the teacher told us . The teacher told us that she is a good girl.
注意:引导词that 用于下列情况时不可省略。
A 当宾语从句的主语是that 时, he says that that is a useful book .
B 当宾语从句中含有主从复合句时,I’m afraid that if you’re lost it , you must pay for it .
C 当两个或多个宾语从句由并列连词连接时,除第一个从句中的that 可以省略外,其余从句中的that都不可以省略。
He said (that) the film was very interesting and that he enjoyed seeing it very much .
(2)含疑问语气的句子构成宾语从句时用whether 或if 连接。whether 或if可以互相转换。
Are you from Japan ? he asked me . He asked me if /whether I was from Japan .
注意:whether 或if在下列情况下,不能转换,只用whether 不用if。
A 当句中有or not 时, I don’t know whether he will come or not .
B. 从句用作介词宾语时。 I’m interested in whether he joined the army .
C. 用在不定式前。 I didn’t know whether to eat this kind of food is bad for us .
D. 做discuss, consider, decide 的宾语时,
They are discussing whether they will go to Beijing tomorrow .
E引导主语,表语或同位语从句时,
Success depends on whether we work hard .
whether the games will be held in our school is not known yet .
(3)当宾语从句是特殊疑问句时,连接词就用原来的疑问词,但一定要注意用陈述语气。
When did he leave for Japan ? could you tell me ? could you tell me when he left for Japan . what is the matter本身就是陈述语序, what”s the matter 或 what was the matter,表示“怎么啦”,语序相对固定。, 宾语从句里要采用陈述语序.
2.宾语从句的语序。
无论主句是陈述句还是疑问句,宾语从句都必须使用陈述语序,即“主句+连词+宾语从句(主语+谓语+……)”句式。根据连接词在从句中所担任的不同成分,可分为以下四种:
1)连接词+谓语。连接词在从句中作主语。常见的连接词有: who,what,which等。如:
Could you tell me who knows the answer,please?你能告诉我谁知道答案吗?
The small children don't know what is in their stockings.这些小孩子不知道袜子里有什么东西?
2)连接词+名词+谓语。连接词在从句中作主语的定语。常见的连接词有:whose,what,which,how many,how much等。如:
He asked whose handwriting was the best in our class.他问我们班上谁的书法最好。
The teacher asked us how many people there were in the room.老师问我们房间里有多少人。
3)连接词+主语+谓语。连接词在从句中作宾语、状语或表语。常见的连接词有:who(m),what,which,how many,how much, when,why,how,where,if /whether(在句中不充当任何成分)等。如:
He hasn't decided if he'll go on a trip to Wuxi.他还没决定是否去无锡旅行。
Could you tell me what I should do with the money ?你能告诉我我如何处理这笔钱吗?
4)连接词+名词+主语+谓语。连接词在从句中作宾语或表语的定语。常见的连接词有:what,which,how many,how much,how等。如:
Do you know which class he is in ?你知道他在哪个班吗?
She asked me if I knew whose pen it was.她问我是否知道这是谁的钢笔。
3.宾语从句的时态
由主句时态确定从句时态。
(1) 如果主句是现在的某种时态,(包括一般现在时,现在进行时,现在完成时)那么宾语从句的时态根据实际情况而定。
I remember he gave me a book yesterday he has told me that he’ll leave for New York tomorrow .
(2) 如果主句是过去的某种时态(包括一般过去时,过去进行时)那么宾语从句一定要用过去的某种时态。(包括一般过去时,过去进行时,过去将来时,过去完成时)
He told me that he would take part in the high jump .
(3)如果宾语从句表示的是客观事实或真理,自然现象,名言警句,即使主句是过去时,从句也用一般现在时态。
He told me that the earth is round .
(4)以could ,would 开头的句子,要看成一般现在时,不可看成一般过去式。
Could you tell me how I can get there ?
5. 宾语从句的符号:由主句确定,主句是陈述句用句号,是疑问句用问号。
Do you know where he comes from ? .I don’t know when he will come back .
6. 宾语从句的人称变化。根据句子意思变换人称。
Are you from Japan ? he asked me .
He asked me if /whether I was from Japan .
7. 否定转移。在主从复合句中,当主句的主语为第一人称,谓语动词是believe , suppose, think, expect,guess,imagine,等时,要将从句的否定词转移到主句当中,即主句的谓语动词用否定式,而从句的谓语动词用肯定形式。I don’t think he will come with me .
A否定前移的宾语从句变反意疑问句时,疑问部分的主语谓语与从句一致,并且用肯定形式。
I don’t believe he tells lies , does he ?
B 如果主句主语是第二三人称他后面的宾语从句的否定词通常不前移,反意疑问句的主语谓语由主句确定。He thinks that his brother can’t arrive on time , doesn’t he ?
8. 宾语从句的简化。
(1)当宾语从句的主语和从句的主语相同,且主句的谓语动词是hope , wish, decide , agree, choose ,等时,从句可简化为不定式结构。
I hope that I can receive your email .-----I hope to receive your email .
(2) 当宾语从句的主语和从句的主语相同,且主句的谓语动词是know,remember ,forget , learn 等时,从句可简化为 疑问词+不定式 结构,当主句谓语动词是tell, ask. Show, teach 等动词,且后带双宾语,从句主语和简介宾语一致时,宾语从句可简化为:疑问词+不定式结构。
She has forgotten how she can open the window .
She has forgotten how to get to open the window .
She doesn’t know what she should do next .-----she doesn’t know what to do next .
(3)动词seem后的宾语从句可用不定式(短语)来简化,但句型要有适当变化。一般的,通常将宾语从句的主语作为简化的句子主语,seem(适当时态形式)做谓语。
It seems that football is very interesting .------football seems to be very interesting .
(4)当主句的谓语动词是order(命令),require(需要)等时,如果主句和从句的主语不一致,宾语从句可简化为“名词(代词)+不定式”结构。例如:
The headmaster ordered that we should start at once. → The headmaster ordered us to start at once.
(5)某些动词后的宾语从句,可以用介词加动名词(短语)等其他形式简化。例如:
He insisted that he should go with us. →He insisted on going with us.
The poor boy doesn’t know when and where he was born.
→The poor boy doesn’t know the time and the place of his birth.
(6)某些动词后面的宾语从句可转化为“宾语+V-ing形式(作宾语补足语)”结构。例如:
Liu Ping found that there was a wallet lying on the ground.
→ Liu Ping found a wallet lying on the ground.
除上述方法外,还有一些特殊句式的转化。例如:
I found that it was difficult to learn English well. →I found it difficult to learn English well.
Soon we found that the ground was covered with thick snow. →Soon we found the ground covered with thick snow.
They found that the box was very heavy. →They found the box very heavy.
(1) 宾语从句可转化为名词或名词短语。
I don’t believe what Tom said .--------I don’t believe Tom’s words .
8. 宾语从句中复杂的特殊问句。
当主句的谓语动词是say, imagine , think , believe , guess ,suppose , expect 等词时,要将引导宾语从句的特殊疑问词移到主句的最前面。
What do you think we should do to improve our environment ?
注意:
A if 的不同用法:
If有两个意思,当是否讲时,引导宾语从句,从句的时态由事实决定,做如果假如讲时,引导条件壮语从句,此时若主语为将来时或祈使句时,从句用一般现在时,
I don’t know if she will come ,if he comes ,I will tell you .
B when 引导时间状语从句和宾语从句。
1)含有when 引导的时间状语从句的复合句中,若主句是一般将来时态,从句应用一般现在时。When 引导其他时态的时间状语从句时,从句时态应与主句时态保持一致
2)when 引导的宾语从句,首先要保证从句的陈述语气,然后再根据何足惧的是太确定从句时态,使其基本与主句内容保持一致。
I don’t know when my father will come back ,but I’ll tell you when he comes back .
(三)定语从句
1.概述:在复合句中修饰某一名词和代词的从句叫定语从句。被修饰的名词和代词叫先行词,通常位于定语从句之前。引导定于从句的是关系代词that , which , who(whom,whose )和关系副词when, where, why .关系代词和关系副词位于先行词和定语从句之间,它即起连接作用,又充当从句的一个成分,含定语从句的的复合句基本结构为:先行词+关系词+定语从句。
2.种类:定语从句分限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句,限制性定语从句是句子不可缺少的组成部分,如果没有从句先行词的意义就不明确或不完整,主句也不完整。非限制性定语从句是主句先行词的补充说明,没有从句不影响主句意思的明确和完整,这种从句用逗号与主句分开,引导非限制性定语从句的关系代词用 which ,who ,不用that。而限制性定语从句的引导词是who , whom ,whose , that ,which , where, when, why 等。我们这里要讲的是限制性定语从句。
3. 引导词
(1)who引导的定语从句:修饰表示人的先行词,在从句中作主语或宾语,作动词宾语时用whom,而且常被省略,在口语中常用who代替whom。
This is the English teacher who teaches my son . the man who/whom I saw just now is Mr Hu.
(2) which 引导的定语从句:修饰表示事物的先行词,在句中充当主语宾语表语。
He is reading a book which is about war . he is reading a book which he bought from London .
注意:which与介词搭配使用,介词可放在which之前,若是固定词组一般不可拆开。
The house in which Lu Xun once lived is now is Lu Xun Museum .
This is the magazine which you are looking for .
(3)that 引导的定语从句:一般情况下,that可以指人或物,可以代替who, whom ,which 在句子中做主语或谓语动词的宾语。但不能作介词的宾语。当先行词
Is that doctor that /who you talked about yesterday .
The letter that /which I received yesterday from my school .
(4 )whose引导的定语从句:whose是who和which的所有格译作某个(些)人或物的……,它指代的先行词既可以是人也可以是物。修饰先行词的同时在句中作定语。
This is the little girl whose parents were killed in the great earthquake .
We lived in a house whose windows open to the south .
注意:由于whose具有who和which的所有格的双重功能,所以在指人时,可以用of whom代替whose 指物时可以用of which 来代替whose .
This kind of book is for children whose native language is Chinese .(the native language of whom .)
Mr Brown has written a novel whose name I’ve completely forgotten .(the name of which )
(5) when 引导的定语从句:when表时间,在定语从句中做时间状语。
I still remember the year when you graduated from No.8 Middle School .
(6) why 引导的定语从句:why 表示原因,在定语从句中做原因状语,其先行词只有表示原因的reason 一词。We don’t know the reason why he was late for school .
(7)where 引导的定语从句: where表示地点,在定语从句中作地点状语。
This is the factory where father works .
3.关系代词的用法:
A 下列情况只能用that不能用who ,which .
(1) 先行词被序数词和形容词最高级所修饰时。 He was the first man that passed the exam.
(2) 当先行词是指物的all , any , much , little, everything ,something , nothing ,none, the one 时。
Is there anything that you don’t interested ?
(3) 当先行词被以下词修饰时,the only, the very. The same , the last, little , few , much, all, so, any , no 等. He is the only person that saw the accident .
(4) 先行词同时含有人和物时。I can remember the person and some pictures that I saw in the room
(5) 以who和which引导的特殊问句。 Who is the girl that is crying ?
(6) 主句是there be 结构, 修饰主语是物从句用that。
There is a book on the desk belongs to him . There is little work that is fit for you
(7)当先行词作主句的表语时。
.China is not the country that used to.中国不再是过去那样的国家。
(8)以the way ,distance ,direction 为先行词的限制性定语从句通常由in which
或That引导,通常可以省略如: The way (that/in which) he answered the questions was surprising. 他回答这些问题的方式令人惊奇。
I don’t like the way (that/in which) you laugh at her. 我不喜欢你嘲笑她的样子
B 关系词只能用which的。
(1)先行词为that,those表示物时,what’s that which is under the desk ?
(2) 关系代词前有介词时。 This is the room in which he lives .
----this is the room that he lives in
(3) 引导非限制性定语从句。 Tom came back , which made us happy .
(4)当主句中的主语被that修饰时。 That dog which I found in the street belongs to Mary.
C 关系代词只能用who不用that
(1) 当先行词为those ,he ,she , any 等代词表示人时,
He who doesn’t reach the Great Wall is not a true man .
(2)在there be 句型中,先行词指人,关系词用who
There is an old man who wants to see you.
There are many young men who are against him.
• 修饰人时关系代词that 和who, whom的区分。
• 当主句中的主语是who时,只能用that。
• eg. Who is the girl that is standing over there?
• 在非限制性定语从句中以及介词后面时只能用who 或者whom。
• eg. I have a son, who is really lovely and interesting.
• There are 40 students in the class, most of whom are boys.
• 关系代词whose既能修饰人,也能修饰物,在定语从句中充当定语,修饰先行词。
• eg. She is the girl whose English sounds very beautiful.
• Mary has a very good dog, whose hair turns out white and black.
• D关系副词when, where和关系代词that, which的区分
• 同样是修饰一个地点,有时使用where,有时使用that/which;
• 同样是修饰一个时间,有时使用when, 有时使用that/which
• 主要看: 从句意思是否完整;完整的话需用关系副词,若意思不完整则需加关系代词充当某个成分。二是定语从句中的谓语动词是否是一个及物动词。当从句中的谓语动词是不及物动词时
• ,1. 不及物动词后无介词时,先行词在从句中充当状语,用when(时间)或where(地点)
• .2. 及物动词后有介词时,先行词在从句中充当宾语,用whom,that,who(指人)或that,which(指物)或省略.及物动词后面无宾语,就必须要求用关系代词;而不及物动词则要求用关系副词。
• 请比较以下句子:
• This is the park that we visited last year.(从句意思不完整需要加宾语)
• This is the park where we held a birthday party.(从句完整,只需加上特定的关系副词)
• That’s the date that she won’t forget for ever.
• That’s the date when we went to the college.
• I like the time that we had together.
• I like the time when we lived together.
• She won’t forget the days that she spent on the island.
• She won’t forget the days when they stayed together.
• 1. Is this the room _ that ___ you cleaned last time?
• 2. Is this the room __where__ we lived before?
• 3. This is the garden __where__ they stayed for a night.
• 4. This is the garden _that___ they visited last time.
• 5. Tom has forgotten the day when__when__ he left his home.
• 6. Tom has forgotten the day __that__ I told him last day.
• 7. She still remembers the year _when___ she found her first job.
• 8. She still remembers the year __that__ she spent in Jining.
• E关系副词when, where, why 和介词+which之间的关系。关系副词when, where, why可以用适当的介词+which来替代。如:when=in/on/at…+which, where=in/on/at…+which, why=for+which介词的位置非常灵活,有时放在关系代词之前,有时放在动词之后。
• eg. 1. I won’t forget the date when( on which) I was born.
• 2. This is the room where (in which) I lived. = This is the room which I lived in.
• 3. I don’t know the reason why (for which) he haven’t come today.
• 4. Tom still remembers the days when (in which) they lived in Tianjin.
. 限制性和非限制性定语从句
• 1) 定语从句有限制性和非限制性两种。限制性定语从句是先行词不可缺少的部分,去掉它主句意思往往不明确;非限制性定语从句是先行词的附加说明,去掉了也不会影响主句的意思,它与主句之间通常用逗号分开。例如:
• This is the house which we bought last month. 这是我们上个月买的那幢房子。(限制性)
• The house, which we bought last month, is very nice.这幢房子很漂亮,是我们上个月买的。(非限制性)
• 2) 当先行词是专有名词或物主代词和指示代词所修饰时,其后的定语从句通常是非限制性的。例如:
• Charles Smith, who was my former teacher, retired last year. 查理?史密斯去年退休了,他曾经是我的老师。
• My house, which I bought last year, has got a lovely garden. 我去年买的的那幢房子带着个漂亮的花园。
• This novel, which I have read three times, is very touching. 这本小说很动人,我已经读了三遍。
• 3) 非限制性定语从句还能将整个主句作为先行词, 对其进行修饰, 这时从句谓语动词要用第三人称单数。例如:
• He seems not to have grasped what I meant, which greatly upsets me. 他似乎没抓住我的意思,这使我心烦。
• Liquid water changes to vapor, which is called evaporation. 液态水变为蒸汽,这就叫做蒸发。
• 说明:关系代词that和关系副词why不能引导非限制性定语从句。非限定性定语从句 由 as, which 引导
• 由as, which 引导的非限定性定语从句,as和which可代整个主句,相当于and this或and that。As一般放在句首,which在句中。例如:
• As we know, smoking is harmful to one's health. 如我们所知,吸烟有害健康。
• The sun heats the earth, which is very important to us. 太阳使地球暖起来,这对我们人类很重要。
• 典型例题
• 1Alice received an invitation from her boss, ___came as a surprise.
• A. it B. that C. which D. he
• 答案C. 此为非限定性从句,不能用 that修饰,而用which.,it 和he 都使后句成为句子,两个独立的句子不能单以逗号连接。况且选he句意不通。
• 2The weather turned out to be very good, ___ was more than we could expect. A. what B. which C. that D. it
• 答案B。which可代替句子,用于非限定性定语从句,而what不可。That 不能用于非限定性定语从句,it不为连词,使由逗号连接的两个句子并在一起在英语语法上行不通。
• 3)It rained hard yesterday, ____ prevented me from going to the park..
• A. that B. which C. as D. it
• 答案B. as 和which在引导非限制性定语从句时,这两个关系代词都指主句所表达的整个意思,且在定语从句中都可以作主语和宾语。但不同之处主要有两点:
• (1)as 引导的定语从句可置于句首,而which不可。 (2) as 代表前面的整个主句并在从句中作主语时,从句中的谓语必须是系动词;若为行为动词,则从句中的关系代词只能用which.。在本题中,prevent由于是行为动词,所以正确选项应为B。
• as 的用法
• 例1. the same„as;such„as 中的as 是一种固定结构, 和„„一样„„。例如:
• I have got into the same trouble as he (has). 我碰到了跟他一样的麻烦。
• 例2. as可引导非限制性从句,常带有'正如'。例如:
• As we know, smoking is harmful to one's health. 如我们所知,吸烟有害健康。
• As is known, smoking is harmful to one's health. As是关系代词。例1中的as作know的宾语;例2中,它充当从句的主语,谓语动词know要用被动式。
•
做题思路
定语从句:应放于名词或代词之后,且从句中缺少句子成分
从句中少主语,从which, that, who, as中选择
从句中少宾语,从which, that, who, whom, as中选择
从句中少状语,从where, when, why中选择(可换为介词+which)
从句中少定语,从whose, of which中选择
引导词
先行词
成分
关
系
代
词
who
人
主,宾
whom
人
宾(可省)
which
物
主,宾(可省)
that
人或物
主,宾(可省)
whose
(=of whom/which)
人或物
定
关
系
副
词
where
(=介词+which)
地点词
状
when
(=介词+ which)
时间词
状
why (= for which)
reason
状
D. 定语从句引导词的省略与保留。
1)通常情况下引导词在定语从句中作宾语时可省略,作主语时不可省略。
The cartoons (that/which )I like have lots of jokes . 做宾语
I’d love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist . 做主语
2)在下列情况下关系代词虽做宾语,但不可省略。
在介词+whom/which 结构中,whom which 不能省略。
That is the headteacher with whom my father was talking just now .
Do you know any shops nearly in which I can buy flowers .
4. 对定语从句提问一般用which。
He is reading a book which is about war which book is he reading ?
1. 定语从句的主谓关系。
当引导词在句中作主语时,从句的谓语动词的数取决于先行词的数。
I have a camera which has got his name on it . these are the films which have been shown this year .
1)在定语从句中one of +the +复数名词+ who/which /that 引导的定语从句中,从句的谓语动词用复数,但是在the only one of +复数名词+ who/which /that 引导的定语从句中,先行词是one,从句的谓语动词要用单数。
Tom is one of the boys who are on time . he is the only one of the students who has been a winner .
7.定语从句的时态。根据从句的主语和时间状语来确定。
一.名词分类。名词指的是表示人和事物名称的词,分为专有名词和普通名词。
专有名词:包括人名、地名、时间名、报刊名、单位团地名等专有的名称,第一个字 母大写,例如Lily,China,Sunday,The Times,Class One等。
普通名词:是一类人或东西或是一个抽象概念的名词,如:book,sadness等。普通名词又可分为下面四类:
1)个体名词(Individual Nouns):表示某类人或东西中的个体,如:gun dog 。
2)集体名词(Collective Nouns):表示若干个个体组成的集合体,如:family, police。
3)物质名词(Material Nouns):表示无法分为个体的实物,如:air, water 。
4)抽象名词(Abstract Nouns):表示动作、状态、品质、感情等抽象概念,如:work , health 。
个体名词和集体名词可以用数目来计算,称为可数名词(Countable Nouns),
物质名词和抽象名词一般无法用数目计算,称为不可数名词(Uncountable Nouns)。
二.可数名词(Countable Nouns)
1. 可数名词复数的规则变化:
1)一般情况下在词尾加 s. 在清辅音后读/ z/ 在浊辅音和元音后读/iz/ maps bags如map-maps
2)以字母s,x,ch,sh等结尾的名词加es,读/iz/如bus-buses,watch-watches
注意:stomach的复数是stomachs
3)以辅音字母+y结尾的名词,先变 y为i,再加es. /iz/例词:country-countries
以元音字母加y结尾的名词构成复数时,直接加s,
Boy- boys, toy-toys day- days, key- keys
4)一些以f, fe结尾的名词构成复数时,把f, fe变成v, 再加es,/ z/如:
Half- halves, leaf- leaves, knife- knives, thief- thieves,self-selves, life- lives, wife- wives, shelf- shelves, loaf- loaves, wolf- wolves
口诀: “树叶落到架上半边黄,妻子围上围巾拿刀去砍狼,吓得小偷自己逃命忙”
5)以o结尾的名词构成复数时,通常在词尾加s,但有一些加es
Hero- heroes, potato- potatoes, tomato- tomatoes, negro- negroes,
巧记:黑人英雄爱吃西红柿和土豆。
2.不规则变化:
(1)单复数形式不同: man-men woman- women
child-children foot-feet tooth-teeth mouse-mice goose-geese
(2)单复数形式相同
Deer, sheep, fish, works,(工厂) means( 方式、途径), Chinese, Japanese, Swiss, bellows( 风箱), series, crossroad, horsepower及由汉语拼音拼出的计量单位,如: yuan, li, jin,但英语中原有的计量单位不在此列,如:dollar- dollars, pound- pounds, metre-metres
(3)关于某国人变复数:中日不变,英法变,其余S加后面
Chinese-Chinese Japanese-Japanese Frenchman-Frenchmen Englishwoman-Englishwomen American-Americans Australian- Australians
Canadian- Canadians German-Germans
除上述情况外,关于名词数的问题还应注意以下几个方面
1)有些名词只有复数形式,一般不直接受数词或a(an)修饰,如果要表示数量用相应的起量词作用的名词。Clothes, glasses, trousers, compasses, scissors pants,shorts等
A pair of glasses, two suits of clothes
注意:此时谓语动词和前面的量词保持一致。如
A pair of glasses is on the table Two pairs of glasses are on the table
2)有些名词只有复数,没有单数 Police, people, cattle 作主语是谓语动词用复数
3)有些集合名词即可做单数,指整体;又可作复数,指该集体的成员,指整体时,谓语用单数;指成员时,谓语用复数。常用的名词有:Family, class, group, team, party, public等。
比较下列句子
The team is made up of 12 members The team are having a bath now
My family is going to move to Paris My family usually watch TV after supper
4)合成名词的复数形式,通常将其中所包含的中心词变为复数,如
passer-by—— passers-by, grown-up--- growns-up,
father –in –law ----fathers -in –law, boy student----boy students
5)以s 结尾的专用名词,如: the New York Times, the United Nations, the United States等,表示事物的整体,谓语用单数,但有些表示群岛,山脉的专有名词,谓语常用复数。如:
The United States is a highly developed country
The Alps are in Europe
6)字母、数字、引语或缩略(词)语的复数形式是在其后加‘s或s, 如
There are two f‘s in the word ”office” Many VIPs are coming to our city
7)名词作定语,通常用单数形式,即使在意义上是复数的(如shoes)或总用作复数的名词(如trousers)也是如此如:
There are twenty boy students in our class They are his girl friends Trouser pockets
注意:但当 man, woman作定语时,如果被修饰的名词是复数,man和woman也要变成复数。如:A woman doctor, two women doctors; a man teacher, two men teachers
8)当sports, customs, arms, clothes, sales 和accounts做定语时,不能变成单数修饰名词,如
A sports car一辆赛车 a customs officer一个海关官员 arms production武器的生产,
a clothes shop一家服装店 a salesgirl一个女售货员 an accounts department一个会计部门
二.不可数名词(Uncountable Nouns)
(1)概述:不可数名词所表示的事物一般不能用数目来计算没有词形变化,不能直接用a,an或数词修饰,词尾不能加s ,作主语时,谓语动词用单数。 news information rice
(2)不可数名词量的表达
A可用Some, much, little, a little, a lot of, lots of a bit of, a large amount of ,a great deal of , a large sum of .等修饰。
B 数词或冠词+量词+of + 不可数名词 量词可以是单数,也可以是复数,但of 后的不可数名词只能是原形。A piece of paper some pieces of information
说明:可数名词表达量时也可以用此种表达,但要注意可数名词的数。
注意:
1. 有些不可数名词是以s结尾,不要误以为是可数名词,如
News, maths, physics, politics等,它们如作主语,谓语用单数
2. 在有些情况下,名词作定语,和of作定语,含义不同,如
A cup of coffee一杯咖啡, a coffee cup 咖啡杯
三. 可数名词和不可数名词的主要区别:
1)可数名词可以被a/an修饰,且有复数形式,而不可数名词不可以被a/an修饰,且没有复数形式
2)有些限定词只能修饰可数名词,某些则只能修饰不可数名词,而某些则既能修饰可数名词又能修饰不可数名词
只能修饰可数名词的有:few, many= a number of, a great/good many, a great many of, dozens of
只能修饰不可数名词的有:much, little, a little, a lot of, lots of a bit of, a large amount of ,a great deal of , a large sum of .等修饰。
即可修饰可数名词又可修饰不可数名词的有:some, any, plenty of, a lot of, a large quantity of
只能修饰可数名词单数的有: many a, more than one
有些不可数名词有相应的名词表其个体:
Bread- a loaf, work- a job, clothing- a garment, poetry- a poem,
traffic- a vehicle, jewellery- a jewel
有些不可数名词加s,含义发生变化。如:
Time时间- times时代; paper纸-papers文件,报纸,论文,卷纸;
manner方式- manners礼貌, water水- waters水域
有些词既是可数名词又不可数名词但意思不一样
room 房间,空间 work著作,作品 , 工作, wood小树林,木材,木头
四.名词所有格。现代英语名词有两个格,通格和所有格。当名词在句中做主语,宾语或补语时,名词无词性变化,称之为通格,当一个名词去修饰句中另一个名词时,有时用通格,有时用‘s属格,或of 属格
A.通常在名词词尾加’s , 以s 结尾的名词在s后加’ .Tom’s pen Teachers’ Day
B.表示两者或两者以上共同拥有,在最后一个名词后加’s ,若表示分别拥有则名词后分别加’s.
Lily and Lucy’s mother is a nurse . Tom’s and Jim’s books are missing .
C. 表示店铺,医院,诊所,住宅的名称时,常在名词后加’s 代表全称。At the doctor’s .
D. 不定代词someone ,anyone 等和else 连用’s 应加在else 后,someone else’s
G. 表示时间、距离、国家、城市等无生命东西的名词也可以在词尾加’s 或’ 构成所有格。
today’s newspaper three hours’ walk thirty tons’ weight China’s capital
E. of 所有格用来表示无生命的东西 a map of China desks and chairs of our school
F. 构成A /two/this/that/these/those+名词+of+所有格/名词性物主代词。如:
That invention of his will greatly benefit the whole world
I don’t like that daughter of yours. He is a friend of my father’s.
He’s a friend of my brother’s . Is she a daughter of yours ?
H. 用to 也可以表示所有格。“钥匙 答案 桥和路, 出入口所有歌格用to”
The key to the car the answer to the question the bridge to knowledge
The way to the school the exit to the building the enterance to the theater
I.‘s属格与of属格的通用和区别
1)一般来说,‘s属格多用于有生命的名词,而of属格则主要用于无生命的名词(但在现代英语中,这一界限已被打破,如:Newton’s laws, 也可以说成 the laws of Newton; the rules of the game, 也可以说成the game’s rules)
注:a) 有生命的名词也可用of所有格形式,如:a photo of the baby
b) 但当’s属格表示“类别”属性,不可用Of属格,如:
A doctor’s degree博士学位,a teacher’s book教师用书
2) 如果‘s属格表示的是具体名词“个别”的属性,可用of属格,如:
The doctor’s arrival= the arrival of the doctor
注:a doctor’s degree, a teacher’s book表示的是“泛指类别”,没有具体指哪个人,而the doctor ‘s arrival表示的是“具体的特征”,译成“那位医生的到来”,可以换成 the arrival of the doctor
3) 名词通格作定语和‘s属格作定语的差别。
名词通格作定语表示泛指的类别,‘s属格作定语表示具体的特指。如:
Car engines are made in this factory(轿车发动机,不是其他类别的发动机)
That car’s engine needs repairing(那台轿车的发动机,具体特指)
They are having afternoon tea(他们在喝午茶)
Yesterday’s afternoon tea has gone bad(昨天的午茶坏了)
表示时间、距离、国家、城市等无生命的东西的名词,也可以在词尾加‘s或’构成所有格如:
用于时间 an hour’s ride 用于度量 thirteen tons’ weight
用于价值 a hundred yuan’s order 用于天体 the earth’s satellite
用于国家 Belgium’s capital 用于城市 Changchun’s agriculture
注:当today, yesterday, tomorrow分别表示“现在,过去,将来”时,只能用of属格,如:
地点加‘s作定语,表示的关系是“所属”和范围,相应形容词作定语,说明的是属性和性质。如:
China’s resources(资源世界各国都有,China’s resources指在中国范围内,属于中国的资源)
China’s agriculture, China’s industry, Beijing’s streets
Chinese history(世界各国都有本国的历史, China’s resources是阐述中国的历史,说明历史的属性)
China’s food, Chinese food
J.双重所属格
双重所有格与所有格的区别
He is my father’s friend. 他是我父亲的朋友(说明一件事实)
He is a friend of my father’s. 他是我父亲的一个朋友(强调数量,相当于He is one of my father’s friends)
His invention will greatly benefit the whole world(说明事实)
That invention of his will greatly benefit the whole world。(带有赞扬的感情色彩)
注:有些名词,在of后面有所属格和普通格,含义不同。常用的这类名词有opinion(意见)/portrait/ picture/ photo/ criticism(批评)。比较:
An opinion of the teacher对教师的意见 An opinion of the teacher’s教师的意见
A portrait of my father,我父亲的肖像 A portrait of my father’s我父亲收藏的肖像
A photo of him一张他的照片 A photo of his 他所拥有的一张照片
A criticism of the headmaster对校长的批评 A criticism of the headmaster’s校长的批评
名词在句中的作用
五.名词在句中的作用
1) 作主语: Knowledge is power Where there is a will, there is a way.
2) 作表语: Smoking is my only weakness.
The affair remained a complete mystery.
3) 作宾语(谓语或非谓语动词的宾语): Did you get my fax?
They affair remained a complete mystery.
4) 作定语 We bought a new color TV.
Would you like to go to the flower show tomorrow?
5) 作同位语 This is our department head, Dr.Owen. You girls sit on this side.
6) 作呼语 Come in, Mrs. Patterson. Morning, Helen.
7) 作状语: Wait a minute, I’ll call her. We’ll meet Monday.
8) 作介词宾语 She majored in physics at Yale. He was devoted to pure science.
9) 构成复合宾语(语):
They elected James(to be ) chairman. He painted the door a brighter color.
动 词
一、 动词就是表示动作和状态的词。动词动词有时态语态语气三种形式的变化。
(一) 动词按其能否独立作谓语分为谓语动词和非谓语动词两种。
(二) 动词的五种基本形式:动词原形、动词的第三人称单数、过去式、过去分词、现在分词。
(三) 动词按其不同的特征可分为:实义动词、连系动词、情态动词、助动词。
实意动词又可分及物动词和不及物动词。还可分持续性动词和瞬间动词。
联系动词分两种:一种表特征和状态。另一种表状态变化过程。
类 别
特 点
意 义
举 例
实意动词
Vt,vi
及物动词接宾语
须跟宾语一起才能表达完整的意思
we clean our classroom every day
不及物动词不能直接接宾语
能独立做谓语
She always comes late .
连系动词
Link-v
跟宾语
不能独立做谓语,跟表语构成完整的意思
I a student .
情态动词
Mod-v
跟动词原形(有相应的词汇意思)
不能独立做谓语,表示说话人的
语气、情态、无人称和数的变化
we can do it by ourselves. That would be better .,
助动词
Aux-v
跟动词原形或分词(无实义)
不能独立做谓语,跟主要动词构成谓语,表示疑问、否定及各种时态
He doesn’t speak Chinese .
1. 按词义和在句中的作用,动词可分为四类。见下表:
(1) 实义动词
实义动词表示行为、动作或状态的词,能独立做谓语。按其句法功能分为及物动词和不及物动词。
A.及物动词
及物动词的后面要跟上名词或代词等做它的宾语,可以分三类:
a. 及物动词+宾语 in fact ,my sister doesn’t like the pet dog .
b. 及物动词+间接宾语(sb)+直接宾语(sth) Could you bring me some water ?
c. 及物动词+宾语+宾语补足语 His jokes made us happy .
B 不及物动词
不及物动词后面一定不能直接跟宾语,可以跟介词构成一个动词短语,然后跟介词的宾语。
I lived in the country with my parents two years ago .
C. 许多动词可用做及物动词,又可用作不及物动词。
Who is going to speak at the meeting ? Few people outside China speak Chinese .
(2连系动词
联系动词本身有词义但不完整,不能独立作谓语,必须跟表语一起构成谓语,说明主语的状态、特征、性质或身份。连系动词可分为三类
A be 动词
Be 动词是一个多功能的动词,在初级英语中可见四种用法。
功能一 系动词be
Be 为联系动词,中心词义是:是,句型为 主+系+表 结构。Be 的形式常为am,is are ,was ,were will/can/may/must be ,has /have /had been 等。
Beijing is the capital of china . It will be sunny tomorrow .
功能二 助动词be
助动词be 无词义,辅助主要动词一起在句中做谓语,用法如下;
a .be+doing 构成进行时态,
the girls are reading and copying the new words now .
young Tom was always asking strange questions and trying out new ideas .
b. be +done 构成被动语态 tea is grown in my hometown .
c. be +going to do 表示打算将要做某事
We are going to plan trees in the park . I didn’t know if she was going to come here .
d. be +to do 表示按计划安排将要做某事 the new shop is not to be opened till next Monday
功能三 实义be
可以将be 视为实义动词,因为它具有实际的词义, 成为,做,发生,举行,逗留,到达等义。
His daughter wants to be a doctor for animals in her twenties .
Kate’s birthday party will be at half past six this evening .
功能四 there be
表示某地某时存在某人某物 There be +某人/某物+某地/某时
① There be结构的主语
a, There be结构的there 是引导词,无实义,其主语是be 后的名词或名词短语。且名词或名词短语通常用不确定的限定词,如a ,no , all 等修饰。也不用确定的限定词the ,this ,that ,these ,those 等修饰。
b. There be结构的主语不能是人称代词,专有名词及被物主代词或名次所有格修饰的名词。
误:There is China in the east of the world . there are their books on the desk .
There are they under tree .
c.若要说明被限定的某人某物在某处时,常用某人某物+be +地点 Tom is in the room .
②There be结构的谓语
a, There be结构的谓语是be ,它在人称数上应和后面的主语即名词保持一致,即主语是不可数名词或可数名词单数时用is /was ,主语是复数时用are /were .主语是两个或两个以上的名词时,be的形式采取临近原则,即与离它最近的主语的数保持一致。
There is a picture on the wall . there is an orange and apples in the basket .
b, There be结构的谓语动词有时不用be 而用其它动词,如live , stand , lie, seem 等使语言表达更生动。
Long long ago , there lived a king .
③There be结构的常见时态。
一般现在时态。 There is /are +名词
一般过去时态 There was /were +名词
一般将来时态 There is going to /will be +名词
现在完成时态 There has /have been +名词
④ There be结构可与情态动词连用,表示推测。There must be no one in the room .
⑤There be结构的句型转换。
a , 若对主语提问,无论主语是单数还是复数都用what’s +地点?
There are some flowers in the garden . There is a book on the desk .
What’s in the garden ? What’s on the desk ?
b ,对修饰名词的数词或表示不确定数目的词提问,如果是可数名词用how many +名词复数+are there +其它?如果是不可数名词用how much +不可数名词+is there +其它?
There are some flowers in the garden .----- how many flowers are there in the garden ?
There is a little milk in the glass . ----how much milk is there in the milk ?
There is a cat in the room ---- How many cats are there in the room ?
⑥ 反义疑问句用be not there .
⑦ there be 与have/has 区别
a , There be 与has /have 都当有讲,但have表示所属关系,即持有,拥有,占有,而there be 表示客观存在,不说明所有关系。 He has a pen .
b . 当主语是物或时间名词时,而且表示整体与局部,两者可互换。
The building has 6 floors . there are 6 floors in the building .
A week has seven days . there are seven days in a week .
c,在一般时态是,there 不能与have 连用。
(2)助动词
这类词本身无词义,不能单独做谓语,必须与其他动词连用,帮助构成时态,语态,和疑问句等结构,常用的助动词有be , have , has , had , do ,does ,did ,will ,shall 等 。
A . 助动词(am ,is are was ,were )
a. 助动词+现在分词 构成进行时态 The students are playing basketball .
He was reading a book at six yesterday .
b. 助动词+过去分词 构成被动语态。 A library was built last year .
B. 助动词has/have /had +过去分词 构成完成时态。
They have learned more than two thousand English words so far .
C. 助动词do(does ,did )用于构成否定句,疑问句,倒装句,加强说话人的语气及代替前面刚出现的动词等。
Do you live in Nanjing ? I do finish the homework .
D. 助动词will 和shall 用于构成将来时态。 (shall 仅用于第一人称,will 可用于各种人称)
There will be more trees in one hundred years . I shall be forty next year .
(3连系动词
A表特征和状态的联系动词有 be是 appear看起来 seem似乎 look看上去 sound听起来 smell 闻上去taste 尝起来 feel感觉到, 摸起来 stay 处于某状态remain仍然 keep 保持
She looks tired .
B 表示状态变化过程的连系动词。Become ,get ,go, grow, turn等
指人的情绪或身体状态的变化或表示天气社会发展变化多用become ,get 而且可互换。
It’s becoming /getting colder and colder .
指人的身体精神或事物向不好的方面变化时多用go, 它后面的形容词常是表示消极意义的。
The meat has gone bad in such hot weather .
指颜色变化时常用turn 或 go . the leaves turn yellow in autumn .
Become 可接表示职业等带有冠词的单数或复数名词,turn 接无冠词的表示职业的单数名词或接表示一定时间年龄的数量词。 She became a lawyer .
He used to be a teacher till be turned writer .
(4)情态动词
情态动词常用来表示说话人的语气和态度如命令劝告建议禁止猜测等。它本身具有一定意义,但不能独立做谓语,只能和主要动词一起构成谓语动词,情态动词没有人称和数的变化。朗读时情态动词的肯定形式一般不重读,含情态动词的句子变疑问句将情态动词提前,否定句 在情态动词后加not, 常见的情态动词有can, could , may , might , must , shall , should , will , would , have to , need , dare 等。
A. can , could , be able to
a . can 表示能力。 I can speak a little French .
be able to 代替can , 也可以表示能力,但can只有一般现在时和一般过去时。而be able to 则有更多的时态形式。You will be able to talk with the foreign teacher in English next week .
b.表示允许,准许这时can may 可以互换。
Can /may I borrow your bike tomorrow ?
c. 表示客观可能性,用在否定句和疑问句中表示说话人的怀疑猜测或不肯定。可能,或不可能。
Can this news be true ? He can’t be there .
d. Could 是can的过去式,在口语中经常代替can, 表示非常委婉的请求,这是can 和could 没有时态上的差别,
could /can you tell me the way to the nearest hospital ?
e. 以can 开头的一般疑问句,其肯定或否定回答分别用can ,can’t .
B. may ,might
a. 表示准许和许可,这时可以与can 替换。 否定回答常用mustn’t , can’t ,表示不行,不可以。
May I open the please ? Yes ,please . / No , you mustn’t .
b. 表示说话人的猜测,认为某事可能发生,常用于肯定句中。
Where is john ? He may be in the library .
May be 是情态动词may 加be , 与maybe 完全不同。Maybe是副词,或许。
He may be at home . Maybe he is at home .
c. 用于否定句时may not 译为可能不, can not 译为不可能。
She may not know the answer . she can’t know the answer .
e. 用在祈使句中表示祝愿、希望等。May you be happy . 祝你快乐。
f. might 除表示may 的过去式外,在口语中经常代替may . 表示非常委婉的请求或实现的可。
g. 能性较小,这时might 与 may 没有时间上的差异。
Might /may I speak to you for a few minutes ?
C. must
a. 表示说话人的主观意识,译成必须应当,以must 开头的疑问句,肯定回答用must,否定回答用needn’t , 或don’t. have to .意为不需要,不必。
Must I clean all the rooms ? yes ,you must ./No, you needn’t .
b. 用于否定句,译成禁止,不许, 一定不要,表示禁止或告诫。
You mustn’t smoke here .
c. 表示对事物的推测用于肯定句中,可能性比may 更大,疑问句中一般用can ,表示可能, 否定句中用can’t 表示表示不可能。
He must be in the classroom . He can not be at school .
d. must 和have 两者都表示必须是可以互换,但must 强调说话人主观认为,应当,必须。无人称、数、时态变化,而have to 表示不得不,必须,主要强调是外界客观因素,如环境,习惯,急事等,而要求某人不得不,只好,它可以用于多种时态,一般不用进行时态,且有人称和和数的变化。
We must study hard at our school . I have to sweep the floor ,because it’s too dirty .
D. need
Need 既可做情态动词又可做实意动词。
a. need 做情态动词时,只用于否定句或疑问句,无形态变化。
You needn’t do it again . He needn’t worry about it .
b. need 做实意动词,用法通常是:
人+need+ to do We need to buy some food for supper .
物+need +doing =物+need+ to be done
The flowers need watering . The flowers need to be watered .
另外need 后还可以直接接名词。He needs some help .
E. ought to should
ought to should 做情态动词用,都是应该,应当 的意思。Ought to 语气较强,指客观上有责任有义务去做某事,或按观念和道理也因该对某事负责,should 指主管上认为有责任和义务去做,但预期不如ought to 强烈。
You ought to respect your teacher . We should be careful of other’s feelings .
F. dare
敢,既可做情态动词也可做实意动词。情态动词常用在否定句和疑问句中,没有人称和数及时态的变化,若做实义动词后接to do sth . 有人称和数及时态的变化.
He dare not go out for a walk alone at night . He dares to climb the tree .
G 其它。
还有以下固定词组,也起着情态动词一样的作用,
Had better do sth 做好做某事 You had better not read books in poor light .
Shall we /I do sth 我们可以做某事吗? Shall we starts the meeting at once ?
Would like to do sth 想要做某事 would you like to come to my birthday ?
Will/would you please do sth 请你做某事好吗? Will you get some chalk ?
used to do sth 过去常常做某事。He used to get up early .
情态动词+have done”用法归纳
1. may和might+ 动词完成式
此结构用于推测过去的行为。例如:
She said that he might have missed the plane.她说他可能误了航班。
2. can和could+ 动词完成式
A. 表示过去能做而没做的事,有一种对过去未付诸实施的事情的惋惜。例如:
In those circumstances we could have done better.
在那样的情况下,我们本来可以做得更好的。(但没有做得更好)
B. 推测过去的某种行动。
Where can /could she have gone? 她可能到哪里去了呢?
The boy can't have finished reading the book so soon because it is difficult even to an adult.
这孩子不可能那么快就把这本书读完的,因为即使对一个成人来说,这本书也是相当难的。
Note:
can't和couldn't+ 动词原形可以用来表示否定推断。例如:
He can't be over fifty.他不可能超过50岁。
3.must +动词完成式
表示对过去行为的推断,具有较大的可能性,意为“一定…,想必…”。例如:
She must have gone through a lot.她一定吃过很多苦。
Note:
must+动词原形→对现在的推测,must be+现在分词→对未来或现在正在进行的推测。例如:
She looks happy; she must be having a good time.
4. needn't+动词完成式和didn't need to do
A. needn't+动词完成式表示一种已经做过的但并无必要的行为。例如:
You needn't have watered the flowers, for it is going to rain.
你本来不必浇花的,因为天要下雨了。(但却浇了)
We needn't have told him the news because he knew it already.
B. didn't need (have) to do结构表示没有必要做某事,实际上也没有做。例如:
I didn't need to clean the windows. My sister did it.
我不必擦窗,我妹妹擦了。(我没有擦)
5. should +动词完成式
A.此结构的肯定式表示应该做的事而没有做,否定式表示某种行为不该发生但却发生了。例如:
You should have given her more help.你应该多给她一些帮助的。(但没有给)
B. 表示推测,意为“可能”,但可能性较小。例如:
He should have finished the work by now.他现在该把工作完成了。(推测)
C. should / would have thought意为“本以为,本认为”。例如:
A: "Can you type?" B: "Certainly." A: "Well, I should have thought you wouldn't."
I should have thought she wouldn't agree.我本来认为她不会同意的。
D. should have thought有时意为“认为,以为”,相当于should think,但表示更为委婉、谦逊或不肯定的语气。例如:
I should have thought it fairly good.我以为它是很不错的。
E. should have + 过去分词用于虚拟语气:
Had you written him, you should have known the details.
6. ought to + 动词完成式
此结构表示某种过去应该做而没有做的事,或被忽略未做的某种明智行为。例如:
You ought to have returned the book earlier.(还晚了)
You ought to have refused her at the beginning, but now it is too late.
Note:
这里的ought to也可以用should代替。
二.动词短语
动词短语是由一些动词和其它词构成的短语,表达一个完整的意思。 其构成方式如下
构 成 方 式
举 例
动词+介词
Agree with , ask for , arrive at/in , begin with , come from , feel like , fall behind , fall off , look after
动词+副词
Come out , eat up , go back , go home , put on , work out , hold on , grow up , look over , move away
动词+副词+介词
Be fed up with , catch up with , get on with ,
Pull out from, look down upon
动词+名词+介词
Take care of , make friends with , have a look at
Play a joke on sb , make room for , say sorry to
Be +形容词+介词
Be busy with , be different from , be good at ,
Be famous for , be short for , be interested in
复杂结构
Make up one’s mind
动词的时态
一.动词的基本形式
绝大多数动词都有五种基本形式:动词原形,一般现在时第三人称单数,现在分词,过去式和过去分词。
1.动词原形。
动词原形就是不带to 的动词不定式,也就是词典中出现的动词原形的形式。
动词原形用法很多,常见的有:
(1)在一般现在时主语不是第三人称单数形式,其谓语动词用动词原形。
We often watch TV at home after supper.
(2) 在句型why not 的后面接动词原形。Why not go there on foot ?
(3) 在had better 后面要用动词原形。 You had better finish your homework be supper .
(4) 在句型let sb后面要用动词原形。Let’s play volleyball after school .
(5) 感官动词和使役动词后面接动词原形做宾语补足语
You words make me feel angry .
(6) 在祈使句的开头用动词原形。 Come and buy the book you need at our bookshop .
(7) 在情态动词后用动词原形。Can you swim across the river in an hour ?
(8) 在do ,will , would 等助动词后。Did you want to go there last Monday ?
2. 第三人称单数。
动词的第三人称单数就是句子的主语是第三人称单数,并且谓语是一般现在时,谓语动词应该用第三人称单数形式,即动词原形后面加-s 或者 es ,My sister often watches TV with us at home
动词的第三人称单数形式的构成:
(1) 一般情况下在动词后加s. work –works take—takes buy –buys cut---cuts
(2) 以字母s, x, ch, sh, o, 结尾的动词加es. Pass---passes catch-catches go- goes
(3) 以辅音字母+y结尾的动词,先把y变成i再加es . carry—carries try—tries
3. 现在分词
动词的现在分词形式由动词原形+ing 构成,一般用作非谓语动词或和be 动词连用构成现在进行时、过去进行时。I saw a boy laying on the ground .
The girl is reading a book .
现在分词的构成:
(1) 一般情况下直接加ing , buy—buying drink –drinking find –finding
(2) 以不发音的字母e 结尾的动词,去掉字母e 加ing . take-taking come-coming
(3) 以重读闭音节结尾的单词,末尾只有一个辅音字母的动词双写此辅音字母,再加ing , sit –sitting stop-stopping run-running begin-beginning get –getting
(4) 部分以ie 结尾的单音节动词,先把ie 变成变成 y,再加ing .
Die—dying lie –lying die –dying tie -- tying
4. 过去式和过去分词。
动词的过去式主要用来构成一般过去时,过去分词是用来构成现在完成时、过去完成时和被动语态的,也可做非谓语动词.
规则的动词的过去式和过去分词变化如下:
(1) 一般情况下直接加ed . work –worked help –helped play –played
(2) 以不发音的字母e结尾的动词直接加d. live-lived like-liked
(3) 以辅音字母+y结尾的动词,先把,先把y变成i,再加ed . carry-carried
(4) 以重读闭音节结尾,且末尾只有一个辅音字母,双写这个辅音字母,然后加ed. Stop-stopped prefer—preferred plan—planned
加上ed 后的读音
(1) 在浊辅音和元音后读/d/ .played carried lived
(2) 在清辅音后读/t/ passed stopped liked
(3) 在/t/ /d /后读/id/ wanted needed mended
不规则的变化
英语中有一些动词的过去式和过去分词是不规则变化,不规则变化的动词有200多个,但他们使用的频率特别高,不规则变化可以分为以下几种形式。
(1)A-A-A 形式。 动词原形、过去式、过去分词三个形式一样。
Cut-cut-cut put-put-put set-set-set hit-hit-hit cost-cost-cost
(2) A-B-B形式。过去式、过去分词一样。
Bright brought brought buy bought bought build built built find found found
(3)A-B-A 动词原形和过去分词一样。Come came come run ran run
(4) A-B-C 动词原形、过去式、过去分词都不一样。
Go went gone do did done see saw seen begin began begun
这一部分又可分为两种。
a. 过去分词在动词原形的基础上变化。 Go went gone (gone 由go 变来)
Rise rose risen (risen由rise 变来)
b. 过去分词由过去式变化而来. Choose chose chosen break broke broken
二. 动词的各种时态。
(一)一般现在时。the Simple Present Tense
1.基本结构:
肯定形式:主语+动词原形(若主语为第三人称单数,动词则要改为第三人称单数形式)
Tom goes to school by bus every morning on weekdays .
否定形式:若句中有be 动词,情态动词,则在后面 加not ,若没有则借助于don’t /doesn’t +动词原形。She is not beautiful but very charming. Jim doesn’t have a bike.
一般疑问句:有be,和亲情态动词的提前,没有的将do ,does 提前,句中动词用原形。
Do you want a go ? Can you swim ?
被动语态were/was done
2. 基本用法:
(1)表示现阶段经常或习惯发生的动作或存在的状态,或者说明主语的特征。
一般现在时的句中常有的时间状语:often, usually , sometimes , always , never, seldom, every day(week等),once/twice a week /(year 等),on Sunday(Friday 等), in the morning (afternoon 等)。
They go to the Palace Museum once a year . They often discuss business in the evening .
(2) 表示客观真理、事实、人的技能或现在的状态时,句子一般不用时间状语。
The earth turns round the sun . Light travels faster than sounds .
(3) 下列动词:come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return,live,fly表示十分确定发生(如安排好的事情)或按照时间表进行的事情,用一般现在时可以表达将来,句中可以有将来的时间,
The train for Haikou leaves at 8:00 in the morning .
(4)在时间状语从句中(以when ,before ,while ,until, as soon as 等引导)和条件状语从句中( 以if , unless等引导),用一般现在时代替一般将来时,句中可以有将来时间。
If it rains tomorrow , we will have to stay at home .
Please ring me up , as soon as you arrive in Germany.
(5) 一般现在时用于倒装句可以表示正在发生的动作,动词以come ,go 为主。
Here comes the bus . There goes the bell .
(6) 一般现在时常用于体育比赛的解说或寓言故事中。
Now the midfield player catches the ball and he keeps it .
(7) 人的心理活动和感官动词一般用一般现在时而不用现在进行时表达,常用动词有:like , love , hate , dislike , want , need , wish , hope , think. understand , remember . forget , mean , hear , feel, see .
I think it is going to snow . I really hope you can enjoy your stay here .
8)在动词hope, take care that, make sure that等后.
I hope they have a nice time next week.
Make sure that the windows are closed before you leave the room.
(二)一般过去时 The Simple Past Tense
1. 基本结构
肯定形式:主语+be 动词(行为动词)的过去式 She often came to help us in those days .
否定形式:was/were +not ; didn’t +动词原形 I didn’t know you were so busy .
一般疑问句:将was /were 提前 Did +主语+动词原形
Were you at home yesterday ? Did you see Jay last Friday ?
2.基本用法:
表示过去某时发生的动作和状态,这种动作和状态可能是一次性的也可能是经常发生的。
(1)表示过去具体时刻发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有at nine , yesterday morning , two days ago, when 等。 I get up at 6:00 this morning .
(2)表示一段时间内不知何时发生的一次性动作时,时间状语有yesterday , last week , in 2000, 等。 He came to our city in 2001.
(3)表示过去一个阶段中经常发生的事情时,时间状语有:last…,in …, from…to…, for several weeks , often, usually , sometimes , always , never 等。
Mr. Jackson usually went to evening schools when he was young .
(4) 讲故事,对过去经历的回忆,双方都明白的过去事件等一般用过去时,而且经常省略时间状语。 I happened to meet Lucy in the street .
四种时间状语
① yesterday及相关短语。
例如:yesterday morning/afternoon/evening 昨天上午/下午/晚上。
② “last+ 时间状语”构成的短语。
例如:last night/month/spring/year 昨晚/上个月/去年春天/去年。
③ “一段时间+ago”组成的短语。
例如:three days ago 三天以前 four years ago四年以前。
④ “介词+ 时间名词”组成的短语。
例如:in 1999 在1999年;on the morning of December 25th 在12月25号早上。
四种谓语动词的表现形式
① be动词的过去式was、were. She was a teacher five years ago. 她五年前是一名教师。
② 行为动词的过去式,分为规则动词和不规则动词两种。
③ 连系动词的过去式。例如:become-became She became angry. 她生气了。
④ 情态动词的过去式+动词原形。I could swim at the age of five. 我五岁时就会游泳了。
(三)一般将来时 The Simple Future Tense
1.基本结构
肯定形式:am/is /are +going to +do ; will /shall +do
They are going to have a competition with us . It is going to rain .
否定形式:am/is /are +not+going to +do ; will /shall+not +do
They are not going to /will not go climbing if it rains tomorrow .
一般疑问句:be 放在句首;will/shall 提到句首。
Will you go shopping tomorrow ?
2.基本用法:表示将来某个时间将要发生的动作或存在的状态,也表示将来经常或反复发生的动作,经常与表示将来的时间状语连用。
(1)一般将来时的时间状语有tomorrow , this afternoon , next week , one day , soon , someday , sometime , in the future ,when 等。
(2)用will 构成的将来时,表示动作与人的主观愿望无关。Shall 用于第一人称,will 用于所有人称。I will graduate from this school soon . You will stay alone after I leave .
(3) am/is /are +going to +do 表示打算或准备要做的事,或者主观判断即将要发生的事。
而am/is /are + to +do表示安排或计划中的动作。It’s going to rain soon .
A man told them that the woman was to give birth to the special baby .
(4) 表示一个人临时决定要做某事。可以用will 表达。
I will go to the lab to get some chemicals .So please wait until I return .
(5) 现在进行时、一般现在时也可以表示将来。
The train for Haikou leaves at 8:00 in the morning . He is leaving soon .
(6) shall 和will在口语的一些疑问句中相当于情态动词,shall 一般与第一人称连用,will与第二人称连用。Shall we go to the zoo next Saturday ? Will you please open the door for me ?
(7) be to + 动词原形 表示按照计划将要发生的事情。
An angel came to tell her that she was to have this special boy .
3. 它的标志性时间状语
1.)含tomorrow; next短语; 2.)in+段时间 ; 3).how soon;
4)).by+将来时间; 5.)by the time sb.do…
6).祈使句句型中:or/and sb. will do
7).在时间/条件状语从句中, 如果从句用一般现在时, 主句用将来时
8).another day
4..如何比较be going to 与will的使用:
①be going to 表示近期、眼下就要发生的事情,will 表示的将来时间则较远一些。 e.g: He is going to write a letter tonight. He will write a book one day.
②be going to 表示根据主观判断将来肯定发生的事情,will表示客观上将来势必发生的事情。 He is seriously ill. He is going to die. He will be twenty years old.
③be going to 含有“计划,准备”的意思,而 will 则没有这个意思,
She is going to lend us her book. He will be here in half an hour.
④在有条件从句的主句中,不用 be going to, 而用will,
If any beasts come at you, I'll stay with you and help you.
5.主将从现详讲
定义:if 引导的条件状语从句中,主句用将来时态,从句用现在时态。If是连词,所连接的句子 叫条件状语 从句,表示假设或条件,意思是“ 如果…的话” 。
常见的主将从现连接词:if,as soon as, unless
I’ll go with you as soon as I finish my work.
表示假设,表示将会发生和可能发生的事,或进行提醒警告。句子结构如下:
If +句子(一般现在时),+主句(主语will/may/can) +动词)
a. If you finish your homework, you can go out and play.
b. If I have enough money next year, I will go to travel.
②表示真实条件、客观真理、自然现象、定理定义 、民间谚语等,
句型是: If + 句子 (一般现在时 ),+ 主句 ( 一般现在时)
If you study hard, you are sure to succeed.
If a glass falls on the floor, it usually breaks
(四) 现在进行时。The Present Continuous Tense
1.基本结构
肯定形式:am/is/are +doing He is doing well in his lessons .
否定形式:am/is/are +not+doing She is not reading .
一般疑问句:将am/is/are放在句首。 Are you feeling better now ?
2.基本用法:现在进行时表示现在正在进行的动作或现阶段正在发生而此刻不一定在进行的动作。
(1)表示说话时正在进行或发生的动作,这时可以不用时间状语,也可以和now, at present, at the moment等时间状语连用。有时用一个动词,如look,listen
What are you reading now? Listen! Someone is singing in the classroom.
(2)表示当前一段时期的活动或现阶段正在进行的动作。
What are doing up in the tree ? I am writing a long novel these days .
(3) 表示即将发生的动作,一般指近期安排好的事情。常见的动词有come , go , stay, leave , spend , do drive ,fly 等 。I’m coming now . He is leaving soon .
(4) 表示频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always 等频度副词连用,以表示赞扬、不满或讨厌等感情色彩。
He is always borrowing money from me and forgetting all about it some time later .
他总是向我借钱,过一段时间就忘得一干二净。
3. 现在进行时与一般现在时的区别
(1)现在进行时表示动作的暂时性,而一般现在时表示动作的习惯性和经常性
I am watching TV now. (暂时性) I watch TV every day. (经常性)
(2)现在进行时可表示短暂性动作,而一般现在时表示长久性动作。
Lucy is living in Beijing.(短时间居住)Lucy lives in Beijing. (长久性居住)
(3)现在进行时表示的动作可带有感情色彩,而一般现在时所表述的动作通常是事实。
You’re always forgetting the most important things. (责备)
He is always helping others. (赞扬) He often helps others. (事实)
(4)有些动词不能用进行时,know, understand, love, like, hate, wish, want, think, hope, have, believe, agree, hear, see, notice,等等。这些动词通常用一般现在时表示说话时发生的动作。
I have a lot of friends here. She wants to buy a new bike.
(五)过去进行时。The Past Continuous Tense
1.基本结构:
肯定形式:was /were +doing at that time she was working in a hospital .
否定形式:was /were +not + doing when he came , I was not reading but watching TV .
一般疑问句:把was /were 放在句首。 Were you cooking at this time yesterday ?
2.基本用法:过去进行时表示过去某一时刻或某阶段正在进行的动作。
(1)过去进行时的时间状语有:then, at that time ,this time yesterday , at seven yesterday .以及when 引导的时间状语从句。He was cooking supper this time yesterday .
The little girl was playing with her toy when I saw her .
(2) 用于宾语从句或时间状语从句中,表示与主句动作同时进行而且延续时间较长。 句子中通常不用时间状语。She saw it happen when she was walking past .
They sang a lot of songs while they were walking in the dark forest .
(3)也可以表示过去一个阶段频繁发生或反复进行的动作,常与always 等频度副词连用,以表示赞扬、不满或讨厌等感情色彩。He always borrowing money from me when he lived here
3.when和while的区别
(1)when,while都有“当……时候”的意思。
when既可表示某一点时间,也可以表示某一段时间 。
在when引导的时间状语从句中,其谓语动词可以是延续性的,也可以是非延续性的,可与主句中的谓语动词同时发生,也可在其后发生。
I was just reading a book when she came into my room. 她走进我房间时,我正在看书。
Were you writing when the teacher came in? 老师进来的时候,你在写信吗?
When he was a child he was always trying out new ideas.他小时候就常常试验一些新的设想。
(2)while只能表示某一段时间,不能表示某一点时间。在while引导的时间状语从句中,其谓语动词只能是延续性的,而且也只能与主句中的谓语动词同时发生或存在。
While Jim was mending his bike, Lin Tao came to see him. 正当吉姆修自行车时,林涛来看他。
You can’t do your homework while you’re watching TV. 你不能一边看电视一边做家庭作业。
(3)另外,when和while的区别还在于:while引导的时间状语从句多用进行时态,而when引导的时间状语从句多用一般时态。
While they were talking , the bell rang. 正在他们谈话的时候,上课铃响了。
I was doing my homework when my mother came back home yesterday evening.
昨天晚上妈妈回家的时候,我正在做家庭作
(4)when和while 还可作并列连词。when表示“在那时”;while表示“而,却”,表对照关系。
The children were running to move the bag of rice when they heard the sound of a motor bike. 孩子们正要跑过去搬开那袋米,这时他们听到了摩托车的声音。
He is strong while his brother is weak. 他长得很结实,而他弟弟却很瘦弱。
4. 使用过去进行时应注意的几点
(1) 过去进行时可表示按计划、安排过去某时刻将要发生的动作。如:
He said they were leaving for Beijing this afternoon. 他说他今天下午要去北京。
(2) 动词hope, wonder等的过去进行时常用来表示提出要求,虽然表示现在的内容,但语气比一般现在时或一般过去时要委婉。如:
I was wondering whether you could come to join us. 我想你能否过来跟我们一起活动?
(3) 过去进行时中有always, forever, continually, constantly修饰时,表示说话人的赞赏或厌烦的感情。如:
He was always thinking of others. 他总是想到人家。
4. 过去进行时与一般过去时的区别
(1) 过去进行时强调动作在过去某时刻正在进行或持续,而一般过去时表示动作的完成。如:
He was writing his composition last night. 他昨晚在写作文。(不一定写完)
He wrote his composition last night. 他昨晚写了一篇作文。(已经写完)
(2) 表示过去的状态、感觉及心理活动的静态动词(如be, like, love, hate, fear, own, hear, see, know, want, notice)可用于一般过去时,但通常不用于进行时。如:
I hated it when a man spoke with his mouth full of food. 我讨厌人们说话时口里含着食物。
(3) 一般过去时与always, constantly, forever, continually等连用,表示“过去经常性、习惯性的动作”;而过去进行时与always, constantly, forever, continually等连用,表示动作的重复,常带有感情色彩。如:
He always got up at six. 他过去总是六点起床。
He was always thinking of his work. 他总是一心想到工作。
(4) 有时过去进行时可以用来替换一般过去时,但一般过去时表示主语的行为是经过认真考虑的;而过去进行时表示一种较随便或没有进行仔细考虑的行为。如:
I thought that he would agree with us. 我原以为它会同意我们的。
I was thinking of persuading him to follow my advice.
我想到了要说服他接受我们的建议。
(六)现在完成时The Present Perfect Tense
1.基本结构 :
肯定形式:has/have +done I have written an article .
否定形式:has/have +not +done He hasn’t changed a little so many years .
一般疑问句:has/have 提到主语前面 Have you been to Beijing ? Yes , I have .
2.基本用法:现在完成时表示一个发生在过去的,对现在仍有影响的动作,或表示开始在过去,并且一直延续到现在,甚至还可以延续下去的动作。
(1)表示发生在过去对现在仍有影响的动作时,时间状语有:already, yet, just, ever, never, before , once, twice , three times 等。 I have never seen such a fine picture before .
(2) 表示在过去开始一直延续到现在(可能延续下去)的动作或状态时,时间状语有:for four weeks , since ,since 1990, since last year ,since two weeks ago ,so far , ever since , since then , in the last(past )…years 等。
I have been away from my hometown for thirty years .
(3)口语中的Have got 往往表示Have (有)的意思。 They have got thousands of books .
(4) have/has been to、have/has gone to 和 have been in
have(has) been to...表示“曾去过某地,已经从那里回来了”,可以和ever、never、twice等连用。
have(has) gone to表示“已经去了某地,在去那里的途中或到达那里还没有回来”。have(has) been in 表示“在某地呆多长时间”,常与表示一段时间的状语连用, since, for, how long 等
He went to Shanghai last week 上周他去了上海
He has been to Shanghai.
他(曾经)到/去过上海.(但他人现在肯定不是在上海而是回来了)
He has gone to Shanghai.
他已经去上海了.(也许刚动身出发,也许已经到了,也许还在路上,反正他人不在这里)
Mr. Brown has been in Shanghai for three days. 布朗先生来上海已经有三天了
(5) yet already
Already 多用于肯定句中,用在Have/has 后,分词前, 有时也用在疑问句句尾,表示惊讶的语气。Yet 常用于疑问句和否定句句尾。
Jim has already done his homework. I haven’t finished reading the book yet .
(6) since for
For +一段时间 since +过去点时间/一般过去式的句子 since+段时间+ago
He has lived for three years . I have lived here since I was born .
与since 有关的两个句式。
It is +段时间+since+一般过去时的句子
段时间+ has passed +since +一般过去时的句子
It’s three days since he left shanghai . Three days has passed since he left Shanghai .
(7)延续性动词与瞬间动词
①英语中的行为动词有延续性和瞬间动词之分,
延续性动词是表示一个动作可以持续一段时间或更长,能够和表示一段时间的状语连用。 常见的有:study ,play , do , read , learn , write , clean , sleep , speak , talk , wait ,fly , stay , sit, stand , lie , keep 等。
瞬间性动词是表示一个瞬间动作,动作一发生即结束。亦称终止性动词。常见的有:begin ,start, finish , go ,come, leave , find ,get up , arrive , reach , get to , enter, hear, stop , open, close, become , buy , sell , borrow ,lend , happen , join , lose, renew , die , take away , put up , set out , put on , get on ,get off 等。
非延续性动词可以转化成延续性动词主要有以下几种:
A用相应的延续性动词:
buy—have , borrow –keep put on –wear catch (get)a cold –have a cold
Get to know—know
B. 转化成be +名词
join the army (party ,league )__be a soldier (party member, league member )
Go to school _-be a student become a teacher –be a teacher become –be
C. 转化成be + 形容词或副词。
Go-be away come –be here leave /go –be away /be not here come back –be back
die –be dead lose—be lost return –be back finish /end –be over get up –be up
Finish—be over begin/start –be on open—be open close –be closed turn on –be on
Fall sleep –be asleep wake up –be awake fall(get) ill (sick)—be ill(sick)
move –be out of
D. 转化成be + 介词短语。
Go /come to +地点---be in /at +地点 join –be in ….. be a ……member
move to +地点—be in /at +地点
②延续性动词在完成时中能与表示持续一段时间的状语连用,而瞬间动词不能。
His father has lain in bed for half an hour .
③瞬间动词在完成时中不能与一段时间连用,如果要与表示持续一段时间的状语连用,通常意思相当的持续性动词来代替,二用it is …since 结构来替换瞬间动词。
The film has been on for five minutes . It’s five minutes since the film began .
④瞬间动词的否定形式可以与表示一段时间的状语连用。 I haven’t seen you for a long time .
(8)用于现在完成时的句型
1)It is the first / second time…. that…结构中的从句部分,用现在完成时。
It is the first time that I have visited the city.
It was the third time that the boy had been late.
2)This is the… that…结构,that 从句要用现在完成时.
This is the best film that I've (ever) seen. 这是我看过的最好的电影。
This is the first time (that) I've heard him sing. 这是我第一次听他唱歌。
(9)现在完成时与一般过去时的区别。
A一般过去时表示过去某时发生的动作或单纯叙述过去的事情,强调动作;现在完成时为过去发生的,强调过去的事情对现在的影响,强调的是影响。
I saw this film yesterday.(强调动作发生的时间是yesterday 。)
I have seen this film.(强调对现在的影响,电影的内容已经知道了。)
B一般过去时和表示过去的时间状语连用,如:…ago, last week/...
In 2008, in the past, just now, the day before yesterday, yesterday ... Then(那时),that day, one day, once(从前) 现在完成时常和recently(近来),ever, never, twice, so far(到目前为止), since,for,in the past/last few years , already(肯定句), yet(否定,疑问句), just(刚刚), before(以前)连用。现在完成时不与表示过去的时间状语连用。
C现在完成时可表示持续到现在的动作或状态,动词一般是延续性的,如live, teach, learn, work, study, know
D现在完成时和一般过去时的转化,将一段时间状语改为过去时间状语。
I have been a league member for 3 years . I joined the League three years ago .
(七)过去完成时The Past Perfect Tense
1.基本结构:
肯定形式:had + done As soon as we got to the station , the train had left .
否定形式:had +not +done I had not been to Shanghai .
一般疑问句:had 放于句首。 Had you telephoned her before she left ?
2.基本用法:
过去完成时常表示过去某一时间或动作发生之前已经完成的动作。简言之,过去完成时所表示的时间是过去的过去。
(1) 1、表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成的动作。 他表示的时间是"过去 的过去 "过去完成时的时间状语有:by last week , by then , by the end of (last …)
until then 等。
常与by last year, by the time of yesterday,等连用。如: She said she had seen the film 4 times.
When Mr Li got to the classroom, all the students had begun reading. By the time they arrived, the bus had left.
2、表示 从过去某一时间开始一直延续到过去另一时间的动作或状态。常与for (后跟段时间)或since (后跟点时间)等连用.如:
She had worked in this school since it opened 25 years ago.
He had learned more than 2000 words by the end of last term ./
(2)用在状语从句中,过去完成时常用的连词
有: before, by, until, when, after, once, as soon as等。
等连词的复合句中,在过去不同时间发生的两个动作中,发生在先,用过去完成时;发生在后,用一般过去时。
They had lived in Beijing for two years before they came here .
When I got up ,it had stopped raining .
注意:如果两个动作紧接着发生,则常常不用过去完成时,特别是在包含before和after的复合句中,因为 这 时从句的动作和主句的动作发生的先后顺序已经非常明确,这时可以用一般过去时代替过去完成时。
例如: After he arrived in England, Marx worked hard to improve hisEnglish.
马克思到达英格兰之后,努力提高他的英语水平。
(3)用在宾语从句中,told, said, knew, heard, thought等动词引导的宾语从句中,从句要用过去完成时。 Jim said he had read the book before .
(4)叙述过去发生的事情,在已叙述了过去发生的事情后,反过来追述或补述以前发生的动作时,常使用过去完成时。
例如: Mr. Smith died yesterday. He had been a good friend of mine.
史密斯先生昨天去世了。他以前是我的好友。
I didn’t know a thing about the verbs, for I had not studied mylesson.
我对动词一无所知,因为我没有好好学习功课。
(5)在含有定语从句的主从复合句中,如果叙述的是过去的事,先发生的动作常用过去完成时。
I returned the book that I had borrowed.我已归还了我借的书。
She found the key that she had lost.她丢失的钥匙找到了。
(7)动词think, want, hope, mean, plan, intend等用过去完成时来表示过去未曾实现的想法,希望,打算或意图等。
例如: They had wanted to help but could not get there in time.
他们本来打算去帮忙,但没有及时赶到那里。
We had hoped to be able to come and see you .
我们本来希望能来看看你。
(8)过去完成时还可用在hardly…when…, no sooner…than…, It was the first (second, etc)
time (that)…等固定句型中。
例如: Hardly had he begun to speak when the audience interrupted him.
他刚开始演讲,听众就打断了他。
No sooner had he arrived than he went away again
他刚到就又走了。
It was the third time that he had been out of work that year.
这是他那一年第三次失业了。
时间状语
before,when,after,by+,until, once,had no sooner……than
过去完成时-语法判定
1. 由时间状语来判定
一般说来,各种时态都有特定的时间状语。与过去完成时连用的时间状语有:
( 1 ) by + 过去的时间点。如:
I had finished reading the novel by nine o'clock last night.
( 2 ) by the end of + 过去的时间点。如:
We had learned over two thousand English words by the end of lastterm.
( 3 ) before + 过去的时间点。如:
They had planted six hundred trees before last Wednesday.
2. 由“过去的过去”来判定。
过去完成时表示“过去的过去”,是指过去某一动作之前已经发生或完成的动作,即动作有先后关系,动作在前的用过去完成时,在后的用一般过去时。这种用法常出现在:
( 1 )宾语从句中
当宾语从句的主句为一般过去时,且从句的动作先于主句的动作时,从句要用过去完成时。在told, said, knew, heard, thought等动词后的宾语从句。如:
She said that she had seen the film before.
( 2 )状语从句中
在时间、条件、原因、方式等状语从句中,主、从句的动作发生有先后关系,动作在前的,要用过去完成时,动作在后的要用一般过去时。如:
After he had finished his homework, he went to bed.
注意: before, after 引导的时间状语从句中,由于 before 和 after 本身已表达了动作的先后关系,若主、从句表示的动作紧密相连,则主、从句都用一般过去时。如:
After he closed the door, he left the classroom.
(3)表示意向的动词,如hope, wish, expect, think, intend, mean, suppose等,用过去完成时表示"原本…,未能…"
We hadhoped that you would come, but you didn't.
3. 根据上、下文来判定。
I met Wang Tao in the street yesterday. We hadn't seen each othersince he went to Beijing.
过去完成时-语法区别
一、过去完成时与现在完成时的区别
现在完成时表示的动作发生在过去,以现在的时间为基点,但侧重对现在产生的结果或造成的影响,与现在有关,其结构为“助动词 have (has) + 过去分词”;过去完成时则是一个相对的时态,已过去时间为基点,它所表示的动作不仅发生在过去,更强调“过去的过去”,只有和过去某时或某动作相比较时,才用到它。
比较:I have learned 1000 English words so far.到目前为止我已经学会了 1000 个英语单词。
I had learned 1000 English words till then.到那时为止我已经学会了 1000 个英语单词。
— I'm sorry to keep you waiting. 对不起,让你久等了。
— Oh, not at all. I have been here only a few minutes.没什么,我只等了几分钟。(“等”的动作从过去某一时间点持续到现在)
二、过去完成时与一般过去时的区别
虽然这两种时态都表示过去发生的动作或存在的状态,但在使用时应注意以下几点:
1. 时间状语不同:过去完成时在时间上强调“过去的过去”;而一般过去时只强调过去某一特定的时间。
比较:They had arrived at the station by ten yesterday.
They arrived at the station at ten yesterday.
2. 在没有明确的过去时间状语作标志时,谓语动词动作发生的时间先后须依据上下文来判断:先发生的用过去完成时,后发生的则用一般过去时。
She was very happy. Her whole family were pleased with her, too.She had just won the first in the composition competition.
3. 当两个或两个以上接连发生的动作用 and 或 but 连接时,按时间顺序,只需用一般过去时来代替过去完成时;另外,在 before , after , as soon as 引导的从句中,由于这些连词本身已经表示出时间的先后,因此也可以用过去时来代替过去完成时。
He entered the room, turned on the light and read an evening paper.
(八) 过去将来时(The future –in –the –past Tense )
过去将来时态
定义:
过去将来时的基本特征,即 “立足过去,着眼未来”。它表示从过去某一时间来看将要发生的某个动作或存在的某种状态。但这个"将来"时间绝不会延伸到“现在”;而仅限于“过去时间区域内”。由此可以看出,含这个时态的句子常带一个表示“过去某个时间点”的状语
Mary told me that she would go to Shanghai by plane
.玛丽告诉我说她将要坐飞机去上海。
基本构成
A ) would + 动词原形
He asked me if I would stay here. 他问我是否要待在这儿。
B ) was / were going to + 动词原形
No one knew when he was going to finish his homework.
没有人知道他什么时候会完成作业。
C ) was/ were about to + 动词原形
He said that they were to leave at six.
他说他们将于6点动身。
She said that the meeting was about to begin. 她说会议就要开始
D) was / were to + 动词原形。如:
The building was to be completed next month. 这座建筑改在下个月竣工。
Li Lei was to arrive soon. 李蕾很快就要到了。
E) come, go, arrive, leave, die 等瞬时动词,用在过去进行时态中表示过去将来。 was / were +现在分词。
He was leaving the next day. 他第二天要走了。
We were informed that the leaders were coming to our school soon.
我们接到通知说领导们很快要来我们学校。
表示纯粹的将来时用should /would .
表示打算或主观认为的事情常用was /were +going to +动词原形
She told me that she was going to have a walk with her pet dog .
基本用法
A ) 主句为过去时,宾语从句常表示将要发生的事情。 如:Nobody knew what would happen after a hundred years.
没有人知道一百年之后将会发生什么事。
B)表示过去习惯性的动作
During that period , he would do morning-exercises every day.
在那段时间,他每天早锻炼。
C) 表示过去情况中的“愿望”、“倾向”,多用于否定句。例如:
No matter how difficult the work was , he would keep on doing it until he accomplished it . 不管工作有多难,他总会坚持不懈地把它干完。
D) 过去将来时,用于虚拟语气中,如:
If I were you, I would not do that. 要是我是你的话,我就不会那样做。
动词的语态
一. 语态的概述。
英语的语态是通过动词的变化表现出来的,英语中有两种语态:主动语态和被动语态。
主动语态表示主语是动作的执行者。
被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者,即行为动作的对象。
主动语态和被动语态指的是动词形式,是词法概念,而主动句和被动句则指的是句子结构,因此是句法概念。所谓主动句就是由主动语态动词或词组作谓语动词的的句子,而被动句则是由被动语态动词或词组做谓语的句子。
He opened the door . The door was opened .
二被动语态
(一)被动语态的定义
被动语态是动词的一种特殊形式,用来说明主语与谓语动词之间的关系。如果主语是动作的执行者即某人做某事便叫主动语态,如果主语是动作的承受者即某事被做,便叫被动语态。主动语态与被动语态的区别不是词序的区别,而是主语与谓语意义上的区别。在英语中只有及物动词和一些相当于及物动词词组才有被动语态的形式。
(二)被动语态的基本时态变化。
被动语态由 be +过去分词 构成,be 随事态的变化而变化,各种时态的被动语态形式为(以动词do 为例。
时态
语态
动词形式
例 句
一般现在时
主 动
Do/ does
We study English .
被 动
Am/is / are +done
English is studied by us .
一般过去时
主 动
Did
He mended his bike yesterday .
被 动
Was/were +done
His bike was mended by him yesterday .
一般将来时
主 动
Will /shall +do
We will finish the work tomorrow .
被 动
Will/shall+be +done
The work will be finished by us tomorrow .
过去将来时
主 动
Would /should +do
He said they would take down the old building.
被 动
Would /should +be +done
He said the old building would be taken down by them .
现在进行时
主 动
Am/is /are +doing
They are planting trees by the river .
被 动
Am/is/are+being+done
Trees are being planted by the river .
过去进行时
主 动
Was/were +doing
I was writing a letter to my uncle at eight yesterday .
被 动
Was/were+being+done
A letter was being written to my uncle by me at eight yesterday .
现在完成时
主 动
Has/have+ done
She has found the lost box.
被 动
Has/have+been +done
The lost box has been found by her .
过去完成时
主 动
Had +done
They had finished the work before
yesterday
被 动
Had +been +done
The work had been finished by them before yesterday.
说明:主动变被动,时态不变动。
(三)由情态动词构成的被动语态:情态动词+be +done
Your homework must be handed in before class.
(四) 动词不定式的被动语态:to +be +done .
There are till twenty trees need to be planed .
(五) 被动语态的用法
1.当我们不知道谁是动作的执行者时或没有必要指出谁是动作的执行者
This watch was made in China .
2.当我们需要强调动作的承受者,而不是执行者。 English is spoken in many parts of the world .
3.为了强调动作的执行者而用by修饰时。Such songs are usually sung by girls .
4.出于礼貌措辞等原因,不愿说出动作的执行者时。You are invited to a party at eight tomorrow .
5.在文章的标题广告新闻等中常省略动词be 的被动语态。 Girl wanted (招女工)
6.当动作的执行者不是人时,也往往用被动语态。 The house was washed away by the flood .
(六)主动语态如何改为被动语态。
1.把主动语态的宾语变为被动语态的主语。
2.把谓语变成被动结构(be +过去分词)。根据被动语态句子里的主语的人称和数,以及原来主动语态句子中动词的时态来决定be 的形式。
3.把主动语态中的主语放在by 之后作宾语,将主格改为宾格。
4.其它部分的词放在原来位置上。
5.当主动语态的宾语补足语是省略to 的不定式时,变被动语态为主语补足语时,要把to 补出。
6.短语动词作谓语的句子变被动语态时不可丢掉介词或副词。
All the people laughed at him -----he was laughed at by all the people .
They often make us laugh .---we are made to laugh by them .
歌诀是:宾变主,主变宾,by短语后面跟。 谓语动词变被动,be后“过分”来使用。
(七) 被动语态变主动语态。
被动语态便主动语态与主动语态变被动语态方法相反。
被动语态by 宾语是主动语态的主语,宾格变成主格。将谓语的被动形式改为主动结构,改动时注意人称、数、时态的变化。把被动结构的主语变成主动结构的宾语。
It has been done by them .------they have done it .
(八) 被动语态的注意点
(1)时态保持一致。I have repaired my computer.---My computer has been repaired.
(2)谓语为动词短语的被动语态不能丢掉动词短语的介词或副词。
His best friend often looks after him. --He is often looked after by his best friend.
(3) 主动语态中若有双宾语,将其中一个宾语变为被动句的主语,另一个宾语不变。动词make/buy//get用for;动词give//send/lend/take用to) Vivian gave me a book. (双宾语,人间物直, me为间接宾语,a book 为直接宾语) -- I was given a book by Vivian.
--A book was given to me by Vivian.(直接宾语提前时,要在间接宾语前加介词)
(4)主动语态若有复合宾语,(即句子结构为主+及物动词+宾+宾补),将主动句的宾语变为被动句的主语,宾补不变。 They call him Louis. --He is called Louis.
(5)当“动词+宾语+宾语补足语”结构变为被动语态时,将宾语变为被动结构中的主语,其余不动。
Someone caught the boy smoking a cigarette.
可改为The boy was caught smoking a cigarette.
(6)主动语态句中动词make, have, let(使sb做sth), notice. see. watch, look at, hear, listen to, feel等变成被动语态时,后面的不定式需要加上to.
Mr. Lee made him wash the dishes. --He was made to wash the dishes.
(7)有些相当于及物动词的动词词组,如“动词+介词”,“动词+副词”等,也可以用于被动结构,但要把它们看作一个整体,不能分开。其中的介词或副词也不能省略。
例The meeting is to be put off till Friday.
(8)非谓语动词的被动语态 v.+ing 形式及不定式 to do 也有被动语态(一般时态和完成时态) 。
例I don't like being laughed at in the public.
(9)It is said that+从句及其他类似句型
一些表示“据说”或“相信”的动词如believe, consider, expect, report, say, suppose, think等可以用于句型“It+be+过去分词+that从句”或“主语+be+过去分词+to do sth.”。有:
It is said that„ 据说,It is reported that„据报道,It is believed that„大家相信,It is hoped that„大家希望,It is well known that„众所周知,It is thought that„大家认为,It is suggested that„据建议。
It is said that the boy has passed the national exam.
(=The boy is said to have passed the national exam. )
(九)主动形式表示被动意义。
1.英语中有很多动词如break , catch , clean, drive , lock, open, read , write , wear , wash , sell ,等,当它们用作不及物动词来描述主语(常识物)的特征,而非人为的原因时,常用主动形式表达被动意义。句中状语往往与表示效果或程度的副词连用如well, easily, fast, badly, smoothly .
This kind of cloth washes well .
注意:主动语态表被动强调的是主语的特征。而被动语态则强调外界作用造成的影响。
2.表示发生进行的不及物动词和短语happen ,take place, last ,break out , come out , come true , run out give out , turn out , belong to ,own , appear , agree with , rise , 等以主动形式表示被动意义。
How do the newspapers come out ?
3.有些表示状态的及物动词fit , mean , cost, weight , wish, measure equal ,等,没有被动语态。
4.系动词没有被动形式,但有些表示感受感官的连系动词,feel, look .sound . taste ,smell, turn ,get ,等在主系表结构中常以主动形式表示被动意义。
The mooncakes taste good ..
5.在need , want , require , bear 等词后面。动名词用主动形式表示被动意义,其含义相当于动词不定式的被动形式。 The house needs repaired (to be repaired )
6. worth 后面跟动名词的主动形式表示被动意义,但不能跟动词不定式。而worthy 后面跟不定式的被动形式
This picturebook is well worth reading .-----This picturebook is very worthy to be read .
7.动词不定式在名词后面作定语,不定式和名词之间有动宾关系,,又和句中另一名词或代词构成主谓关系时,不定式的主动形式表示被动意义。
I have a lot of things to do this afternoon. (to do与things是动宾关系,与I是主谓关系。)
试比较:I’ll go to the post office. Do you have a letter to be posted? ( 此处用不定式的被动语态作定语表明you不是post动作的执行者。)
(8) 在某些“形容词+不定式”做表语或宾语补足语的结构中,句子的主语或宾语又是动词不定式的逻辑宾语时,这时常用不定式的主动形式表达被动意义。这些形容词有nice,easy,fit,hard,difficult,important,impossible,pleasant,interesting等。
This problem is difficult to work out .(可看作to work out省略了for me).
(9) 在too„ to„结构中,不定式前面可加逻辑主语,所以应用主动形式表示被动意义。 例This book is too expensive (for me) to buy.
(10) 在there be„句型中,当动词不定式修饰名词作定语时,不定式用主动式作定语,重点在人,用被动形式作定语,重点在物。
There is no time to lose(to be lost).(用 to lose可看成for us to lose;用to be lost,谁 lost time不明确。)
(11) 在be to do结构中的一些不定式通常应用主动表主动, 被动表被动。然而,由于古英语的影响,下列动词rent,blame,let等仍用不定式的主动形式表示被动意义。 Who is to blame for starting the fire?
(12).介词in, on, under等+名词构成介词短语表被动意义 表示方位的介词与含动作意义的名词合用,含被动之义,其意义相当于该名词相应动词的被动形式,名词前一般不用冠词。
“under +名词”结构,表示“某事在进行中”。
常见的有:under control(受控制), under treatment(在治疗中), under repair(在修理中), under discussion(在讨论中), under construction(在施工中)。
例The building is under construction( is being constructed).
非谓语动词
概述:英语的动词就其功能而言有谓语动词和非谓语动词,谓语动词是可以单独做谓语的动词,非谓语动词在句中不可以单独作谓语,谓语动词有人称和数的变化,而非谓语动词则不受主语的人称和数的变化,和时态的限制。在什么情况下都是一样的。谓语动词只具备动词特点。非谓语动词具有动词和其它词的特点,在句中可做定语,状语,宾语补足语,主语,宾语,表语。非谓语动词有动词不定式,动名词,分词(现在分词和过去分词)
一不定式
(一)基本形式:to +动词原形,有时to 可以省略,这里的to 只是动词不定式标记和符号。本身没有词义,动词不定式没有人称和数的变化,动词不定式和它的宾语或状语构成不定式短语。
动词不定式是非谓语动词的一种,由不定式符号(to)加动词原形构成。不定式的形式有五种:
1. 一般式to do I like to read English.
2. 进行式to be doing He seemed to be reading something at that time.
3. 完成式to have done He seemed to have cleaned the room.
4. 被动式to be done The work is to be done soon.
5. 完成被动式 to have been done
The boy is said to have been sent to hospital yesterday.
(二)用法:动词不定式具有名词,形容词,副词特性,可做主语,宾语, 状语,表语,定语
1.作主语,
(1)不定式做主语时,可以直接放在谓语动词之前。
To see is to believe. Not to get there in time is your fault.
(2)注:常用it做形式主语,将to do放在位于之后,使句子保持平衡。
句型1:It + 谓语 + to do
It takes us an hour _to__ get there by bus.
句型2. Its + n. + to do
Its our duty _to_ help the poor. It is a great enjoyment _to_ spend our holiday in the mountains.
句型3: It is + adj + for sb to do sth(是形容事物的性质的 )
It is + adj + of sb to do sth(是形容人的品质的 )
It is easy for me to finish this work before ten.
learn English well is not easy .----It’s not easy to learn English well.
2.作定语:动词不定式作定语时应该放在所修饰的词后面,不定式做谓语与它所修饰的名词之间有逻辑上的动宾关系。如果是不及物动词,且与所修饰的名词有动宾关系,要在不定式后面加上适当的介词。当不定式所修饰的名词如果是time ,place, way, 不定式后面的介词习惯上要省略。
He has lots of things to do . he is looking for a room to live in . they found a place to stay .
1) 不定式与它所修饰的词有动宾关系 Do you have anything to wash today?
2) 不定式用来说明所修饰词的内容 I have no chance to go there.
3) 被修饰词是不定式的逻辑主语 She is always the last to leave the room.
4) 不定式为不及物动词且和所修饰的名词是动宾关系时,须加介词
A.The house is not big enough for us all to live in
B. Would you please pass me the knife to cut the fruit with
C.I have something important to say. Please find a piece of paper to write on
3.作宾语:
(1)有一些谓语动词后只能跟动词不定式作宾语,构成:动词+to do sth 结构。
这样的动词有:
想要 拒绝 忘记 want would like refuse forget
需要 努力 学习 need try learn
喜欢 同意 帮助 like love agree help
计划 决定 开始 plan decide start begin
希望 答应 命令 要求 hope wish promise order demand
记住 假装 设法 选择 remember pretend manage choose
(2)不定式的复合宾语:在find ,feel, think , make ,后面跟不定式作宾语时,常用it 代替,而将真正的宾语放在句末。构成主语+make(feel, think, find)+it +adj +to do sth 结构
I find it easy to read English every day .
(3)不定式作宾语补足语。不定式做宾语补足语时与宾语有逻辑上的主谓关系。
A. 下列动词后面不定式作宾补一定要带to 的不定式。构成动词+ sb+ to do sth
Want ,would like, ask ,tell , teach , wish ,invite , order , beg, get ,allow, encourage等
Lucy asked him to turn down the radio .
B.下列动词的不定式做宾补时,to必须省略 构成 动词+sb +do sth 结构。但改为被动语态时to 要补出来。这样的动词有:
一感feel. 二听 listen to ,hear ,三让 have ,make , let 四看 look at, watch , see , notice .
We often hear her sing in her room -----she is often heard to sing in her room .
C. help 后用动词不定式做宾语补足语时to 可有可无。
She often helps her mother (to )do housework .
4. 不定式做表语。 Her hobby is to collect stamps .
5. 做状语:
(1)目的状语。 I came here to see you .
(2) 结果状语。 Too to enough to in order to so as to
In order to pass the exam ,he worked very hard .
(3)原因状语。 不定式用在表语形容词或分词后,用来说明产生这种情况的原因,构成
Be +adj +to do sth 这样的形容词有 kind , nice , happy , sad , glad , sorry , afraid , worried , surprised, pleased , excited 等。 I’m sorry to hear that .
对比To learn English well, he needs a good dictionary. To learn English well, a good dictionary is needed. To get there in time, he told me to get up early. 不定式的主动形式表示被动意义
I have something important to do. In the accident, the driver was to blame. This question is difficult to answer. The box is not easy to carry.
6.其它用法。
(1)不定式与疑问词who,which , when , where,what, how等连用,在句子中起名词作用,可以充当主语,表语宾语等。How to do it , want to do 但没有why to do it 的结构。
He didn’t know what to do how to solve the problem is very important .
My question is when to start .
(2) 不定式的复合结构。
当句子中的不定式需要逻辑上的主语时,常用for 或of sb +to do sth 来构成不定式的复合结构。
It’s +adj +for/of sb +to do sth
如果需要说明动词不定式的动作是谁做的,就要用for ,但表语是kind , right , wrong clever , polite , nice 等描述行为者的性格品质的形容词,则用of .
It’s difficult for us to learn a foreign language . It’s kind of you to help me .
(三)注意含有介词to 的固定短语。
含有介词to 的固定短语,后接名词代词动名词。
Make a contribution to 为……做贡献 devote to 献身,致力于…… look forward to 期望……
Prefer to 两者之间更喜欢…… be used to 习惯,适应……give one's life to为……而献出生命”
二 动名词
动名词由动词+ing构成,动名词具有动词和名词性质,在句子中起名词总用,可以做主语,宾语, 表语, 定语, 同时动名词仍保留了动词的一些特性,可以有自己的宾语和状语。
1作主语。谓语动词用单数。动名词和不定式都可作主语,动名词表示的是一般的抽象的多次性的行为,不定式作主语往往表示具体的或一次性的动作。Seeing is believing .
2 做表语 :多数情况下,动名词做表语可转化成主语。
my job is feeding animals . Feeding animals is my job .
3.作宾语。 I like swimming. Thank you for helping me .
4.作定语。 I have a reading room .
5.no +动名词。 No smoking .
6. 英语中有一些动词后面跟动名词作宾语,这样的动词有
完成实践值得忙finish practice be worth be busy
继续习惯别放弃 keep/go on be used to give up
考虑建议不禁想 consider suggest ,can’t help. feel like
喜欢思念要介意 enjoy miss mind
When we heard the news ,we couldn’t help laughing .
7. 动名词可以有自己的宾语或状语。从而构成动名词短语。
She is good at speaking English . Shouting aloud in public is bad manners .
8.有些动词后接动名词和不定式的区别。
A.remember doing sth. 表示“记得曾经做过某事”
remember to do sth. 表示“记住要去做某事”,
B.forget doing sth. 表示“忘了曾经做过某事”,
forget to do sth. 表示“忘了去做某事”,如:
I remember meeting her at a party once. Did you remember to get the bread?
Remember to close the windows before you go out.
Don’t forget to bring your book tomorrow .
C.stop to do sth 停下正在做的事情,去做另一件事。
Stop doing sth 停止正在做的事
When the teacher came in ,they stopped taking . Let’s stop to have a rest .
D. Try to do sth 尽力做某事
Try doing sth 尝试着走某事,想知道结果,而尝试做做看。
Why don’t you try keeping a study diary? It’s a good way to learn .
E.stop to do sth 停下来去做另一件事
Stop doing sth 停止正在做的事情
We stopped to talk with him when we saw him .
She stopped talking when the teacher came in .
F. go on doing sth 继续做同一件事
Go on to do sth 做完一件事后接着做另一件事。
We had supper and went on to watch TV last night . We didn’t have a rest and went on working .
G.allow doing sth 允许做某事
Allow sb to do sth 允许某人做某事
We don’t allow smoking here . We don’t allow students to go out on school day .
H. regret to do sth 对要做的事情遗憾(还没有做)
Regret doing sth 对做过的事情遗憾,后悔。
I regret to have to do this ,but I have no choice .
I don’t regret telling her what I thought .
I.mean to do sth 打算或想做某事
Mean doing sth 意味着做某事。
I mean to go . but my father would not allow me to . Doing that means wasting time .
9. 动词 “like, love, hate, prefer”后接动名词表示“习惯性动作”,后接不定式表示“心理或一次具体动 作”。当用在 , would之后时,只跟不定式。例如:
I like swimming, but I dont like to swim this afternoon.
What would you like to eat tonight?
10. 动名词的复合结构
动名词前可以加一个 物主代词或 名词所有格来表示 这个动名词逻辑上的主语 ,构成动名词的复 合结构或动名词短语
a.动名词复合结构作主语时一般用名词所有格或形容词性的物主代词。例如:
Nixon’s visiting China marked a new year between U.S. and China diplomatic relations.
尼克松访问中国标志着中美外交关系进入一个新的时代
Their coming to help was a great encouragement to us.
b. 在口语和非正式语体中,只要不是作主语,动名词复合结构中的逻辑主语常采用名词通格或人 称代词宾格。例如: The doctor does not mind me /my eating a little meat occasionally
三 分词
英语中的分词有两种:现在分词和过去分词。及物动词的现在分词表示正在进行和主动意义,过去分词表示已经完成和被动意义。现将常用的英语分词的用法归纳如下:
1.作定语
分词可用来修饰名词或代词,并和所修饰的词在逻辑上有主谓关系。
(1)前置定语
单个分词作定语时,通常放在被修饰名词之前,作前置定语。例如: What exciting news it is!
这是多么令人振奋人心的消息!
There were a lot of excited people at the concert.演奏会上,很多人兴奋不已。
(2)后置定语
a、少数单个分词(尤其是过去分词为多)作定语时,也可作后置定语。例如: Make sentences with the words given .用所给的词造句。
The goods ordered will be delivered soon. The money left is far from enough.
Many people are dubious about the announcement from the authorities concerned.
b、单个分词作不定代词的定语时,要放在被修饰代词之后,作后置定语。例如: Is there anything unsolved ? 还有没解决的问题吗?
There is something missing . 有东西丢失了。
c、分词短语作定语时,要放在被修饰名词之后,作后置定语。这时的分词短语相当于一个定语从句。例如:
Do you know the old woman sitting under the tree ?(=Do you know the old woman who is sitting under the tree ?)
你认识坐在树下的那个老太太吗?
There comes a girl dressed in red .(=There comes a girl who is dressed in red .) 一个穿红衣服的女孩走过来了。
2.作表语
分词作表语,相当于形容词。现在分词作表语通常表示主语所具有的性质或特征,含有“令 人……的”意思。过去分词作表语多表示主语所处的情形或状态,含有“感到……的”意思。例如:
The match was very disappointing . 这场比赛令人失望。
They were very disappointed . 他们都非常失望。
3.作补语
(1)作宾语补语
a、分词作宾语补足语,宾语和现在分词(主动意义)有逻辑上的主谓关系,宾语和过去分词 (被动意义)有逻辑上的动宾关系。 分词通常用在see,hear, watch,notice,feel,find等感官动词或have,get,make等使役动 词的宾语之后,补充说明宾语的动作或状态。例如:
I found the man beating his dog there .
(=I found that the man was beating his dog there .)
我发现那个人在那儿打狗。
I found the man beaten black and blue .
(=I found that the man was beaten black and blue .)
我发现那个人被打得浑身青一块紫一块儿的。
过去分词在动词have,get之后作宾语补足语时,常常表示这动作不是由主语完成的,而是由 别人完成的。例如:
I want to have my shoes repaired .
(= My shoes are repaired by somebody .) 我想修鞋。
b、现在分词和不定式作宾语补足语在意义上有所不同。现在分词作宾语补足语,表示动作正 在进行,即动作处在发生过程中,还没有结束;而不定式作宾语补足语表示动作的全过程,即动作已结束了。例如:
I saw him going out.我看见他正在往外走。(正在发生)
I saw him go out.我看见他出去了。 (全过程)
Do you hear someone knocking at the door? 你听见有人在敲门吗?(正在发生)
Yes,I heard him knock three times.是的,我听见他敲了三下。(全过程)
(2)作主语补足语
带有分词作宾语补足语的句子如果改为被动语态时,分词不变,但这时分词就不再作宾补足语,而是作主语补足语。
A man was seen sitting under the tree .
看见有个人坐在那棵树下。
The door was found opened. 发现门被打开。
4.作状语
现在分词作状语,一般句子主语就是分词的主语。
(1)时间状语
分词作时间状语相当于when引导的时间状语从句,若两个动作同时发生,可以在分词前加入连词when或while。
Seeing the teacher entering the roomthe students stood up.
(= When the students saw the teacher entering the room,they stood up.)
学生们看到老师进来,都站了起来。
Seen from the moonthe earth looks like a ball.
(= When the earth is seenfrom the moon,it looks like a ball.)
从月球上看,地球像个圆球。
(2)原因状语
分词作原因状语时相当于as,since或because所引导的原因状语从句。
Not knowing what to do about it,I asked my teacher for advice.
(= Because I didn’t know what to do about it,I asked my teacher for advice.)
由于我不知道该怎么办,就征求老师的意见。
Encouraged by his speech the students decided to work hard.
(= As the students were encouraged by his speech,they decided to work hard.)
受他讲话的鼓舞,学生们决定努力学习。
(3)条件状语
分词作条件状语时相于if或unless引导的条件状语从句,也可在分词短语前加if或unless。例如:
Reading more carefully,you’ll learn something new.(
= If you read more carefully,you’ll learn something new.)
如果你读得更认真些,你就会学到一些新东西。
Given another chance,he’ll succeed.
(= If he is given another chance,he’ll succeed.)
如果再给他一次机会,他一定会成功。
(4)结果状语
分词作结果状语时相当于that引导的结果状语从句或并列句。例如:
The bottle dropped to the ground, breaking into pieces.
(=The bottle dropped to the ground that it broke into pieces.) 瓶子掉在地上摔碎了。
The old writer died all of a sudden, leaving his works unfinished.
(=The old writer died all of a sudden,and he left his works unfinished.)
这位年迈的作家没有完成他的著作就突然离开人世了。
(5)让步状语
分词短语作让步状语相当于让步状语从句。例如:
Tired,the old man continued to work.
(= Even though the old man was tired ,he continued to work.)
尽管老人累了,他仍继续干活。
Although built many years ago, the machines are still working in perfect order.
(= Although the machines were made many years ago, they are still working in perfect order.) 虽然这些机器是很多年前制造的,但现在仍然运行良好。
(6)方式状语或伴随状语
分词短语作方式状语或伴随状语时,没有对应的状语从句。例如: He came,running back to tell me the good news. 他跑回来告诉我这个好消息。
The teacher hurried to the office, followed by five students. 五个学生跟着老师匆匆忙忙地走进了办公室。
形 容 词
形容词
一、形容词的定义、用法
表示人或事物的属性或特征的词叫形容词(Adjective)。形容词修饰名词,它的基本用法就是为名词提供更多的信息,它分为性质形容词和叙述形容词两类,一般放在所修饰的名词之前;若修饰不定代词,则需后置。
形容词的判断方法
判断一个词是不是形容词,可以从其结构特点和句法特点两方面来确定。
(1)结构特点。
以-able,-al,-ful,-ic,-ish,-less,-ous,-y等后缀结尾的词,一般是形容词,如:changeable(多变的),medical(医学上的),careful(仔细的),atomic(原子的),foolish(愚蠢的),careless(粗心的),delicious(美味的),healthy(健康的),rainy(下雨的)等。
(2)句法特点。
大多数形容词都可以作定语;在be,look,seem等词之后作表语;可用very来修饰,有比较级和最高级形式。
形容词的用法
1.形容词用作定语
Li Mei is a beautiful city girl.李梅是一个漂亮的城市女孩。
The new student comes from Japan.那个新来的学生是日本人。
2.形容词用作表语
My father’s car is very expensive.我父亲的小车很贵。
The English story is very interesting.那个英文故事很有趣。
3.形容词用作宾语补足语
Don’t keep the door open. 别让门敞着。
His success made him happy.他的成功让他感到幸福。
We finally found the dictionaries very useful.我们最后发现词典很有用。
4.“the+形容词”用作主语及宾语
The old often think of old things.老年人经常回想往事。
The new always take the place of the old.新生事物总是会取代旧的事物。
5.形容词有时也可用作状语或补语
Please speak loud and clear.请说话大声一点、更清楚点。
These soldiers spent three days in the cold weather,cold and hungry.
士兵们又冷又饿在严寒的气候中过了三天。
After seven days, the children came back from the forest safe.
七天之后,孩子们安全地从森林中返回。
6.少数形容词只能作表语
这些形容词包括 ill,asleep,awake,alone,well,worth,glad,unable,afraid等,只能作表语,不能作定语。例如:
(正)Don’t be afraid.(误)Mr Li is an afraid man.
(正)The old man was ill yesterday.(误)This is an ill person.
(正)This place is worth visiting.(误)That is a worth book.
7.少数形容词只能作定语
这些形容词包括 little,live(活着的),elder,eldest 等,只能作定语,不能作表语。例如:
(正)My elder brother is a doctor.(误)My brother is elder than I.
(正)This is a little house.(误)The house is little.
(正)Do you want live fish or dead one?(误)The old monkey is still live.
二、形容词的位置
1.形容词一般放在名词前作定语
单个形容词修饰名词时,一般要放在名词的前面。它们的前面常常带有冠词、形容词性物主代词、指示代词、数词等。例如:
a red flower一朵红花an interesting story一个有趣的故事
six blind men 六个盲人my own house我自己的房子
1).当形容词所修饰的词是由some,any,every,no等构成的不定代词时,形容词必须置于名词 之后。例如:
She has something new to tell me.她有一些新的情况告诉我。
I have nothing important to do today.今天我没有重要的工作要做。
Do you know anybody else here?这儿你还有认识的人吗?
2).形容词后面有介词短语或不定式短语时,形容词必须置于名词之后。例如:
It is a problem difficult to work out.这是一道难以解决的问题。
Edison is a student difficult to teach.爱迪生是个很难教的学生。
This is a kind of flowers easy to grow.这是一种易栽的花。
3).在以下特殊用法中,形容词置于所修饰的名词之后。
All people,young or old,should be strict with themselves.
所有的人,无论老少,都应该严格要求自己。
We are building a new school, modern and super.
我们正在建一所现代化的高档次的新型学校。
All countries, rich and poor, should help one another.
所有的国家,无论穷富都应该互相帮助。
4).有少数形容词,如enough和possible,既可置于所修饰的名词前面也可以置于它所修饰的名词之后。例如:
Do you have enough time(time enough)to prepare?你有足够的时间做准备吗?
Maybe it will be a possible chance(chance possible)for you
.或许它将成为一次可能的机遇。
5).有些形容词,置于名词之前与之后,含义不尽相同。例如:
the writer present 出席的作者 the present writer 现在的作者
2. 两个以上的形容词修饰一个名词时的排列顺序
限定词→一般描绘性形容词→表示大小、长短、高低的形容词→表示形状的形容词→表示年龄、新旧的形容词→表示色彩的形容词→表示国籍、地区、出处的形容词→表示物质、材料的形容词→表示用途、类别的形容词→名词中心词。例如:
an exciting international football match 一场令人激动的国际足球赛
a new red sports shirt 一件新的红色运动衫
a light black plastic umbrella 把轻的黑塑料伞
a small old brown wooden house 一座小的旧的棕色的木头房子
巧记形容词的排列顺序
即请你记住“限观形令色国材”这几个字,这似乎有点不大好记,那就请你记住“县官行令谢国材”吧。其分别的含义是:
“县”(限)代表限定词,包括:冠词、指示代词、形容词性物主代词、名词所有格、
数词等。
“官”(观)代表表示观点的描绘性形容词,如:fine,beautiful,interesting等。
“行”(形)代表表示大小、长短、高低及形状的形容词,如:small,tall,high,little, round等。 “令”(龄)代表表示年龄、新、旧的形容词,如old,young等。
“谢”(“色”的近似音)代表表示颜色的形容词,如:white,black,yellow等。
“国” 代表表示国籍、地区、出处的形容词(名词),如:English,American,mountain
等。
“材” 则代表形成中心名词的材料的形容词,如:stone,wooden,silk,plastic等。
多个形容词同时修饰同一个名词时,就按上述顺序排列,然后加上中心名词。
.a fine old stone bridge一座古老漂亮的石头桥
. two big round new Chinese wooden tables 两张新的中国式的木制大圆桌
. his large new black foreign car 他那辆新的大型黑色外国进口汽车
特别连接.常见的后跟形容词作表语的词:
①become,come,fall,get,go,grow,make,turn,wear(表示“变成某种状态”)
②continue,hold,keep,lie,remain,stay(表示“保持某种状态”)
③appear,feel,look,smell,sound,taste,know,write(表示“感觉”)
He turned red when he heard the news.听到这个消息,他的脸变红了。
It’s going to stay cold for some time.天气还要冷一阵子。
The beer tastes very delicious.这啤酒尝起来很可口。
三、形容词的比较等级
1.形容词原级的用法
1.只能修饰原级的词,very,quite,so,too
He is too tired to walk on.他太累了以至于不能再继续走了。
My brother runs so fast that I can‘t follow him.我弟弟跑得那么快以至于我跟不上他。
形容词的原级常用于“as…as”及“not as(so) …as”两种句型中。
1).句型“as…as”,表示两者相比较,程度相同。例如:
The old man walks as fast as a young man.这位老人走路与青年人一样快。
Science is as important as maths.自然科学与数学一样重要。
This coat is as expensive as that one.这件上衣与那件一样贵。
2).句型“not as(so) …as”,表示两者相比较,程度不一样。例如:
I’m not as tall as Jack. 我不如杰克高。
She doesn’t run so fast as I. 她不如我跑得块。
This warship is not so big as that one.这条军舰不如那条大。
同级比较歌诀
同级比较用原级,as…as不分离;若是否定加not,as…as否前者。
as…as加not,只说两者有区别。so…as加not,后者总是强前者。
3).在使用“as…as”与“not as(so) …as” 句型,应该特别注意“as…as”或“not as(so) …as”中间的形容词必须是形容词的原级。例如:
(正)Today is as warm as yesterday.(误)Today is as warmer as yesterday.
(正)I’m not so careful as my brother.(误)I’m not so more careful as my brother.
4).需要注意的原级形容词用法:
①“数词+times+as+形容词原级+as”(是……的几倍)。例如:
This tree is twice as short as that one.这棵树比那棵树矮两倍。
My scores are three times as many as yours.我的比分是你的三倍。
This road is four times as wide as that one.这条马路的宽度是那条的四倍。
②“half+as+形容词原级+as”(……的一半……)。例如:
My English is not half as good as yours.我的英语不如你的一半好。
This town is half as big as ours.这个城镇有我们的城镇一半大。
The rivers in the north aren’t half as many as those in the south.
北方的河流不如南方的一半多。
③“as…as”结构中,若形容词作定语修饰可数名词单数,不定冠词a(an)应置于形容词与名词之 间。例如:
English is as important a subject as maths.英语和数学是同样重要的一门学科。 Uncle Wang is as good a man as my father.王叔叔是与我父亲同样好的一个人。 This is as famous a school as ours.这是一所与我们学校同样著名的学校。
④“as…as”结构若指同一个人或物,则并无比较意义,而只是说明某人或某物具有两种性质。译为“又……又……”或“不但……而且……”。例如:
This computer is as good as it is cheap.这台电脑质量又好又便宜。
The boy is as strong as he is brave.这个男孩又健壮又勇敢。
The city of Suzhou is as beautiful as it is clean.苏州城既美丽又干净。
⑤The same as 表示与……相同。
The coat is the same as that one .
⑥表示比喻。 A +be = as + A +be = as +原级+ as +B
He is as busy as a bee .
2.形容词的比较等级的构成:比较级和最高级
1.一般在词尾直接加er或est,例如,tall-taller-tallest,long-longer-longest
2.以不发音的字母e结尾的单词在词尾直接加r或st,例如,nice-nicer-nicest
3.以辅音字母+y结尾的词,把y变为i,再加er或est,例如,heavy-heavier-heaviest
4.重读闭音节,末尾只有一个辅音字母,双写这个辅音字母,再加er或est,例如,big-bigger-biggest
5.部分双音节词和多音节词分别在原级前加more构成比较级和most构成最高级,例如,slowly-more slowly-most slowly;beautiful-more beautiful-most beautiful
二、不规则变化
下列单、双音节词只能加more和most.
3.形容词的比较级的用法
1)表示两者之间比较时,用“形容词比较级+than” 或more (less) ….than….. 两种句型。例如:
Your mother looks healthier than before.你妈妈看上去比以前健康了。
I’m less interested in basketball than you.我对篮球的兴趣不如你大。
2)“甲+be+(倍数)+形容词比较级+than+乙” “甲比乙…几倍”
Tom is three years older than jim .
This room is three times bigger than that one.这个房间比那个大三倍。
3).形容词的比较级还可以用于以下句型中。
①比较级+and +比较级, more and more+原级(越来越……)。例如:
The park is getting more and more beautiful.这个公园变得越来越美了。
China had become stronger and stronger.中国已变得越来越强大了。
②the +比较级,the+比较级(越……就越……)。例如:
The more books we read, the cleverer we will become.
我们读的书越多,就会变得越聪明。
The more trees, the better. 树越多越好。
The sooner, the better. 越早越好。
The more exercise we take, the healthier we are.我们越锻炼,身体就越健康。
③“the+比较级+of the two……(两个中较……的一个)”。例如:
I’d like to go to the farther of the two places.
两个地方相比较,我愿意去更远的一个。
She is the fatter of the two girls.她是那两个女孩中较胖的一个。
④ 比较级+than any other +n. (单) (适用于范围一致时)
(all) other +n.(复)
any +n.(单) (适用于范围不一致时)
The Yangtze River is longer than any other river in China.
=The Yangtze River is longer than any of the other rivers in China.
长江比中国的任何一条其他的河都长。
=The Yangtze River is longer than the other rivers in China.
长江比中国的其他所有的河都长。
=The Yangtze River is the longest river in China.长江是中国最长的河流
注意:The Yangtze River is longer than any river in Japan.
长江比日本的任何一条河都长。
(5)“特殊疑问词+be+形容词比较级,甲or乙?”
Which is bigger,the earth or the moon?哪一个大,地球还是月球?
3).形容词的比较级前还可以用much,a lot, far, even, still, a little, no, any等表示程度的词来修饰.
I feel a little better than yesterday.我感觉比昨天好一点儿了。
The job is far more difficult than before.这工作比以前要难得多。
4.形容词的最高级的用法
1)三者或三者以上相比较用 “主语+be+the+形容词最高级+单数名词+in/of/among短语”表示“…… 是……中最……的”。
Tom is the tallest in his class./of all the students.汤姆是他们班上/所有学生当中最高的。
This apple is the biggest of the five.这个苹果是五个当中最大的。例如:
This is the cleanest place of the city.这是这个城市最清洁的地方。
Hu Yun is the fastest of all the girls in our class.胡云是我们女生中跑得最快的。 2).表示“最……之一”,用“one of the+形容词最高级+复数名词”。例如:
The Great Wall of China is one of the greatest buildings in the world.
中国的长城是世界上最伟大的建筑之一。
This is one of the most interesting books that I’ve ever read.这是我读过的最有趣的书之一。
3) 序数词+最高级+名词单数 表示第……
Yellow river is the second longest river in china .
4)特殊疑问词+be+the+最高级+甲,乙,or丙?
Which is the biggest , Beijing , shanghai or Guangzhou ?
注意. 形容词的最高级前面必须加定冠词the,但当形容词最高级前面有物主代词,指示代词,名词所有格等修饰时,则不加the。例如:
(正)This is my best friend. (误)This is my the(the my) best friend.
(正)Today is the happiest day of my life.(误)Today is happiest day of my life.
四.相关词语辨析
(1)和冠词连用
the +形容词原级+v(复),指一类人或物
the + 形容词比较级,指两者中“较…的”的那一个, the younger of the two
a/ an +形容词比较级eg. The pen is expensive. I want a cheaper one.
( a) +most+形容词最高级 “非常…” a most beautiful city
2).very 和much
A)very修饰形容词、副词的原级;
much修饰比较级;修饰动词用much或very much ,
I very like English.(×),因改为:I like English very much.
B) 表示状态的过去分词前用very。a very frightened boy, a very tired child .一般的情况下,以-ed结尾的分词多用much、very much / greatly等修饰。
如:We were greatly /much shocked by the news about Tom..
C) 已转化为形容词的现在分词前用very。 :very interesting / worrying / exciting
D)too前用much/ far ,不用very。 You are much / far / a lot too nice.
另外,在too many / much, too few / little前用far。
We’ve got far too many eggs and far too few egg cups.
E)还有修饰词既不用very,也不用much. be well worth doing, be well above the tree
2. so和such
A)so … that … 与such … that … 的区别。
so + 形容词 / 副词 + that …
so + 形容词 + a(n)+ 单数可数名词 + that …
so + many / much / little / few + 名词 + that …
such + a(n)+ 形容词+单数可数名词 + that …
such + 形容词 + 不可数名词 + that … such + 形容词 + 复数名词 + that …
注意: 但当little表示“小”时用such。
如:These are such little boys that they can’t dress themselves.
下列so的用法是错误的:
so a difficult problem, so difficult problems, so hot weather。
B) some/ any/ every/ no/ each/ all/ another/ several/ few/ many/ one/ two
+such+n. eg. no such word
3. be too much + n. be much too+ adj.
be too much for sb. 对…太过分了
4. can’t be too +adj.= can’t be +adj.+ enough “无论…都不为过”
You can never be careful enough.= You can never be too careful.你越小心越好
5. more…than…结构,其意往往是…rather than…,可译为“是……而不
是……”或颠倒词序译作“与其说是……,不如说是……”。
That little girl is more tired than hungry. 那个小姑娘是累了而不是饿了。 She is more a mother than a wife或She is more of a mother than a wife.
她是贤妻,更是良母。
6. A is to B what C is to D A和B的关系就像C和D的关系
Air is to man what water is to fish. 空气 对于人类就像水和鱼的关系。
7. no more than= only “只不过”,言其少
not more than=at most “不多于”,“至少”,指事实。
no more …than… 和…一样不… 如单音节使用比较级形式
not more…than… 不比…更…
no less than= as much as “多达”
no fewer than= as many as
例:I have no more than five yuan in my pocket. 我口袋里的钱只不过5元。
I have not more than five yuan in my pocket. 我口袋里的钱不多于5元。
He is no richer than I.他和我一样穷。
He is no less determined than you. 他的决心不亚于你。 (no less determined than等于“其决心不亚于你”,言其大) He is not less determined than you. 他的决心不比你小。
(not less determined than等于“其决心不小于”,无言其大或小的含义)
8.farther与further都是形容词和副词far的比较级:
far—farther—farthest far—further—furtherst 但是它们在词义和用法上却有区别。
(1)farther一般只用于表示有形距离的“较远”、“更远”:
On the farther side of the steet there was a large shop. 在街的那一边有一家大商店。
We can't go any farther without a rest. 我们不休息就不能再走了。
(2)(A)further既可表示有形距离的“较远”、“更远”:
There is a cottage on the further side of the hill. 在小山的那一边有一个茅舍。
It turned out a further distance than he had imagined. 原来距离比他想象的要远。
It's not safe to go any further. 再往远走,就不安全了。
(B)further也还可表示“更多的”;“另一些”;“进一步的”;“而且”;“此外”等等:
. Have you any further questions to ask? 你们还有问题要问吗?
We intend to stay for a further two months. 我们打算再停留两个月。
If you need further information, I suggest you go to the library.
如果你需要进一步的资料,我建议你去图书馆查查。
9. older、elder elderly
elder、older这两个词均是old的比较级,在用法上有所区别。elder本身也是形容词。
1).elder表示“前辈的”、“年纪较长的”,仅用于同一家庭成员的比较;older则不限于此。
My younger son is five and my elder son is nine。我的小儿子5岁,大儿子9岁。
Tom is two years older than I.汤姆比我年长两岁。
2).elder在句中只用作定语,不作表语;older两者皆可。
My elder sister does her homework all by herself. 我的姐姐独自做作业。
His elder son got married last week. 他的长子是上星期结婚的。
I think his mother is older. 我认为他的母亲年龄大引起。
3.)elder只能用来指人;older既可修饰人,也可修饰物。例如:
My elder brother joined the army when he was only fifteen.我哥哥年仅15岁就参了军。
This dog is older than any other dogs here.这条狗在这里是最老的一条。
I have a sister older than myself.我有位比我大的姐姐。
It is said Mr Chen is over ten years older than Mrs Li.据说陈先生比李女士大10多岁。
4.)elderly是形容词,“较老的”。elderly是委婉用语意为上了年纪的,一般不说old man而用elderly man代替,the elderly泛指老人。
His mother's elder sister is an elderly woman now.
10. -ed形容词与-ing 形容词的用法区别
1. 以后缀-ed结尾的形容词(如ashamed, delighted, excited, frightened, interested, moved, pleased, surprised, worried等)通常用于说明人,不用于说明事物,即使它们所修饰的名词是事物,那它们指的也是与该事物相关的人。如:
He had a pleased smile on his face. 他脸上露出了满意的微笑。
He told me the news in a very excited voice. 他告诉了我这个消息,声音很激动。
第一句中的a pleased smile 意为“满意的微笑”,它指的是某人因感到满意发出的微笑;第二句中的 excited voice 指的是“激动的声音”,即指的是带有这种声音的某人感到激动。
原则上,-ed 形容词通常直接用于说明人,若修饰事物,则多为 air(神态), appearance(外貌), cry(哭声), face(表情), voice(声音), mood(情绪)等与显示某人的情感状况的名词。
2. 以后缀-ing结尾的形容词(如delighting, exciting, frightening, interesting, moving, surprising, worrying 等)主要用于说明事物,表示事物的性质或特征,若用它们说明人,则表示此人具有此性质或特征。如(from www.yygrammar.com):
The story is very interesting. 这个故事很有趣。
The man is very interesting. 这个人很有趣。
11. One Ones That Those在比较结构中的用法区别
在比较结构中,为了避免重复,常用替代词替代名词词组或它的中心词。可以这样用的替代词常用的且较难掌握的有one,ones,that和those。
I.替代词one和ones的用法:
1.one只能替代单数名词,one的复数形式ones只能替代复数名词。例如:
My child doesn't like this book.Show her a more interesting one.
2.替代词one或ones必须带有一个限定或修饰词,它们和所替代的名词中心词所指不一定是同一对象,这是替代词one或ones在用法上的一个重要特征。例如:
I don't like this book.I'd like a more interesting one.
3.当替代词one或ones带有后置修饰语时,它们前面总有定冠词。例如:
Our new cassette is more expensive than the one we had before.
4.当替代词one或ones在形容词比较级、最高级以及某些限定词如this,that,which和序数词等之后,可以省略。例如: This book is much better than that(one).
5.替代词one或ones通常不用在物主代词和名词所有格之后。如不可说my one(s),your one(s),Peter's one(s)等等。one或ones也不能用在own之后。
但是,如果有了形容词,one(s)可以和物主代词及名词所有格连用。如:
My cheap camera seems to be just as good as John's expensive one.
6.one作替代词时,在of前面不能用the one来表示所属关系和类似概念。如不可说:
*He put down his gun and picked up the one of Henry. 该用一个所有格来表示He picked up Henry's.
7.当两个形容词表示对照的意思时,不能使用替代词one。仅在其中一个形容词后加上名词即可。例如:
Don't praise the younger child in the presence of the elder.
8.替代词one如果不带任何前置修饰语,即它的前面既没有限定词,又没有形容词时,便不是替代名词词组的中心词,而是替代整个名词词组。这时,one=a+单数名词。例如:
A cake made of wheat costs less than one made of rice.(one=a cake)
one的这种用法是泛指同类事物中的任何一个,相当一个不定冠词,因此它没有复数形式。要泛指复数事物,只能用some。例如:
Here are a few apples.Would you like some(=some of them)?
II.替代词that和those的用法:
1. that和those通常用作指使代词,也可用作替代词。它们总是伴随着限定性的后置修饰语,分别等于the one和the ones。
The houses of the rich are generally larger than those of the poor.
2.that也可替代不可数名词,但是the one则不能。例如:
The resistance of a thicker wire is less than that of a thin one. 以上两例中的that都不能换成the one。
3.that作替代词,只能指物,不能指人。those作替代词,既可指物,也可指人。例如:
The blonde girl I saw was older than the one you were dancing with. 该句中的the one不能换成that。
4.that用作替代词和它所替代的名词词组的中心词的“数”可以不一致。替代单数名词时,只替代“the+单数名词”,不可替代“a+单数名词”。例如:
The song by Schubert is more tuneful than that by Britain.(that=the song。song为可数名词。)
请注意,这里说的that只替代“the+单数名词”,不可替代“a+单数名词,系指that在句子中实际的作用,并非要求它在句子中所代表的前面出现的词组必须是“the+单数名词。例如: In those days they lived a life worse than that of a beast of burden. 在该句中,前面出现的词组为a life,但that替代的却是the life。 that作为替代词,它不能用于零关系分句(即没有关系代词的定语从句)之前。例如:
The problem confronting us today is not dissimilar from that which the nation confronted in the 1930s
数 词
表示数目多少或顺序的词叫数词。数词分为基数词和序数词两种,在英语中表示事物数目的词称为基数词;表示事物顺序的数词称为序数词。
一、基数词
一)基数词的读法。
1)1---10 : one two three four five six seven eight nine ten
2)11---19: 词尾加-teen :thirteen fourteen fifteen sixteen seventeen eighteen nineteen 其中eleven, twelve, thirteen, fifteen, eighteen为特殊形式
3)20,30,40,50,60,70,80,90 : 逢十词尾加-ty
twenty thirty forty fifty sixty seventy eighty ninety 其中twenty,thirty, forty,fifty,eighty为特殊形式
4)21----99: 在十位与个位之间加连字符构成
. 21--- twenty-one 99---ninety-nine
5)101---999 :百位数与十位数之间要加and ,再加末尾两位数或个位数.
101---one hundred and one
238----two hundred and thirty-eight 320 three hundred and twenty
6)1000以上的数要使用计数间隔或,先将数字从右往左数,每三位数用一个逗号隔开, 从右往左第一个逗号表示 “千”读thousand 第二个逗号表示 “百万”读million 第三个逗号表示 “十亿”读billion且hundred, thousand, million等用单数形式。注意,百位数hundred与十位数(或个位数)之间要用and连接。十位数与个位数之间要用连字符号“-”,如:
52,368读作:fifty-two thousand, three hundred and sixty-eight.
18,657,421---eighteen million ,six hundred and fifty-seven thousand ,four hundred and twenty-one.
2,648 two thousand six hundred and forty-eight
16,250,064 sixteen million two hundred and fifty thousand sixty-four
5,237,166,234 five billion,two hundred and thirty-seven million,one hundred and sixty-six thousand,two hundred and thirty-four
7)在基数词中只有表示百,千,百万,十亿的词,没有表示万和亿的词,而是用thousand 和million来表达。一万=ten thousand 一亿=one hundred million
二)基数词表计量
基数词表计量大于1时,它所修饰的名词要用复数形式。如: two bottles of water (两瓶水); three boxes of apples(三箱苹果)。
三)基数词表番号(编号)
编号的事物如果数字较大,一般用基数词表达,且放在编号的事物名词之后。注意大小写字母。如:No.102 Middle School (102中学);Room 206 (206房间) 第207房间:Room 207
如果编号的事物数字不大,也可用序数词表达,但它应放在编号名词之前。如:the first lesson (第一课) 第五课: Lesson 5 = the fifth lesson
四)基数词表时刻
1)英语时刻表达法有两种:一种顺读法,是先说小时后说分钟。
6:36 six thirty-six
逆读法:先说分钟数,后说钟点数,中间要用past或to连接。
即:1~30分钟(含30分钟)用“分钟数+past+钟点数”;31~59分钟用“(60-分钟数)
+to +下一个钟点数”。
4:20 four twenty或 twenty past four 3:25 twenty-five past three
5:45 five forty-five或 fifteen to six或 a quarter to six
3:35 twenty-five to four
以小时、分钟为单位分别读出数字。
2)一些时间段的表达。
半小时half an hour 一两天one or two days =a day or two
每两天,每隔一天 every other day =every two days
几个半的表达 一天半 a day and a half=one and a half days
再几个的表达 再多两个小时 two more hours=another two hours
注:时刻表上的时间大多采用24小时表示法,这样就不需要用a.m.表示上午,p.m.表示下午了。
五)基数词复数表岁数或年代
注意:表示“几十”的基数词的复数形式,可用来表示某人的大概岁数或年代。
In his forties.在他四十多岁时
世纪可以用定冠词加序数词加世纪century表示,也可以用定冠词加百位整数加`s表示
the sixth(6th)century 公元六世纪
the eighteenth(18th)century 公元十八世纪
the 1900`s 二十世纪 the 1600`s 十七世纪
in the eighties 在八十年代
这里,用百位数整数表示的世纪比这一百位阿拉伯数字本身多一个世纪。 年代用定冠词及基数词表示的世纪加十位整数的复数形式构成
in the 1930`s(in the thirties of the twentieth century或 in the nineteen thirties)在二十世纪三十年代
in the 1860`s(in the sixties of the 19th century或 in the eighteen sixties) 在十九世纪六十年代
My uncle went to England in his twenties. 我叔叔在20多岁时去了英国。
He became a professor in his thirties.
It was in the 1960s.那是在二十世纪六十年代。
These eggs were found in the Gobi Desert by a group of scientists in the 1920s.
这些恐龙蛋是20世纪20年代由一群科学家在戈壁沙漠发现的。
表达年代的早起中期晚期可在定冠词后年代之前加early mid- late .
In the early 1820’s in the mid-1950’s
六)含基数词的复合形容词
“基数词+名词(+形容词)”构成的复合形容词作定语时,其中的名词用单数形式。如:two-week holiday 两周的假 ; an eighteen-metre-wide street 一条18米宽的街道
但注意它与名词所有格形式作定语的区别。如:How far is it from your home to your school? It’s about ten minutes’ walk.
从你家到到学校多远?大约十分钟路程。
七)基数词与“多少又一半”的表达
“多少又一半”的表达有种方法:一种是“数词+n.(单数或复数)+and a half”;另一种是“数词+and a half +n.复数”。如:“两个半月”可译为:two months and a half或two and a half months
八)hundred, thousand, million等表示大约数与确切数的区别
基数词表示具体数目时,hundred, thousand, million用单数形式。但在表示“数百”、“数千”、“数百万”等不确切数目时,hundred, thousand, million要用复数形式,且后接“of +名词复数”。此种结构前可以加 some ,several , many等词。如:
There are nine hundred and forty-seven students in our school. 我校有947个学生。
Thousands of students come to visit the Museum of Natural History every year.
每年有数千学生来参观这个自然历史博物院。 Many thousands of girls are singing
注意此题:
Three______the students are boys. A hundred of B hundreds of C hundreds Dhundred
正确答案时A。
.
九)年月日表示法
月 日,年 日 月 年 (the +序数词+of +月, 年)
注:年份的读法: 日用序数词,读日时要加the。月用英语单词,年用基数词。先读前两位数,再读后两位数.
1949年10月1日 : October the first , nineteen forty-nine
=the first of October, nineteen forty-nine
2007年3月21日---the twenty-first of March ,two thousand and seven. 2000年: the year two thousand = twenty hundred 2001年: twenty o one
3月1日: March the first = the first of March
A.年份用基数词表示,一般写为阿拉伯数字,读时可以以hundred为单位,也可以以世纪、年代为单位分别来读。
1949 读作 nineteen hundred and forty-nine 或 nineteen forty-nine 1800 读作 eighteen hundred
253 读作 two hundred and fifty-three或two fifty-three 1902 读作 nineteen hundred and two或 nineteen o two
表示在哪一年,一般在年、月前加介词in,使用year时,year放在数词之前。日期前用on,时刻前用at.
in the year two fifty-three B.C. 在公元前253年 但是,通常采用in加表示年份的阿拉伯数字。
B. 月份,在哪个月用介词in加第一个字母大写的月份词表示。例如:in May在五月; in July在七月。为了简便起见,月份与日期连用时,月份常用缩写形式表示。缩写形式除May,June,July外,其它的月份都由其前三个字母表示,但September除外。
January——Jan.一月 February——Feb.二月 March——Mar. 三月 April——Apr.四月 August——Aug.八月 September——Sept.九月 October——Oct.十月
November——Nov.十一月 December——Dec.十二月
注:这里缩写形式后面加点不能省略,因为它是表示缩写形式的符号。 C.日期用定冠词the加序数词表示。在哪一天要添加介词on。 National Day is on Oct. 1.国庆节是十月一日。(读作 October the first)
此句也可以表示为 National Day is on the 1st of October. May 5 五月五日(读作May the fifth)
也可以表示为the fifth(5th)of May
Mar. 1(st) 三月一日(读作March first或 the first of March)
十)基数词和某些单数名词构成复合形容词,它在句中只能做定语,但在数词和名词之间要用连字符,如有形容词,也要用连字符。
A six-year-old girl a five-foot-deep hole An eight-hundred-meter-long bridge A two-thousand-word report
十一)表示一些数学公式时用基数词
2+4 two plus four is (makes) six. 6-3 six minus three
5×7 five times seven
8÷2 eight divided by two
等号读equals,makes,is, is equal to 等。小数点读point
加”用plus,and或add表示;“减”用 minus或 take from表示
乘”用time(动词)或multiply表示除”用divide的过去分词形式表示
十二)倍数表达法
一倍用once,两倍用twice, 三以上的倍数times
数词+times +as形容词/副词原级+as 数词+times+比较级+than
The room is twice as large as that one. The earth is 49times the size of the moon.
My age is three times older than yours .
十三).数词前加every ,表示每……/每隔…… .
every ten days =every ninth day 每十天(每隔九天)
注:every +基数词 +复数名词 = every + (序数词-1) +单数名词
十四)年龄表示法:
(1)、基数词(+years old)
(2)、at the age of + 基数词
(3)、a + 基数词-year-old + 名词
(4)、of + 基数词 (+ years)
When she was 11,she began to work.
at the age of 14
a 54-year-old man
a boy of 14 (years
十五)、表示长宽高面积等时,基数词+单位词 metre kilogram ,inch )+形容词(long, wide ,high,weigh )=基数词+单位词+in+名词(length , width , height weight)
More than six thousand metres long = More than six thousand metres in length .
十六)表示整体概念(时间,距离,价格,重量,数目,数学运算等)的词或短语做主语时,谓语动词用单数。
Ten dollars isn’t enough . five years has passed .
十七)基数词的句法功能
基数词在句中可作主语、宾语、定语、表语、同位语。
The two happily opened the box。两个人高兴地打开了盒子。(作主语)
I need three altogether.我总共需要三个。(作宾语)
Four students are playing volleyball outside.四个学生在外面打排球。(作定语)
We are sixteen.我们是16个人。(作表语)
They three tried to finish the task before sunset.
他们三个人尽力想在日落前完成任务。(作同位语)
二、序数词
一) 序数词的构成及基本用法。
A.从第一至第十九
其中,one— first, two— second, three— third, five— fifth,eight—eighth,nine—ninth,twelve— twelfth为特殊形式,其它的序数词都是由其相对应的基数词后面添加“th”构成。例如: six— sixth、nineteen— nineteenth.
整十的序数词。Twenty ,thirty forty fifty sixty seventy ,eighty ninety
B.从第二十至第九十九
整数第几十的形式由其对应的基数词改变结尾字母y为i,再加“eth”构成。 twenty——twentieth thirty——thirtieth 表示第几十几时,用几十的基数词形式加上连字符“-”和个位序数词形式一起表示。
thirty-first 第三十一 fifty-sixth 第五十六 seventy-third 第七十三 ninety-ninth 第九十九
C.第一百以上的多位序数词
由基数词的形式变结尾部分为序数词形式来表示。 one hundred and twenty-first 第一百二十一
one thousand,three hundred and twentieth 第一千三百二十
D.序数词的缩写形式
有时,序数词可以用缩写形式来表示。主要缩写形式有。 first——lst second——2nd third——3rd
fourth——4th sixth——6th twentieth——20th
twenty-third——23rd
其中lst,2nd,3rd为特殊形式,其它的都是阿拉伯数字后加上th。
注意:序数词一般以与之相应的基数词后加-th 构成,少数几个需特别记忆。为方便大家记忆,请看下面口诀。
基变序,有规律,first, second, third要牢记; 其它变化有公式,基数词尾加-th;
eight去t , nine去e ,ve则以f替;
从twenty, thirty到ninety, 需变y为ie; 若是遇到“几十几”,只变个位就可以。
注意:序数词前要加定冠词the, 在句中作定语放在所修饰的名词前。如:December is the twelfth month of the year. 十二月是一年中的第12个月。
二) 序数词与冠词a/an连用。
序数词前加不定冠词a/an, 表示“又一”、“再一”的意思。 如:Please try it a second time. 请再试一试。 Why not try a fourth time?
但基数词与more连用,并放在more前,表示“另外有”、“还有”的意思。
数词+more +名词=another+ 数词+名词。
如:I’l take one more (=another) pencil. 我还要一支铅笔。
We ‘ve just started! There were twenty more trees to be planted!我们才刚开始呢!还有20棵树要栽呢!
三)分数、小数、百分数 的表达法。
1.分数以基数词和序数词合成的。分子用基数表示,分母用序数词表示,分子大于1,分母要用复数(-s)。如: 分子基,分母序,分子大于1,分母加S
1/2 二分之一 a half 1/3(三分之一) :one third 2/3 :two thirds分子与分母之间不用连字符,含分数的短语作主语由分数后的词决定谓语
One third of the students are girls. One third of the milk is mine.
Three quarters (3/4) of the workers are young.
分数的特殊形式:
1)one second = one half= a half
2)one fourth = a/one quarter three fourths = three quarters
3)one and a half hours
带分数也是常见的英语数词表达。所谓带分数,实际上是“整数+分数”,表达时分而述之,只是整数部分与分数部分要用连词 and连接。当带分数修饰名词时,该名词通常是复数,但若名词置于整数one或a之后,则用单数。“带分数+名词”作主语时,要用复数。例如:
You should finish the work within one and a fourth hours.
你应在1.25小时内完成工作。
当分数后面接名词时,如果分数表示的值大于1,名词用复数;小于1,名词用单数。
1/2 hours 一个半小时(读作 one and a half hours)
3/4 meters 二又四分之三米(读作two and three-fourths meters)
4/5 meter 五分之四米 5/6 inch 六分之五英寸
2.小数是以基数词加小数点表示,小数点前面的数按基数词的规则读,小数点后面的数按个位基数词依次读出,当小数后面接名词时,如果小数表示的值大于1,名词用复数;小于1,名词用单数。
如: 0.5 — zero point five
0.006 — zero point zero zero six
0.257 — zero point two five seven
148.06 — a/one hundred and forty-eight point zero six
其中zero可替换为naught或读作oh。
3.百分数是由基数词或小数加百分号组成,百分号(%)读作per cent,如:
0.6% — zero point six per cent
5% — five per cent
100% — one hundred per cent
12.34% — twelve point three four per cent
分数或百分数修饰名词作主语,构成分数或百分数+of +名词,谓语动词的数有of 后的名词确定。(population 除外)
70% of population in china are farmers .
One quarter of students in the class are girls .
四)序数词前通常应有定冠词the,除非序数词前有了物主代词,指示代词或其它修饰语,以及做表语时才能省略定冠词。
This is his twelfth birthday .
五)序数词的句法功能
序数词在句中可作主语、宾语、定语和表语。
The second is what I really need.第二个是我真正需要的。(作主语)
He choose the second.他挑选了第二个。(作宾语)
We are to carry out the first plan.我们将执行第一个计划。(作定语)
She is the second in our class.在我们班她是第二名。(作表语)
连 词
一.概述:
连词是连接字、短语、从句与句子的词,是虚词,因此它不能独立担任句子成分。连词主要分为两大类:并列连词和从属连词。并列连词用来连接并列关系的词、词组或分句。它包括:and,or,but,so,for,both…and,either…or,neither…nor,not only…but also。从属连词用来引导从句,它包括: that, when, till, until, after, before, since,because,if,whether,though,although,so…that,so that,in order that,as soon as
二、并列连词的用法
并列连词用来连接具有并列关系的词,短语或句子。常见的并列连词有:
(1)表并列关系的and, both…and, not only…but also, neither…nor as well as 等。
(2)表选择关系的or, either…or等。
(3)表转折关系的but, while yet等。
(4)表因果关系的for, so等。
一)并列连词
1 and:和,并且 I like basketball, football and table-tennis.
1)and表示“和”、“而且”的意思,用来连接对等关系的字和字,片语与片语,句子与句子。单词或词组如果是三个以上连接,一般在最后的单词或词组前加and。另外“and”在译成中文时不一定要翻译出“和”来。
He got up and put on his hat.
I went to the Summer Palace and he went to Beihai Park.
2).and在祈使句中的作用 句型:祈使句, and…=If you…, you'll…
Use your head,and you'll find a way.动动脑筋,你就会想出办法来。
=If you use your head,you'll find a way.如果你动动脑子,你就会想出办法。
Hurry up,and you'll catch the bus.快点,你就会赶上公共汽车。
=If you hurry up,you'll catch the bus.如果你快点,你就会赶上公共汽车。
2.both…and:和,既……也……构成的词组作为主语时,谓语动词用复数。句型中,and连接的词或词组要对等
He can play both the violin and the piano.他既会拉小提琴,又会弹钢琴。
Both Li Ming and Li Li are good students.(Li Ming和Li Li都是人,所以两者对等)
both…and的否定句表示部分否定。
He can't play both the violin and the piano.他会拉小提琴或者会弹钢琴。(不全会)
Both Li Ming and Li Li are not good students.
李明和李莉不都是好学生。(其中一个是好学生)
3.neither…nor既不……也不……
a.当此词组担任主语时,谓语动词由nor后面的词而定。
Neither you nor I am right.你和我都不对。
b.此句型本身是全否定,因此不能再用否定式,即不能再加not。
4. not only… but also:不但……而且担任主语时,此句型的谓语动词随 but also后面的部分而定not only…but also连接对等的词或词组。该句型可以和“as well as”互换,但注意汉语翻译。
(1)Not only you but also your father is coming.不但你,而且你父亲也要来。
(2)Jane is not only beautiful but also kind. 珍妮不但漂亮,而且为人很好。
Your father as well as you is coming.不但你,而且你父亲也要来。
注意: not only… but also 关联两个分句时,一个分句因有否定词not 而必须倒装。 Not only does he like reading stories, but also he can even write some.
as well as的句子谓语动词随它前面的词“Your father”而定,所以用is coming.
Jane is kind as well as beautiful.
二)选择连词
1. or:或,或者,否则
Is Li Ming from Beijing or from Shanghai.
李明是北京人还是上海人呢?
1)or表示“~或”的意思,使用于两者之中选择一个的时候。
Would you like coffee or tea?你喜欢咖啡还是茶?
Tom or I am right.我或者汤姆是对的。
Li Ming or his classmates are cleaning the room.李明或者是他的同班同学在打扫房间
注意
“A or B”作主语时,谓语动词随or后面的词(B)而定,因此例子中的谓语动词服从I,用am。
2.)句型:祈使句, or…=If you don't…, you'll…
同and一样,or在祈使句中的用法,译成“请…,否则…”,有转折的意思。
Hurry up,or you'll miss the bus.快点吧,否则你就会误了公共汽车。
=If you don't hurry up,you'll miss the bus.如果你不快点,你就会误了这班车。
Study hard,or you'll fail in the exam.好好学吧,否则你考试就会不及格。
=If you don't study hard,you'll fail in the exam.
如果你不努力学习,你考试就会不及格。
注意
or疑问句的读法or前面的部分用升调,后面的部分用降调。
2..either…or:或……或……;不是……就是……
a.《either…or…》构成的词组作为主语时,谓语动词随其邻近的词,即or后面的词而定。
Either you or he is right.不是你,就是他是对的。
b.此句型的否定句是全否定。
Either you or he isn't right.你和他都不对。
I don't want to visit either Tianjing orShanghai.天津和上海我都不想参观。
三)转折连词
1 but:但是,可是,而
but所连接的句子,句中如果某些成分与前面相同,则可以省略。
He is old, but he looks very young.他老了,但他看起来很年轻。
Li Li likes violin but doesn't like piano.李莉喜欢小提琴,(但是)不喜欢钢琴。
(but 后面省略了主语Li Li,因为与前面的主语成分相同)
Mary likes violin, but Tom doesn't.
玛丽喜欢小提琴,而汤姆不喜欢。
(doesn't后面省略了like violin,因为与前面的成分相同)
He isn't a teacher but a doctor.
他不是(一个)老师,而是医生。
They came here not for money but for the life.
他们到这儿来,不是要钱,而是要命。
2while “而,然而”,表对比。
Some people waste food while others haven't enough.
有些人很费粮食,然而有些人却吃不饱。
.The son was having a good meal at home,while the parents were working in the fields. 儿子在家吃好饭而父母却在田里辛勤劳作。
3.yet用作连词时,与but一样也主要用于转折,意为“但是”“而”:
I have failed, yet I shall try again. 我失败了,但我还要尝试。
有时用在句首。Yet the house was cheerful. 但屋子里显得很欢快。
Yet its population has doubled. 但它的人口翻了一番。
■yet有时可与并列连词and或but连用,构成习语and yet和but yet,且两者大致同义(均相当于表转折的but):
I gave him ten pounds (and) yet he was not satisfied. 我给了他十镑但他仍不满足。
She’s vain and foolish, and yet people like her. 她很虚荣愚蠢,但人们却喜欢她。
She drove very fast to the airport, but [yet, and yet, but yet] she missed the plane. 她开快车去机场,可还是误了飞机。
■although不能与表示转折的but连用,但是却可以与yet连用。如:
Although we have made some progress, yet we still have a long way to go. 我们虽然取得了些进步,但还是远远不够的。
四)因果连词
1.so:所以,因此,于是
My teacher asked me to go, so I went.
我们老师让我去,因此我就去了。
so除了作连词外,也可以作副词。
I hope you can pass the exam.我希望你能通过考试。
I hope so.我也希望。 Don't walk so fast.别走得太快。
2.for:因为
I soon went to sleep, for I was tired.
我很快就入睡了,因为我太累了。
The sun has risen,for the birds are singing.
太阳升起来了,小鸟在唱歌。
for和because for也可译为“因为”,但是它没有什么因果关系,不像because那样,而for只是说明解释而已。for表示结果通常不能放句首,也不能单独使用。
二. 从属连词
常见的从属连词有:
(1)引导时间状语从句的after, before, when, while, as, until, till, since, as soon as等。
(2)引导条件状语从句的if, unless等。
(3)引导原因状语从句的because, as, since等。
(4)引导目的状语从句的so that, in order that等。
(5)引导让步状语从句的though, although, even if等。
(6)引导结果状语从句的so that, so…that, such…that等。
(7)引导比较状语从句的than, as…as等。
(8)引导名词从句的that, if , whether等。
1. 引导时间状语从句的从属连词
(1) 表示“当…时候”或“每当”的时间连词。主要的 when, while, as, whenever。如:
Don’t talk while you’re eating. 吃饭时不要说话。
Vegetables are best when they are fresh. 蔬菜新鲜时最好吃。
He came just as I was leaving. 我正要走时他来了。
(2) 表示“在…之前(或之后)”的时间连词。主要的有before, after。如:
Try to finish your work before you leave. 离开前设法把工作做完。
After we have finished tea, we will sit on the grass. 喝完茶之后我们将坐在草地上。
(3) 表示“自从”或“直到”的时间连词。主要的有since, until, till。如:
She’s been playing tennis since she was eight. 她从八岁起就打网球了。
Hold on until I fetch help. 坚持一下,等我找人来帮忙。
Never trouble trouble till trouble troubles you. (谚)不要无事惹事。
(4) 表示“一…就”的时间连词。主要的有as soon as, the moment, the minute, the second, the instant, immediately, directly, instantly, once, no sooner…than, hardly…when等。如:
I’ll let you know as soon as I hear from her. 我一接她的信就通知你。
The moment I have finished I’ll give you a call. 我一干完就给你打电话。
I came immediately I heard the news. 我一听到这个消息,马上就来了。
Once you begin you must continue. 你一旦开始, 便不可停下来。
(5) 表示“上次”、“下次”、“每次”等的时间连词。主要的有every time(每次),each time(每次),(the) next time(下次),any time(随时),(the) last time(上次),the first time(第一次)。如:
I’ll tell him about it (the) next time I see him.
我下一次见到他时,我就把这个情况告诉他。
We lose a few skin cells every time we wash our hands.
每当我们洗手的时候,我们都要损失一些皮肤细胞。
You can call me any time you want to. 你随时都可以给我打电话。
注意:A.every time, each time, any time前不用冠词,(the) next time, (the) last time中的冠词可以省略,而the first time中的冠词通常不能省略。
B.when, while, till, until, since, after, before, as soon as等是连接时间状语从句的连词。在时间状语从句中要特别注意时态的搭配:当主句是将来时,从句要用一般现在时。
C.while所引导的从句的谓语动词只能是延续性的,不能用点动词。(如begin,stop…)
When I arrived there, it was raining.当我到那儿时,天正在下雨。
I entered the room while(when) Li Ming was talking with her.
我进屋时,李明正在和她谈话。
I didn't go to sleep until(till)I finished my homework.
直到我做完作业,我才上床睡觉。
We won't work until(till) our teacher teaches us how to do it.
老师教给我们如何做这工作之后,我们才会开始做。
He came to China after the war was over.
比较
连词连接从句不同,意思不同。
He had been in China before the war was over.战争结束前,他已经在中国了。
=The war was over before he came to China.
=The war had been over before he came to China.
战争结束后,他来到中国。
I have learned more than two thousand English words since I began learning English two years ago.
自从两年前我开始学习英语以来,我已经学习了两千多个英语单词了。
注意
D.since引导的是一个过去时的句子,说明自当时以来到现在(自从两年前以来),主句一般要用现在完成时。
As soon as I get enough money,I'll buy it.我一得到足够的钱,就买它。
2. 引导条件状语从句的从属连词。这类连词主要有if, unless, as [so] long as, in case 等。如:
Do you mind if I open the window?我开窗你不介意吧?
Don’t come unless I telephone. 除非我打电话,否则你别来。
As long as you’re happy,it doesn’t matter what you do.
只要你高兴,你做什么都没关系。
In case it rains they will stay at home. 万一下雨,他们就呆在家里。
注意:在条件状语从句中,通常从句用一般现在时态主句用一般将来时态。
3. 引导目的状语从句的从属连词。主要的有 in order that, so that, in case, for fear等。如:
He raised his voice so that everyone could hear. 他提高了嗓音,以便每个人都能听见。
Take your umbrella (just) in case it rains. 带上雨伞,以防下雨。
She repeated the instructions slowly in order that he should understand.
她把那些指示慢慢重复了一遍好让他听明白。
4. 引导结果状语从句的从属连词。主要的有so that, so…that, such…that等。
I went to the lecture early so that I got a good seat.
我去听演讲去得很早, 所以找个好座位。
I had so many falls that I was black and blue all over.
我摔了许多跤,以致于全身都是青一块紫一块的。
He shut the window with such force that the glass broke.
他关窗子用力很大, 结果
so…that:太……以致……
He is so old that he can't work. = He is too old to work.他太老了,不能工作。
The box is so heavy that I can't lift it.
=The box is too heavy for me to lift. 箱子太沉了,我抬不起来。
The girl is so beautiful that everybody likes her.
这个小女孩太漂亮了,每个人都喜欢她。
注意此句型与too…to的互换。
so…that在肯定句中不能转换成too…to…。
5. 引导原因状语从句的从属连词。主要的有because, as, since, seeing (that), now (that), considering (that) 等。
He distrusted me because I was new. 他不信任我,因为我是新来的。
As you are sorry,I’ll forgive you. 既然你悔悟了,我就原谅你。
Since we’ve no money, we can’t buy it. 由于我们没钱,我们无法购买它。
Seeing that he’s ill he’s unlikely to come. 因为他病了,他大概不会来了。
Now that she has apologized, I am content. 既然她已经道了歉, 我也就满意了。
She didn't go there,because she was ill.因为她病了,所以她没去那儿。
回答Why问句时,只能用because,不能用for或 as.
Why are you late?你为什么迟到?
Because I met a traffic accident on my way here.因为在我来这儿的路上,遇到了车祸。汉语中,我们经常说因为……所以,但在英文中有了because,就不能再用so。
(×)Because he was tired, so he couldn't walk there.
因为他累了,所以他不能走到那儿了。:
6. 引导让步状语从句的从属连词。主要的有although, though, even though, even if, while, however, whatever, whoever, whenever, wherever等。如:
Although they are twins, they look entirely different.
他们虽是孪生, 但是相貌却完全不同。
I like her even though she can be annoying. 尽管她有时很恼人, 但我还是喜欢她。
You won’t move that stone, however strong you are.
不管你力气多大, 也休想搬动那块石头。
Whatever we have achieved, we owe to your support.
我们取得的一切成就都归功于你们的支持。
Whoever you are, you can’t pass this way. 不管你是谁,你都不能从这里通过。
Whene4 if,though (although)
If it doesn't rain,we'll go to the park.
如果不下雨,我们就去公园。
Though I was tired, I still worked hard.
虽然我很累,可是我仍然努力地工作。
如果用了though,although (虽然)就不能再用but(但是)。
Although(Though) I live near the sea, I'm not a good swimmer.
=I live near the sea,but I'm not a good swimmer.
虽然我住在海边,可是我游泳并不好。
注意
注意时态一致,和时间状语从句一样。主句是将来时之时,从句要用一般现在时。
7. 引导方式状语从句的从属连词。主要的有as, as if, as though, the way等。如:
Why didn’t you catch the last bus as I told you to?
你怎么不听我的话赶乘末班公共汽车呢?
He bent the iron bar as if it had been made of rubber.
他将铁棍折弯,仿佛那是用橡皮做成的。
Nobody else loves you the way(=as) I do. 没有人像我这样爱你。
8. 引导地点状语从句的从属连词。主要的有where, wherever, everywhere, anywhere等。如:
The church was built where there had once been a Roman temple.
这座教堂盖在一座罗马寺庙的旧址。
I’ll take you anywhere you like. 你想到哪儿我就带你到哪儿。
Everywhere I go,I find the same thing. 不管我走到哪里,我都发现同样情况。
9. 引导比较状语从句的从属连词。主要的有than和as…as。如:
She was now happier than she had ever been. 现在她比过去任何时候都快活。
I glanced at my watch. It was earlier than I thought. 我看了看表,时间比我想像的早。
He doesn’t work as hard as she does. 他工作不像她那样努力。
10. 引起名词从句的从属连词。主要有that, whether, if 等,它们用于引导主语从句、表语从句、宾语从句和同位语从句。其中that 不仅没不充当句子成分,而且没有词义,在句子中只起连接作用;而 if, whether 虽不充当句子成分,但有词义,即表示“是否”。如:
He replied that he was going by train. 他回答说他将坐火车去。
I wonder if it’s large enough. 我不知道它是否够大。
I worry about whether I hurt her feelings. 我为是否伤了她的感情而担心。
1) that
I think(that) he likes football.我想他喜欢足球。
that引导名词性从句(主语从句、表语从句、宾语从句和同位语从句)和定语从句,
1).that在宾语从句、间接引语中可以省略,主句与从句时态一致。
I think(that) he is tired.我想他累了。
I thought(that) he was tired.
要特别注意主句与从句时态的呼应。如果主句是过去时,从句一律改为过去的时态,
2).如果主句的动词是 think, believe…;如果主句的主语是第一人称,变为否定句时,要否定主句,译成中文时,则否定从句。
I believe you will leave here.我相信,你会离开这儿的。
I don't believe you will leave here.我相信,你不会离开这儿的。
必背!
I hope that~我希望~ I think that~我认为~ I say that~我说~
I know that~我知道~ I find that~我发现~ be afraid that~恐怕~
be sure that~确认~ be glad(happy) that~很高兴~
(以上的that都可以省略)
2.if, whether
if和whether都可作“是否”讲,在引导宾与从句是一般可互换。例如:
I wonder whether (if) you still study in that school.
I don’t know whether (if) he likes that film.
只用whether
1) 引导主语从句时。例如:
Whether he will come to the party is unknown.
2) 引导表语从句时。例如:
The question is whether I can pass the exam.
3) 在不定式前。例如:
I haven’t made up my mind whether to go there or not.
四连词比较
I and 与or
1) 并列结构中,or通常用于否定句,and用于肯定句。
2) 但有时and 也可用于否定句。请注意其不同特点:
There is no air or water in the moon. There is no air and no water on the moon.
在否定中并列结构用or 连接,但含有两个否定词的句子实际被看作是肯定结构,因此要用and。
---I don't like chicken or fish. ---I don't like chicken, but I like fish very much.
(错) We will die without air and water. (错) We can't live without air or water.
(对) We will die without air or water. (对) We can't live without air and water.
3 )表示选择的并列结构
(1) or 意思为"否则"。I must work hard, or I'll fail in the exam.
(2) either…or 意思为"或者……或者……"。注意谓语动词采用就近原则。
Either you or I am right.
注意:and 还可以和祈使句或名词词组连用表示条件。(or也有此用法)
Make up your mind, and you'll get the chance.
= If you make up your mind, you'll get the chance.
One more effort, and you'll succeed. = If you make one more effort, you'll succeed.
II but,while
but表示转折,while表示对比。
Some people love cats, while others hate them.
典型例题
--- Would you like to come to dinner tonight?
--- I'd like to, but I'm too busy.
III so, therefore
He hurt his leg, so he couldn't play in the game.
注意
a. 两个并列连词不能连用,但therefore, then, yet.可以和并列连词连用。
You can watch TV, and or you can go to bed.
He hurt his leg, and so / and therefore he couldn't play in the game.
b. although… yet…,但although不与 but连用。
(错) Although he was weak, but he tried his best to do the work..
(对) Although he was weak, yet he tried his best to do the work.
Ⅵ.比较so和 such
其规律由so与such的不同词性决定。such 是形容词,修饰名词或名词词组,so是副词,只能修饰形容词或副词。so 还可与表示数量的形容词many,few,much, little连用,形成固定搭配。
so + adj. such + a(n) + n.
so + adj. + a(n) + n. such + adj. + n. (pl.)
so +many/much/few/lille +n such + adj. + n. [不可数]
so foolish such a fool
so nice a flower such a nice flower
so many/ few flowers such nice flowers
so much/little money. such rapid progress
so many people such a lot of people
so many 已成固定搭配,a lot of 虽相当于 many,但 a lot of 为名词性的,只能用such搭配。
so…that与such…that之间的转换既为 so与such之间的转换。
注意:too .... to .. ,so ..... that .... , such .... that .... , enough ..... to ...., 的互换.
so that to = in order to /that 的用法.
Eg A .He is too young to go to school.
B .He is such a young boy that he can't go to school .
C .He is so young that he can't go to school .
D .He isn't old enough to go to school
易错分析:
①关于not…until
He stayed there until it was very late.句中,stay是可延续性动词,所以不用not。
He didn't leave until it was very late.句中,leave是不可延续性动词,所以用not
②both …and ,either…or ,neither …nor 这三个句型的相互关系如下:
1.肯定句:I like both A and B.我喜欢A和B。
I like both coffee and tea.
我喜欢咖啡和茶。(茶和咖啡我都喜欢)
2.否定句:I don't like both A and B. =I like either A or B.
我不喜欢A 或B。
I like either coffee or tea .
咖啡和茶,我喜欢一样儿。
=I don't like both coffee and tea .
3.I don't like either A or B .=I like neither A nor B.
A和B 我都不喜欢。
咖啡和茶,我都不喜欢。
I like neither coffee nor tea .
I don't like either coffee or tea .
③or还是and
祈使句+or+陈述句前后是对立的
祈使句+and+陈述句前后是统一的
(or或and后的陈述句,常用一般将来时)
Study hard, or you won't pass the exam.
Study hard, and you will pass the exam.
两句都可以转换成“If条件句+主句”形式,注意:要去掉or和and:
If you don't study hard, you won't pass the exam.
If you study hard, you will pass the exam.
④because, since, as, for表示原因时的区别
尽管because, for, since, as都表示原因,但是用法上有不同.
because通常表示说话人认为这种理由或者原因是听话人所不知道的.
He didn't attend the meeting because he had too much work to do.
since表示的原因是人们已知的事实,常译作“既然”。
Since he can't answer this question, you'd better ask someone else.
as表示原因与since差别不大,只是语气更弱,多译为“由于”
As I haven't seen the film, I can't tell you what I think of it.
for表示因果关系时,只能放在主句之后,不能放在句首。而且经常是对主句补充说明理由或推断原因。
It rained last night, for the ground is wet.
⑤ as, when, while
这三个连词都可引导时间状语从句,但用法有所不同。
1) 当某事正在进行的时候,又发生了另一件事。While, when, as 都可用来引导表示“背景”的时间状语从句。例如:
As/When/While I was walking down the street I noticed a police car.
2) 当两个长动作同时进行的时候,最常用的是while。例如:
While mother was cooking lunch, I was doing my homework.
3) 当两个动作都表示发展变化的情况时,最常用的是as。例如:
As children get older, they become more and more interested in things around them.
4) 当两个短动作同时发生时,或表示“一边…一边…”时,最常用as。例如:
Just as he caught the fly, he gave a loud cry.
She looked behind from time to time as she went
5) 当从句的动作先于主句的动作时,通常用when。例如:
When he finished his work, he took a short rest.
6) 当从句是瞬间动作,主句是延续性动作时,通常用when。例如:
When John arrived I was cooking lunch.
副 词
一.副词的概念
副词(adverb,简写为adv)是一种用来修饰动词、形容词、全句的词,说明时间、地点、程度、方式等概念的词。副词是一种半虚半实的词。副词可分为:地点副词、方式副词、程度副词、疑问副词、连接副词。
二分类
一). 常见的时间副词
1.常见的时间副词有
now, then, soon, ago, recently, lately, later, finally, before, early, today tomorrow, yesterday, tonight, suddenly, immediately, already, just 等。
2. 时间副词在句中的位置
(1) 表确定时间的副词(如today, yesterday等)通常位于句末,有时也位于句首:
He went home yesterday. / Yesterday he went home. 他昨天回家了。
而那些表示非确定时间的副词(如 soon, recently, suddenly等)除可用于句末或句首外,还可位于句中(通常位于实意动词之前,动词be、助动词、情态动词之后):
He went to Paris recently. / He recently went to Paris. / Recently he went to Paris. 最近他去了巴黎。
(2) still, already, just 等几个表示时间的副词通常位于句中(实意动词之前,动词be、助动词、情态动词之后):
He’s just left for school. 他刚刚去学校。
I have already finished my work. 我已经做完了工作。
当要表示强调时,still和already也可位于动词be、助动词等之前:
She was still [still was] beautiful at the age of forty. 她到了40岁仍然很美。 I already have told him about it. 我已经把情况告诉他了。
still若用于否定句,则总是位于助动词之前:
I still don’t understand what you mean. 我还是不明白你的意思。
另外,still 和already 还可位于句末,表示惊奇:
Are you on page one still? 你还在看第1页?
Is your mother back already? 你妈妈就已经回来了?
二)、地点副词
1. 常见的地点副词
here, there, up, down, away, nearby, home, ahead, abroad, indoors, overseas, halfway, upstairs, downstairs 等。
2. 地点副词在句中的位置
地点副词在句中通常位于句末或句首,但从不位于主语和谓语之间。若有多个副词排列,地点副词通常位于方式副词之后,时间副词之前:
Can you help to carry this table upstairs? 你能帮忙把桌子搬到楼上去吗?
The boy read quietly over there all afternoon. 这男孩整个下午都在那儿静静地看书。
三)、方式副词
1. 方式副词的特点
方式副词表示动词的行为方式,许多以-ly结构的副词都是方式副词,如carefully, happily, quietly, heavily, warmly, correctly, politely, angrily 等。
2. 方式副词在句中的位置
(1) 方式副词通常位于动词(及其宾语)之后:
He read the letter slowly. 他从容不迫地看了那封信。
方式副词通常不位于动词与宾语之间,除非动词后的宾语很长:
不可说:We like very much it. (应改为We like it very much.) 但可说:We could see very clearly a strange light ahead of us. 我们可以很清楚地看到在我们前方有一道奇怪的光。
若遇到“动词+介词+宾语”结构,方式副词既可位于“介词+宾语”之前,也可位于“介词+宾语”之后,但是若该结构的宾语较长,则方式副词通常位于“介词+宾语”之前:
He looked at me curiously. / He looked curiously at me. 他好奇地打量着我。
He looked curiously at everyone who got off the plane.
他好奇地打量着从飞机上走下来的每一个人。
(2) 方式副词(主要是单个的方式副词)有时也可位于主语与动词之间:
He quickly got dressed. 他赶紧穿好衣服。
He angrily tore up the letter. 他很生气,把信撕碎了。
(3) 有的方式副词(如
bravely, cleverly, cruelly, foolishly, generously, kindly, secretly, simply等)位于动词之前和位于句末会导致句子意思的变化:
They secretly decided to leave the town. 他们秘密决定离开这个城市。
They decided to leave the town secretly. 他们决定秘密地离开这个城市。
He answered the questions foolishly. 他对这个问题作了愚蠢的回答。
He foolishly answered the questions. 他愚蠢地回答了这个问题。
(4) 有的方式副词(如gently, quietly, slowly, suddenly 等)有时可位于句首,以达到某种戏剧性的效果(这主要见于书面语中):
Suddenly, the driver started the engine. 突然地,司机启动了发动机。
四)、频度副词
1. 频度副词的特点
频度副词表示动作发生的次数,常见有的
ever, never, rarely, seldom, once, often, occasionally, constantly, frequently, usually, continually, always 等。
2. 频度副词在句中的位置
频度副词通常位于实意动词之前,动词be、助动词、情态动词之后: He often comes to see us. 他常来看我们。
He is seldom late for school. 他上学很少迟到。
有时为了强调,频度副词也可位于动词be、助动词等之前: She always was late. 她老是迟到。
有的频度副词可位于句末(尤其受very, only修饰时):
I get paid on Fridays usually. 我通常在星期五领工资。 We go out very seldom. 我们很少外出。
Do you go to the cinema very often? 你常去看电影吗?
有的频度副词(如sometimes, often, usually, frequently, occasionally等)可位于句首(此时多半是因为强调或对比):
Sometimes he went there by bus. 有时他坐公共汽车去那儿。
Very often the phone rings when I’m in the bath. 电话经常在我洗澡时响。
【注】含有否定意义的频度副词置于句首时,其后要用倒装语序: Never have I been there. 我从未去过那儿。
Seldom does he see a film. 他很少看电影。
另外,频度副词always 和 never通常不位于句首,除非是祈使句: Always remember this. 时刻记住这一点。 Never go out at night. 晚上千万不要出去。
3. 频度副词在否定句中的位置
在否定句中,有的频度副词可位于否定词not之后或之前(如usually, often),有的频度副词则必须位于否定词之后(如always, constantly, continually, continuously,均含有“连续不断”
之意),而有的频度副词却必须要位于否定词not之前(如sometimes, frequently):
He doesn’t usually come here. / He usually doesn’t come here. 他通常不来这儿。
She doesn’t always come late. 她并非总是迟到。(不能说 always doesn’ t)
He is sometimes not responsible for what he does. 他有时对所做的事不负责任。
五)、程度副词
1. 程度副词的特点
程度副词用于表示程度,常见的有
fairly, pretty, rather, quite, very, much, too, greatly, almost, nearly, half, highly, awfully, deeply, partly, perfectly, really 等。
2. 程度副词的用法注意点
(1) 程度副词主要用于修饰形容词和副词,有的还可修饰比较级(如much, rather 等)和最高级(如quite, much, almost 等):
Houses are much more expensive these days. 如今的房价贵多了。
This is quite [much] the most expensive radio here. 这是这里最贵的收音机。 【注】quite 有时也修饰比较级,但只用于quite better(身体康复)这一表达。
(2) 有的程度副词(如quite, rather, almost等)可修饰动词,但有的(如fairly, pretty, very等)则不能修饰动词:
I quite agree with you. 我完全同意你的意见。(不用fairly, pretty, very) We rather like the film. 我们很喜欢这部电影。(不用fairly, pretty, very)
(3) 个别的程度副词(主要是quite和rather)还可修饰名词(注意词序):
It’s quite [rather] a good idea. / It’s a quite [rather] good idea. 那可真是个好主意。 若此结构中没有形容词,则 quite 和 rather 则只能放在冠词之前:
It was quite [rather] a success. 那事相当成功。
六)、连接副词
1. 连接副词的分类
连接副词可分为两类,一类是用于连接句子或从句,常见的有therefore, besides, otherwise, however, moreover, still, thus, meanwhile等;另一类是用于引导从句或不定式,主要的有when, why, where, how 等。
2. 连接句子或从句的连接副词
其性质类似于并列连词,使用时其前通常用分号或句号;若其前用逗号,则通常带有并列连词(如and):
I don’t like it; besides, it’s too expensive. 我不喜欢它,而且也太贵了。
We all tried our best; however, we lost the game. / We all tried our best. However, we lost the game. 我们都已尽了最大的努力,不过我们还是输了。
注意,有的连接副词(如however等)后通常有逗号与句子的其他成分隔开。另外,这类副词有的还可位于句中或句末:
He may, however, come later. 不过,他也许一会儿就到。
We all tried out best. We lost the game, however. 我们都已尽了最大的努力,不过我们还是输了。
Peter is our youngest child, and we have three others besides. 彼特是我们最小的孩子,我们另外还有三个。
3. 引导从句和不定式的连接副词
用于引导从句(名词性从句)或不定式的连接副词主要有when, why, where, how等: Tell me when we shall leave. / Tell me when to leave. 告诉我什么时候离开。
I don’t know how I can find him. / I don’t know how to find him. 我不知道如何找到他。
三、副词在句中的用法
1.修饰动词
Advertisements appear everywhere in modern society. 广告在现代社会无处不在。
I haven’t read that book carefully.I’ve just only dipped into it. 我没有认真读过那本书,只是随便翻阅过。
2.修饰形容词
Training by yourself in a gym can be highly dangerous。 你独自在体育馆训练是非常危险的。
I think at the beginning we’d rather have some fairly quiet and peaceful music. 我认为开始时我们应该来点稍微轻柔平和的音乐。
3.修饰副词
He worked out just how much the light would bend; he could also work out how far the stars would appear to have moved.他把光的弯曲度计算了出来;他还能把星球看上去移动了的距离也计算出来。
If the feeding place was toward the sun, the dancer headed straight upward during the straight part of the wagging dance.
如果喂食地点向着太阳,跳舞的蜜蜂在跳摆尾舞的直线部分就一直向上。
4.修饰全句
You are obviously a person of great courage. 显然你是个极有勇气的人。
Often, all we need is a good friend who will listen to us while we“talk things through”.
往往我们所需要的,不过是一位能倾听我们“畅叙衷肠”的好朋友。
Then it turned in a semicircle, ran straight again, and turned in another semicircle to the opposite side然后它转半个圈,再沿直线跑,在另一边又转半个圈。
四.副词的主要句法功能:
1. 用作状语。如:
He speaks English very well. 他英语说得很好。
I often get up at six in the morning. 我经常是在早晨6点钟起床。
He went home yesterday. / Yesterday he went home. 他昨天回家了。
2. 用作表语。如:
I’ll be back in five minutes. 我五分钟就回来。
I must be off now. 我现在得走了。
Is the radio on or off? 收音机是开着的还是关着的?
在一般情况下,作表语时不用副词而用形容词:
误:He looks very angrily.
正:He looks very angry. 他看上去很生气。
误:Mr. Smith is very carefully.
正:Mr. Smith is very careful. 史密斯先生很仔细。
英语中可用作表语的副词主要是表地点的副词以及某些与介词同形的副词,常见的有here, there, up, down, away, nearby, back, in, home, ahead, upstairs, downstairs, off, through, on, over 等。而且这些副词只能用于连系动词be 后作表语,而不用于其他连系动词后作表语,如:
误:He seems here. / He seems away.
正:He is here. / He is away.
3. 用作宾语。如:
It’s hot in here. 这里面很热。
It’s not far from here. 从这儿去不远。
I’ll stay at home tonight. 今晚我将呆在家里。
副词用作宾语的用法十分有限,通常只用作介词宾语,并且只限于某些表示时间和地点的副词,而且不同的副词有不同的搭配特点,如 here和there 可与along, around, down, from, in, near, round, up 等介词连用,但通常不与介词to连用,如不说come to here, go to there 等(注:from here to there是例外)。
4用作宾语补足语。如:
Please ask him in, please. 请叫他进来。
I’m pleased to see you back. 看到你回来了我很高兴。
一般说来,只有能用作表语的副词才可用作宾语补足语。
5用作定语。如:
Is there anything on tonight? 今晚有什么活动吗?
The people there were very friendly. 那儿的人很友好。
在通常情况下,副词用作定语总是放在被修饰的名词或代词之后。
五.副词的比较等级
节副词的比较级是在副词后面加上 -er 构成的,最高级是在副词后面加上 -est 构成的。
near nearer nearest hard harder hardest
多音节副词的比较级是在副词的前面加上 -more 构成的。 最高级是在副词前面加上 -most 构成的。
warmly more warmly most warmly
successfully more successfully most successfully
有些副词的比较级和最高级形式是不规则的。 well-better - best little - less - least Much- more - most badly - worse - worst far-farther(further)-farthest(furthest)
但是,开放类副词即以后缀ly结尾的副词不能像形容词那样加er或est, 如
quickly →more quickly →most quickly quietly →more quietly →most quietly 〔注〕: early中的ly不是后缀,故可以把y变i再加er和est
副词的比较级和最高级用法同形容词的比较级用法基本一样。 最高级形式句中 the 可以省略。
He works harder than I. 他比我工作努力。
1. 原级主要的句型:
1)as+副词原级+as Tom runs as fast as Jones.
not as/so+副词原级+as He didn’t come as/so early as Li Lei.
2)too+副词原级+to do sth. Jean rides too slowly to catch up with me.
3)so +副词原级+ that Jean rides so slowly that she can’t catch up with me.
4)副词原级+enough to do sth. Jean doesn’t ride fast enough to catch up with me.
2. 比较级的用法:
1)比较级+than。当前后使用的动词相同时,通常用助动词来代替后面的动词,该动词或助动词可以省略。
Lily run faster than Mary(did).
2)比较级+and +比较级 The days are getting longer and longer in summer.
3)the more…the more… The harder you work, the better you will learn. 3
3. . 最高级的用法:
副词最高级前一般有the,也可省略。
He works (the) hardest of all the students in the class.
甲+实意动词+副词比较级+than+any other+单数名词(+介词短语)”
表示“甲比同一范围的任何一个人/物都……”,含义是“甲最……”。
Mike gets to school earlier than any other student in his class.
= Mike gets to school earlier than any of the other students in his class.
迈克比他们班上任何一个其他的同学到校都早。
= Mike gets to school earlier than the other students in his class.
迈克比他们班上其他的同学到校都早。
= Mike gets to school earliest in his class.迈克在他们班到校最早。
注意:Mike gets to school earlier than any student in Tom’s class.迈克比汤姆班上任何一个学生到校都早。(迈克和汤姆不是同一个班)
3.最高级常用句型结构
“主语+实意动词+(the)+副词最高级+单数名词+in/of短语”表示“……是……中最……的”。
I jump (the) farthest in my class.我是我们班跳得最远的。
3、 某些副词在用法上的区别
(1) already, yet, still
already表示某事物已经发生,主要用于肯定句;yet表示期待某事发生,主要用于否定句和疑问句;still表示某事还在进行,主要用于肯定句和疑问句,有时也可用于否定句。如:
We've already watched that film.
I haven't finished my homework yet.
He still works until late every night.
(2) too, as well, also, either
too, as well和 also用于肯定句和疑问句,too和as well多用于口语,一般放在句末,而also多用于书面语,一般放在句中与动词连用。either用于否定句和否定的疑问句,往往放在句末。如:He went there too.
He didn't go there either.
I like you as well.
I also went there.
(3) hard, hardly
hardly意为"几乎"与hard在词义上完全不同。如:
I work hard every day.
I can hardly remember that.
(4) late, lately
lately意为"最近、近来",late意为"晚、迟"。如:
He never comes late.
Have you been to the museum lately?
注意:
以辅音字母+y(读作/i/)结尾的形容词变为副词时,要把y变为i,再加-ly,如easily,happily
以-l结尾的形容词变为副词时,直接加-y,如chilly,fully等;
以辅音字母+le结尾的形容词变为副词时,去-le加-ly,如ably,idly,simply等;
以-ue结尾的形容词变为副词时,去-e加-ly,如truly等;
以-ic结尾的形容词变为副词时,加-ally,如basically,heroically,tragically等。
有些副词有两种不同的形式,一种和形容词同形,另一种由形容词加后缀-ly构成,二者有时没有什么区别,如high—highly,slow—slowly等。
副词除了常见的后缀-ly外,还有一些后缀,如:-wise, -ward (s), -ways等。有些副词带有前缀a-,如:abroad, ahead, around, aloud, alike, alone等。
少数以ly结尾的词却是形容词,一定要注意;friendly, weekly,monthly, daily, lovely, lively, yearly
六.多个副词连用的位置关系
副词主要用来修饰动词,形容词,副词或其他结构。
一、)副词的位置:
1) 在动词之前。
2) 在be动词、助动词之后。
3) 多个助动词时,副词一般放在第一个助动词后。
注意:
a. 大多数方式副词位于句尾,但宾语过长,副词可以提前,以使句子平衡。
We could see very clearly a strange light ahead of us.
b. 方式副词well,badly糟、坏,hard等只放在句尾。
He speaks English well.
二、)副词的排列顺序:
1) 时间,地点副词,小单位的在前,大单位在后。
2) 方式副词,短的在前,长的在后,并用and或but等连词连接。
Please write slowly and carefully.
3) 多个不同副词排列:程度+地点+方式+时间副词。
注意:副词very 可以修饰形容词,但不能修饰动词。
改错:(错) I very like English.
(对) I like English very much.
注意:副词enough要放在形容词的后面,形容词enough放在名词前后都可。
I don't know him well enough.
There is enough food for everyone to eat.
There is food enough for everyone to eat.
一定要和形容词结合才能分清副词的用法:
七.兼有两种形式的副词
1) close与closely
close意思是"近"; closely 意思是"仔细地"
He is sitting close to me.
Watch him closely.
2) late 与lately
late意思是"晚"; lately 意思是"最近"
You have come too late.
What have you been doing lately?
3) deep与deeply
deep意思是"深",表示空间深度;deeply时常表示感情上的深度,"深深地"
He pushed the stick deep into the mud.
Even father was deeply moved by the film.
4) high与highly
high表示空间高度;highly表示程度,相当于much
The plane was flying high.
I think highly of your opinion.
5) wide与widely
wide表示空间宽度;widely意思是"广泛地","在许多地方"
He opened the door wide.
English is widely used in the world.
6) free与freely
free的意思是"免费";freely 的意思是"无限制地"
You can eat free in my restaurant whenever you like.
You may speak freely; say what you like.
介 词
.介词是 preposition 缩写prep
介词是一种用来表示词与词、词与句之间的关系的虚词,在句中不能单独作句子成分。介词后面一般有名词代词或相当于名词的其他词类,短语或从句作它的宾语。介词和它的宾语构成介词词组,在句中作状语,表语,补语或介词宾语。介词可以分为时间介词、地点介词、方式介词、原因介词和其他介词
1.表示地点位置的介词
1)at ,in, on, to,for
at (1)表示在小地方; (2)表示“在……附近,旁边”
in (1)表示 在大地方; (2)表示“在…范围之内”。
on 表示毗邻,接壤,“在……上面”。
to 表示在……范围外,不强调是否接壤;或“到……”
2)above, over, on 在……上
above 指在……上方,不强调是否垂直,与 below相对;
over指垂直的上方,与under相对,但over与物体有一定的空间,不直接接触。
on表示某物体上面并与之接触。
The bird is flying above my head. There is a bridge over the river. He put his watch on the desk.
3)below, under 在……下面
under表示在…正下方 There is a cat under the table.
below表示在……下,不一定在正下方 Please write your name below the line.
4)in front of, in the front of在……前面
in front of…意思是“在……前面”,指甲物在乙物之前,两者互不包括;其反义词是behind(在……的后面)。
There are some flowers in front of the house.(房子前面有些花卉。)
in the front of 意思是“在…..的前部”,即甲物在乙物的内部.反义词是at the back of…(在……范围内的后部)。
There is a blackboard in the front of our classroom. 我们的教室前边有一块黑板。
Our teacher stands in the front of the classroom. 我们的老师站在教室前.(老师在教室里)
5)beside,behind
beside 表示在……旁边 behind 表示在……后面
2.表示时间的介词
1)in , on,at 在……时
in表示较长时间,如世纪、朝代、时代、年、季节、月及一般(非特指)的早、中、晚等。
如 in the 20th century, in the 1950s, in 1989, in summer, in January, in the morning, in one’s life , in one’s thirties等。
On表示确定的时间。表示具体某一天及其早、中、晚。
on May 1st, on Monday, on New Years Day, on a cold night in January, on a fine morning, on Sunday afternoon等。
at表示某一时刻或较短暂的时间,或泛指圣诞节,复活节等。
at 3:20, at this time of year, at the beginning of, at the end of …, at the age of …, at Christmas, at night, at noon, at this moment等。
时间名词前介词用法口诀 年前周前要用in 具体日子要用on 遇到几号也用on 上午下午得是in 要说某日上下午
用on换in记清楚 午夜黄昏用at 黎明用它也不错 at用在时分前 说“差”可要用上to 说"过''要用past
注意:在last, next, this, that, some, every ,tomorrow ,yesterday等词之前一律不用介词。如:We meet every day.
2)in, after 在……之后
“in +段时间”表示将来的一段时间以后;
“after+段时间”表示过去的一段时间以后;
“after+将来的时间点”表示将来的某一时刻以后。
3)from,for, since 自从……
from仅说明什么时候开始,不说明某动作或情况持续多久;
since表示某动作或情况持续至说话时刻,后接点时间,通常与完成时连用。since表示"自(某具体时间)以来",还可以用做连词引导 时间状语从句。
For+一段时间意为已经多长时间了,强调某动作或状态持续了多长时间,可与过去,现在,将来多种时态连用,谓语动词只能用延续性动词
She has worked there for three years.
since liberation(1980)自从解放(1980年)以来
They have been close friends since childhood.
他们从小就是好朋友。
(1)since the war是指"自从战争结束以来",若指"自从战争开始以来",须说"since the beginning of the war"。
(2)不要将since与after混淆。
比较:He has worked here since 1965.(指一段时间,强调时间段)自从1965年以来,他一直在这儿工作。
He began to work here after 1965.
(指一点时间,强调时间点)从1965年以后,他开始在这儿工作。
4)after, behind 在……之后
after主要用于表示时间; behind主要用于表示位置。
5)till until到……为止,直到……之时,直到 肯定句中要用延续性动词。
You’d better stay in bed till/until tomorrow.
Not …until 直到……才……谓语动词用非延续性动词。
I didn’t go to bed until eleven last night.
6) by+时间点表示最迟在某一时刻或某一日期之前,若by+过去的的时间点,句中的谓语动词用过去完成时态。
They had seen three English films by last night .
7)before指时间在……以前,后接点时间。I will get to Beijing before Friday.
8)during 在……期间,强调自始至终。
During those three months ,he asked a lot of questions.
3.表示运动方向的介词:
across, through 通过,穿过
across表示横过,即从物体表面通过,与on有关,为二维 through穿过,即从物体内部穿过,与in有关,为三维。
By, beside, near
By 在……旁边 比near 更近 my house is by the river.
Beside 近旁,紧靠,相当于next to Come and sit beside me
Near 在……附近,表示空间,时间关系等。He sits near the window .
4.表示“在……之间”的介词:
between指在两个人或两个事物之间;between …and…在……和……之间
among指在三个或三个以上的人或事物之间。
5.表示其他意义的介词
1)on ,about 关于
on 表示这本书,这篇文章或演说是严肃的,或学术性的,可供专门研究这一问题的人阅读;
about表示内容较为普通,不那么正式。
2)by, with, in ,on 表示方法、手段、工具
by 以……方法、手段或泛指某种交通工具; 交通工具前不用任何限定词。 In,on时交通工具前用限定词。 He makes a living by teaching.
with 表示用 …工具、手段,一般接具体的工具和手段;
with 和,具有,带有,用,以,由于等,常表示伴随。
She came back with a letter in her hand .
I do my homework with a pen,
in 表示用…方式,用…语言(语调、笔墨、颜色)或材料等
I can say it in English .
on 以……方式,最常见的搭配是 on the phone.
3)except, besides ,but, except for
except 除……之外,不包括在内; besides 除……之外,包括在内。
Except for 排除不同类的事物
But 与except同义,表示除了,常与no one,nobody, all, nothing等代词连用。
Besides Mr. Wang, we also went to see the film.(王先生也去了)
The shop is open every day except Sunday .
I have nothing on except for my trousers.
There is no one but me.
4)against 反对,靠着,倚着are you for or against the plan?
看似相同,但意义有别的词组
英语中有一些介词词组和动词词组,它们从形式上看似乎基本相同,但在意义上却截然不同。要是我们在记忆上对这类词组不加以重视,使用时就很容易望文生义,甚至张冠李戴。为此,把这类词组归纳如下:
(1) at table在进餐at the table在桌子旁(=beside the desk)
(2) at desk在读书或做作业at the desk在书桌旁
(3) at school在校上学(指学生)at the school在学校(指教职工)
(4) in front of the bus在公共汽车的前面(不在车上)
in the front of the bus在公共汽车的前部(在车上)
(5) at sea在航海中at the sea在海边
(6) by day白天by the day按日,论日
(7) behind time误期behind the time落后于时代
(8) in class在上课,在课内in the class在这个班
(9) in bed 卧床,在睡觉in the bed在床上
(10) in prison坐牢in the prison在监狱
(11) in red穿着红色的衣服in the red负债,亏损
(12) in hospital住院(指病人)in the hospital(因事)在医院
(13) in office在办公,执政in the office在办公室
(14) in secret秘密,私下in the secret参入秘密,参入阴谋
(15) in place of 代替,而不是in the place of在……地方
(16) in case of万一,如果in the case of就……来说,至于
(17) of age成年人of an age同龄人
(18) out of office离职out of the office离开办公室
(19) out of prison(因犯罪)出狱out of the prison(因事)从监狱出来
(20) out of question毫无疑问out of the question不可能,办不到
2).含有介词的动词词组
(1) come out of hospital(病好)出院come out of the hospital(因事)从医院里出来
(2) come out of prison(刑满)释放come out of the prison(因事)从监狱里出来
(3) go to school去上学go to the school(因事)去学校
(4) go to college上大学go to the/a college去一所学校(办事)
(5) go to bed上床睡觉go to the bed去床边
(6) go to hospital去住院go to the hospital(因事)去医院
(7) go to prison去坐牢go to the prison(因事)去监狱
(8) go to sea当海员 go to the sea去海边
(9) go to court起诉 go to the court(因事)去法庭
(10) go to church做礼拜go to the church(因事)去教堂
(11) keep house管理家务keep the house守在家里
(12) take place发生 take the place代替
3).有无冠词,意义无多大区别的介词词组
(1)at(the)most至多 (2)at(the)first起初 (3)all(the)day 整天
(4)catch(a)cold感冒 (5)in(the)future 将来 (6)in(the)memory of纪念
(7)go to(the)office 上班,去办公室
(8)go to(the)market 赶集,去市场 (9)on(a)holiday 在度假
(10)(the)day before yesterday 前天 (11)(the)most of 大多数
(12)with(a)smiling face 面带微笑
初中介词搭配
1)at once 立刻 2)at last 最后 3)at first 起先,首先
4)at the age of… 在……岁时 5)at the end of… 在……之末
6)at the beginning of… 在……之初 7)at the foot of… 在……脚下
8)at the same time 同时 9)at night/noon 在夜里/中午
10)with one's help 在某人的帮助下,由于某人的帮助
11)with the help of … 在……的帮助下 12)with a smile 面带笑容
13)with one's own eyes 亲眼看见 14)after a while 过了一会儿
15)from now on 从现在起 16)from then on 从那时起 1
17)for example 例如 18)far away from 远离
19)from morning till night 从早到晚 20)by and by 不久
21)by air mail 寄航空邮件 22)by bike/air/train/bus 骑自行车/乘飞机/火车/汽车
23)by ordinary mail 寄平信 24)by the way 顺便说
25)by the window 在窗边 26)by the end of… 到……底为止
27)little by little 逐渐地 28)in all 总共 29)in fact 事实上
30)in one's twenties 在某人二十几岁时 31)in a hurry 匆忙
32)in the middle of 在……中间 33)in no time (in a minute) 立刻,很快
34)in time (on time) 及时 35)in public 公众,公开地
36)in order to 为了…… 37)in front of 在……前面
38)in the sun 在阳光下 39)in the end 最后,终于
40)in surprise 惊奇地 41)in turn 依次 42)of course 当然
43)a bit (of) 有一点儿 44)a lot of 许多 45)a little 一点儿
46)on one's way to 某人在去……的路上 47)on foot 步行,走路
48)a talk on space 一个关于太空的报告 49)on the other hand 另一方面
50)at/on the weekend 在周末 51)on the left (right) 在左(右)边
52)on the other side of 在……另一边
53)on the radio 通过收音机(无线电广播)
54)to one's joy 使……高兴的是 55)to one's surprise 使……惊讶的是
介词与动词搭配
arrive in/at到达 ask for要,请求
do well in在……方面做得好 give in投降 go on继续
hear from收到……来信 hear of听说
help's B.with sth.帮助……做 laugh at嘲笑
learn from向……学习 leave for离开一地去另一地
talk to与……谈话 go in for从事,致力于 put up穿上,挂上
take down拿下,取了 look at(有意识地)看 speak to对某人说
send for派人去请 shout at大声叫喊,吼叫 take away拿走,带走
think of考虑,关心 turn into把……变成 wait for等候,等待
take off脱下,起飞 turn on/off打开(关上) listen to听
look after照顾,照看 look for寻找 look like 看上去像
get to 到达 point to 指着…… fill with充满,装满
begin with以……开始 deal/do with处置,对待speak up 大声说
meet with偶尔遇见,遭遇 pass on传递
belong to属于 write to写信给…… die of死于……
call on号召,访问,邀请 depend on依靠,依赖
smile at向……微笑 believe in信任 look around t向四下看,到处看
介词用法总结
(和前面讲的内容多有重复,这里补充和悄记得内容较多)
早、午、晚要用 in,at 黎明、午夜、点与分。
年、月、年月、季节、周,阳光、灯、影、衣、帽 in。
将来时态 in ... 以后,小处 at 大处 in。
有形 with 无形 by,语言、单位、材料 in。
特征、方面与方式,心情成语惯用 in。
介词 at 和 to 表方向,攻击、位置、恶、善分。
早、午、晚要用 in
例:in the morning 在早上in the afternoon 在下午
in the evening 在晚上in the day 在白天
at 黎明、午、夜、点与分
at dawn, at daybreak 在黎明时候at noon 在中午at night 在夜间at midnight 在午夜
at ten thirty a.m. 在上午10点30分也可以写成 seven to five 5点差7分(半小时以上)
five minutes after two 2点过5分at a quarter to two 1点45分at the weekend 在周末
年、月、年月、季节、周
即在“某年”,在“某月”,在“某年某月” (但在某年某月某日则用 on),在四季,在第几周等都要用 in。
例:
in 1986 在1986 年in April 在四月in December, 1986 1986年12月
in spring 在春季 in the fist week of this semester 这学期的第一周
in the third week 在第三周
阳光、灯、影、衣、冒 in,即在阳光下,在灯下,在树阴下,穿衣、着装、冒雨等都要用 in。
例:Don't read in dim light. 切勿在暗淡的灯光下看书。
They are reviewing their lessons in the bright light. 他们在明亮的灯光下复习功课。
They are sitting in the shade of a tree. 他们坐在树阴下乘凉。
a prisoner in irons 带着镣铐的囚犯
He went in the rain to meet me at the station. 他冒雨到车站去接我。
The poor dressed (clothed) in rags in old society. 旧社会穷人们衣衫褴褛。
以及:in the bright sunlight 在明亮的阳光下
a merchant in disguise 乔装的商人
the woman in white (black, red, yellow) 穿着白(黑、红、黄)色衣服的妇女
将来时态 in … 以后
We'll be back in no time. 我们一会儿就回来。
Come and see me in two days' time. 两天后来看我。(从现在开始)
After … (从过去开始)
小处 at 大处 in
例:Li and I arrived at Heishan county safe and sound, all is well. Don't worry.
李和我平安地到达黑山县,一切很好,勿念。
I live in a great city (big city), my sister lives at a small town while my parents live at a village.
有形 with 无形 by,语言、单位、材料 in
例:The workers are paving a road with stone. 工人们正用石子铺路。(有形)
“Taking Tiger Mountain by Strategy”is a good opera. <<智取威虎山>>是—出好戏。(无形)
The product is separated by distillation into gasoline and gas oil. 这种产品是用蒸馏分离出汽油和粗柴油。(表示方式、手段、方法——无形)
I really can't express my idea in English freely in-deed.
我确实不能用英语流利地表达我的思想。(表示某种语言用 in)
I wrote a novel in Russian. 我用俄语写了一本小说。(同上)
The kilometer is the biggest unit of length in the metric system.
公里是米制中最长的长度单位。(表示度、量、衡单位的用 in )
The length is measured in meter, kilometre, and centimetre.
长度是以米、公里、厘米为单位来计算的。(同上)
This board was cast in bronze not in gold. 这个牌匾是铜铸的,不是金铸的。
特征、方面与方式、心情、成语惯用 in
特征或状态:
He has not been in good health for some years. 他几年来身体一直不好。
Many who came in despair went away in hope. 许多人带着绝望情绪而来,却满怀希望而去。
The house was in ruins. 这房屋成了废墟。
The poor girl was in tears. 这个贫苦女孩泪流满面。
Her clothes were in rags. 她的衣服穿破了。
His shoes were in holes. 他的鞋穿出窟窿了。
I only said it in fun. 我说这话只是开玩笑的。
She spoke in grief rather than in anger. 与其说她讲得很气愤,不如说她讲得很伤心。
“介词 at、to 表方向,攻击、位置、善、恶、分”
介词 at 和 to 都可以表示方向; 用 at 表示方向时,侧重于攻击的目标,往往表示恶意;用to 表示方向时,突出运动的位置或动作的对象,侧重表示善意。
试比较下列各句:
1. A.She came at me. 她向我扑过来。
B.She came to me. 她向我走过来。
2.A.Jake ran at John. 杰克向约翰扑过去。
B.Jake ran to John. 杰克朝约翰跑去。
3.A. He rushed at the woman with a sword. 他拿着剑向那妇女扑过去。
B. He rushed to the woman with a sword. 他带着剑向那妇女跑过去。
4.A.He shouted at the old man. 他大声喝斥那老人。
B. He shouted to the old man. 他大声向那老人说。
5.A.I heard her muttering at Xiao Li. 我听见她在抱怨小李。
B.I heard her muttering to Xiao Li. 我听见她在同小李低声说话。
6.A. She talked at you just now. 她刚才还说你坏话呢。
B.She talked to you just now. 她刚才还同你谈话呢.
7.A.She threw a bone at the dog. 她用一块骨头砸狗。
B.She threw a bone to the dog. 她把一块骨头扔给狗吃。
8.A.He presented a pistol at me. 他用手枪对着我。
B.He presented a pistol to me. 他赠送我一支手枪
日子、日期、年月日,星期加上早、午、晚,
收音、农场、值日 on,关于、基础、靠、著论。
着、罢、出售、偷、公、假,故意、支付、相反,准。
特定时日和“一……就”,on 后常接动名词。
年、月、日加早、午、晚,of 之前 on 代 in。
步行、驴、马、玩笑 on,cab,carriage 则用 in。
at 山脚、门口、在当前,速、温、日落、价、核心。
工具、和、同随 with,具有、独立、就、原因。
就……来说宾译主,对、有、方状、表细分。
海、陆、空、车、偶、被 by,单数、人类 know to man。
this、that、tomorrow,yesterday,next、last、one。
接年、月、季、星期、周,介词省略已习惯。
over、under 正上下,above、below 则不然,
若与数量词连用,混合使用亦无关。
beyond 超出、无、不能,against 靠着,对与反。
besides,except 分内外,among 之内 along 沿。
同类比较 except,加 for 异类记心间。
原状 because of, owing to,due to 表语形容词。
Under 后接修、建中,of,from 物、化分。
Before,after 表一点, ago,later 表一段。
before 能接完成时,ago 过去极有限。
since 以来 during 间,since 时态多变换。
与之相比 beside,除了 last but one。
复不定 for、找、价、原,对、给、段、去、为、作、赞。
快到、对、向 towards,工、学、军、城、北、上、南。
but for 否定用虚拟,复合介词待后言。
ing 型由于鉴,除了除外与包合。
之后、关于、在……方面,有关介词须记全。
in 内 to 外表位置,山、水、国界 to 在前。
英语中的介词搭配比较复杂,是初学英语的难点。本文讲时态的使用制成口诀,可以帮助大家更快的掌握介词的使用方法。如大体掌握如上介词用法口诀,就不易出错。后面会有文章对口诀的使用做专门解释。
日子、日期、年月日,星期加上早午晚; 以下皆用 on。
例: on October the first 1949 1949年10月1日
on May the first 5月1日on the first 1号
on the second of January 或 on January the second 1月2日
on a summer evening 在夏天的一个夜晚
on Boxing Day 在节礼日(圣诞节次日) n New Year's Day 在元旦
on my birthday 在我的生日
但 in the Christmas holidays 在圣诞节假期; in the eighteenth century 在十八世纪; in ancient times 在古代; in earlier times 在早期; in modern times 在现代,则用 in,at the present time 现在,at the present day 当今 则用 at。
on winter day 在冬天on Sunday 在星期天on Tuesday morning 星期二早晨
on Saturday afternoon 星期六下午on Friday evening 星期五晚上
但 last night 昨夜;in the evening 在晚上; on time 准时,in time 及时,等则不同。
年月日,加早午晚,of 之前 on 代 in
例:on the morning of 18th 18日早晨on the evening of 4th 4日晚上
On the eve of their departure they gave a farewell banquet and their head gave a farewell speech. 他们在临行前夕举行了一次告别宴会,他们的团长发表了告别讲话。
收音、农场,值日 on
例:Did your supervisor like the story over (or on) the radio last night?
您的导师喜欢昨天从收音机里听到的故事吗?
I heard the news over (or on) the radio. 我从收音机里听到了这一条消息。
talk over the radio 由无线电播音
on TV 从电视里……
hear something on the wireless 在无线电里听到
My brother works on an Army reclamation farm. 我哥哥在一个军垦农场工作。
Who is on duty, today? 今天谁值日?
关于、基础、靠、著论
例: This afternoon we are going to listen to a report on the international situation.
今天下午我们要听关于国际形势的报告。
You are wrong on all these issues. 在这些问题上你的看法都错了。
Theory must be based on practice. 理论必须以实践为基础。
The people in the south live on rice. 南方人主食大米。(靠)
You can't afford luxuries, on an income of 100 yuan a month.
靠月薪100 元的收入,你是买不起奢侈品的。
Her pet dogs were fed on the choicest food. 她用精饲料喂养她心爱的狗。
Keep the kettle on the boil (=boiling). 让水壶的水一直开着。
着、罢、出售、偷、公、假,故意、支付,相反、准
注:口诀中的“着”是指着火,“罢”指罢工,“偷”指偷偷地,“公”指出差、办公事;“假”指休假,“准”指准时。
例:The house next to mine was on fire. 我邻居的房子着火了。
The workers of the railway station were on strike. 铁路工人罢工了。
Grapes and big water melons from Sinkiang are on sale on a large sale.
新疆葡萄和西瓜大量上市了。
Do something on the sly (quiet). 秘密地(暗地里,偷偷地)做某事。
I've come here on business. 我是有公事来的。
They went to Bern on a mission. 他们到伯尔尼去执行一项使命。
They have been away on a long trip. 他们出去做一次长途旅行。
I'll go home on leave next month. 下月我将休假回家。
I went on business to Shanghai. I did not take leave. 我是公出去上海的,不是不告而别。
P1ease come on time. (on schedule). 请准时来。
注:in time 是“及时”的意思。
The train arrived on schedule. 火车准时到达。
特定时间和“一……就”,左右 on 后动名词
例:Gases expand on heating and contract on cooling. 气体加热时膨胀,冷却时收缩。(特定时间)
On entering the room, he found his friends dancing in high spirits.
一进屋,他就发现他的朋友们在愉快地跳舞。
以及 on the left, right 向左向右,on the stair 在台阶上等
主谓一致
一. 语法一致原则
主语和谓语通常要在语法形式上取得一致。即主语是单数形式时,谓语动词也用单数形式,主语是复数形式时,谓语动词也用复数形式。
1. 当and 或both and 连接两个或三个名词作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。
Tom and Mike are good friends . Both Lucy and Lily are students .
2. 不定代词either, neither, each one, the other, another anybody, everything, nothing,no one, nobody,等作主语时,谓语动词用单数形式。
Is anything wrong with your bike ?
3. 由each, each…and , each… every…and , every…作主语时,谓语动词用单数形式。
Each boy and each girl was given a new book .
4. 主语后面接有with,along with ,together with , as well as , no less than ,more than , including , besides, like , except , but 等词或短语时,谓语动词的数由主语的单复数决定。
Mr Green with his wife and his two daughters is coming to Beijing .
5. a number of +名词复数作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。The number of +名词复数作主语时,谓语动词用单数。
A number of trees are cut down . the number of students in our class is 32.
6. a lot of ,lots of, plenty of, a pile of ,piles of , most of后加名词,分数或百分数 +名词,谓语动词的单复数取决于名词,如果名词是不可数名词,则谓语动词用单数形式,如果是可数名词复数,则谓语动词用复数形式。
Lots of people have been there .
7. 由a pair (a kind , a series …)+of +复数名词作主语时,谓语动词用单数,pairs (kinds …)+of+复数名词,谓语动词用复数形式。
A pair of sunglasses is lying on the table .
8. 某些只有复数形式的名词如clothes , trousers , shorts , pants , shoes , gloves …作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。
My shoes were worn out
9. 以S结尾的词本身不表达复数意思,谓语动词用单数news ,maths , physics , politics 等,
No news is good news.
10. the +姓氏名词复数 表示一家人,或…..夫妇,当它作主语时谓语动词用复数形式。
The Blacks enjoy working in China .
11. 非谓语动词作主语谓语动词用单数形式。 Reading is learning . to see is to believe .
12. one of +名词复数,作主语时谓语动词用单数。
One of the women is from America .
二.意义一致原则。
意义一致又叫概念一致,即谓语动词用单数还是复数要看主语所表达的概念。
1. 由and 连接的两个名词作主语,如果是指的同一概念(即and 后面无关词),则谓语动词用单数形式。The teacher and writer is coming to give us a talk next week.
2. 表示金钱、价格、时间、长度等复数名词或词组作主语时,一般被看作一个整体谓语动词用单数。 Three year is a long time .
3. 集体名词如family, team. Crowd, company, class, group, government ,nation, 等如果表示整体概念则谓语动词用单数形式,如果表示集体中的成员,则谓语动词用复数形式。
My family is a small one with three people . All my family enjoy skiing .
4. people , police , cattle 等集合名词作主语时谓语动词用复数形式。
The police are helping a girl find her mother .
5. 表示国家,城市, 人名,报纸杂志,组织机构等专有名词作主语,通常作整体看待,谓语动词要用单数形式。
The New York Times is read by all over the USA.
6. 有些以sh, ese,iss 结尾的表示国家 民族 的形容词与the 连用,指整个民族,表示复数含义,谓语动词用复数。
The Chinese are kind friendly .
7. town, city , country , school , village 等表示总称的镇民时,作主语,谓语动词用单数。
The whole town is talking about it .
8. 算式中加法和乘法可用单数,也可用复数,但减法和除法必须用单数。
What is /are three times five ? Ten minus five is five .
9. one and a half 的后面要接复数名词,作主语时谓语动词用单数。
One and a half cakes is a good meal for the monkey .
10. 主语由many a +名词, more than one +名词, 谓语动词用单数。
More than one worker is playing cards . Many a student has passed the exam .
11. 引号中的词若为整体看待,作主语时,谓语动词用单数。
“bikes” is the plural” of the bike” “ they” is a pronoun .
12. 某些形容词加上the 如old ,young , dead , poor ,rich , sick ,blind ,deaf 等,用来表示一类人,其意义为复数,谓语动词常用复数形式。 The old are taken care of .
13. 当表示一两个的词组做句子主语时,谓语动词的变化如下。
(1) 当a/an+名词单数+or two 做句子的主语时,谓语动词用单数形式。
An apple or two is enough .
(2) one or two +复数名词作主语谓语动词用复数形式。
One or two girls have come here .
14. 两个或两个以上的单数名词用and 连接起来做主语时,谓语动词有以下三种情况。
(1) 当两个并列主语不是同一事物时,谓语动词用复数形式。
The boy and the girl are from Japan .
(2) 当两个名词指的是同一人同一物同一概念,谓语动词用单数形式。
The singer and dance has been invited to the party .
(3) 当这两个词分别被each , every , no , many a 等词修饰时,谓语动词用单数。
Every teacher and every student needs a dictionary .
15. none ,all, most ,,more, some ,any , 等做主语时,要根据这些代词表达的意思再决定谓语动词的单复数,若指不可数名词或可数名词单数谓语动词用单数,若指的是可数名词复数,谓语动词复数。
All of the work has been finished . all of the people have gone .
16. 疑问代词作主语时,谓语动词也有两种情况,主语表示复数意义,谓语动词用复数,主语表示单数,谓语动词用单数。
Who is your brother ? who are league members ?
17. half , the rest 等表示不定数量的名词作主语时,如果所指为复数含义,谓语动词用复数,如果所指为单数含义谓语动词用单数。
I have a large part of the book , the rest is more difficult .
Only ten students attended the class ,because all the rest were off sick .
18. 由what 引导的主语从句时,通常谓语动词用单数,但如果所指内容为复数意义时,谓语动词用复数。
What she said is correct . what she left me are a few old books .
19. 定语从句中的谓语动词由先行词来决定。
Who is the boy that is playing football .
I want to read all the books that were written by luxun .
三. 就近原则。
有时谓语动词的形式与主语并不一致,而是与靠近它的名词一致。
1. 由either…or …, neither….nor …, not only …but also…,not …but …,或or 连接连个并列主语时,谓语动词与较近的主语在数上保持一致。
Not only my parents but also I am looking forward to meeting my uncle .
2. there be …和here be …这两个句式中的动词be 常与最近的主语保持一致。
There is a book and some pens on the desk .
倒装句
英语句子的基本语序是比较固定的,一般主语在前,谓语在后。但有时因为语法结构的要求或由于修辞的要求,往往要改变句子的自然顺序,把一些本应置于主语之后的成分提前,我们称这种语序为倒装语序。倒装语序又分为全部(完全)倒装和部分倒装。
A全部倒装
1. 表示方位的副词Out, up ,down, in ,away置于句首时。
Out rushed the children.
注意;当主语是人称代词时,句子的语序不倒装。
2. 表示方位的介词短语置于句首时。
In front of the school is the hospital.
注意:介词短语在倒装句中要整体前移,不能拆开。
3. 以here ,there 等副词开头的句子里,
Here comes the bus .
注意:以here ,there 等副词开头的句子里,谓语动词常为:be, come, go 等,时态为一般现在时,如果主语是人称代词则不用倒装。
Here they are.常考点:
Here/there +谓语动词+名词主语
Here/ there comes a bus .
There goes the bell.
Here/there we are
B部分倒装如果只把助动词,情态动词,be动词放在主语之前,这种语序称为部分倒装
1. 否定副词never, hardly seldom little,not 等置于句首时。
Hardly could he believe his own eyes.
2. only+状语置于句首时
only in this way can you learn English well.
3.So+助动词/be 动词/情态动词+主语,如 so do I . 我也如此
4.Neither +助动词be 动词/情态动词+主语,如 neither do I . 我也不会
这两个结构常用来说明前面所说的情况也同样适用于后面的人或物,意思是某人/物也是这样。这种结构中的助动词be 动词/情态动词在形式上与前句的谓语保持一致,而且单复数由后面的主语决定,
Lucy is a good student, so is Lily .
这两种结构的不同点是
So+助动词/be 动词/情态动词+主语,依附于肯定句中,表示前边的肯定情况也适用后边的人或情况,意为某人也……相当于I do ,too .
Neither +助动词be 动词/情态动词+主语,依附于否定句,表示前边的否定情况也适合后边的人或情况。意为某人也不……相当于I don’t ,either.
Tom watched TV last night , so did Ann .
Mary didn’t watch TV last night , neither did Jim .
5.not only but also 连接并列句子,前一部分倒装后一部分不倒装。
not only does he learn to speak English but also he learns to write in English .
注意:如果置于句首的not only but also 连接两个并列主语,则句子不用倒装结构
Not only he but also I like football..
6. there be 句型。
there be 句型是表示存在的一个句型,是一个主语在be 动词后面的倒装句。
There is a tree in front of the building .
.
there be
表示某地某时存在某人某物 There be +某人/某物+某地/某时
① There be结构的主语
a, There be结构的there 是引导词,无实义,其主语是be 后的名词或名词短语。且名词或名词短语通常用不确定的限定词,如a ,no , all 等修饰。也不用确定的限定词the ,this ,that ,these ,those 等修饰。
b. There be结构的主语不能是人称代词,专有名词及被物主代词或名次所有格修饰的名词。
误:There is China in the east of the world . there are their books on the desk .
There are they under tree .
c.若要说明被限定的某人某物在某处时,常用某人某物+be +地点 Tom is in the room .
②There be结构的谓语
a, There be结构的谓语是be ,它在人称数上应和后面的主语即名词保持一致,即主语是不可数名词或可数名词单数时用is /was ,主语是复数时用are /were .主语是两个或两个以上的名词时,be的形式采取临近原则,即与离它最近的主语的数保持一致。
There is a picture on the wall . there is an orange and apples in the basket .
b, There be结构的谓语动词有时不用be 而用其它动词,如live , stand , lie, seem 等使语言表达更生动。
Long long ago , there lived a king .
③There be结构的常见时态。
一般现在时态。 There is /are +名词
一般过去时态 There was /were +名词
一般将来时态 There is going to /will be +名词
现在完成时态 There has /have been +名词
④ There be结构可与情态动词连用,表示推测。There must be no one in the room .
⑤There be结构的句型转换。
a , 若对主语提问,无论主语是单数还是复数都用what’s +地点?
There are some flowers in the garden . There is a book on the desk .
What’s in the garden ? What’s on the desk ?
b ,对修饰名词的数词或表示不确定数目的词提问,如果是可数名词用how many +名词复数+are there +其它?如果是不可数名词用how much +不可数名词+is there +其它?
There are some flowers in the garden .----- how many flowers are there in the garden ?
There is a little milk in the glass . ----how much milk is there in the milk ?
There is a cat in the room ---- How many cats are there in the room ?
⑥ 反义疑问句用be not there .
⑦ there be 与have/has 区别
a , There be 与has /have 都当有讲,但have表示所属关系,即持有,拥有,占有,而there be 表示客观存在,不说明所有关系。 He has a pen .
b . 当主语是物或时间名词时,而且表示整体与局部,两者可互换。
The building has 6 floors . there are 6 floors in the building .
A week has seven days . there are seven days in a week .
c,在一般时态是,there 不能与have 连用。
句子的结构类型
句子按其语法结构可分为简单句、并列句和复合句。
一简单句:由一个主语或并列主语和一个谓语或并列谓语构成的句子。
简单句的基本类型:
1. 主语+不及物动词(S+V) his father is cooking .
2.主语+及物动词+宾语(S+V+O) 及物动词后接名词代词动名词和动词不定式作宾语。
He didn’t like the film .
1. 主语+系动词+表语(S+V+P )
系动词:be ,get ,turn ,get ,become , go , feel .look .taste, sound, seem, smell, keep ,stay
表语:名词,代词,形容词。
Your match looks very nice .
2. 主语+及物动词+间接宾语+直接宾语(S+V+INO+DO)
人是间接宾语,物是直接宾语,通常情况下,间接宾语在前,直接宾语在后,直接宾语在前时,常用介词 for, to 引导间接宾语。接to 的动词有give, bring , show , tell lend 接for 的的动词有buy , choose , find , cook , draw , sing ,get , make 等。
He gave me his English book .
当两个并与都是代词时, 一定要把指物的代词放在前面。 Please give it to me .
3. 主语+及物动词+宾语+宾语补足语(S+V+O+OC)
宾语和宾语补足语之间存在着逻辑上的主谓和主表关系,可做宾补的词有名词,形容词, 现在分词,动词不定式,介词短语等。
A接名词作宾补的动词有call , make , think , name . We call him Tom for short .
B. 接形容词作宾补的动词有,keep , make , find , think . I find Chinese very hard .
C. 接动词不定式作宾补。 The boy tells them not to do it .
D. 接现在做宾补的动词有hear, see, watch 等。 In the country ,he can hear the birds singing .
E. 接介词短语作宾补的动词有find ,take , keep .
如何区别宾补和双宾。
在宾语后加be ,成立的是宾补,不成立的是双宾。
F.
二并列句
由并列连词把两个或两个以上的简单句并列在一起而构成的。
其构成为:简单句+并列连词+简单句
1. 表顺承并列关系的连词及并列句。And, both…and, as well as , not only…but also,neither…nor
My father bought me a present ,and I like it very much .
2. 表示转折关系的连词及并列句 but, yet , while , however
Lucy likes red while lily likes white .
3. 表示选择关系的连词及并列句。 Either…or , not …but , or
Study hard , or you’ll fail the exam .
4. 表示因果关系的连词及并列句.for ,so . therefore .(所以)
Kate was ill so she didn’t go to school . I have to study up late ,for I have lots of homework to do .
三复合句:由一个主句和一个或一个以上从句构成的句子。
(一) 状语从句
在复合句中,修饰主句中的动词,形容词,副词等的从句。状语从句由从属连词引导,与主句连接,位于句首时,常用逗号与主句分开,位于句末时,其前一般不用逗号,,状语从句根据其用途 可分为时间,地点,原因,目的,结果,让步,方式,条件等类。
1. 时间状语从句
在复合句中,担任状语成分的从句称为状语从句。时间状语从句说明主句动作发生或进行的时间。状语从句由连词引导,其位置通常可以放在句首或句末。放在句首是,常用逗号与主句分开;放在句末时,从句前面往往不加逗号。
时间状语从句的引导词:when ,as , while , as soon as , before , after ,since, till ,not…until
一)en“当……时”,引导时间状语从句时,从句用于表示主句动作发生的特定时间。
The days get longer when spring comes. = When spring comes, the days get longer.春天到来时,白天变得更长了。
二)fore“在……之前”,引导时间状语从句时,表示主句动作发生在从句动作之前。如:
Close the door before you leave the room.离开房间前关上门。
三)ter“在……之后”,引导时间状语从句时,表示主句的动作发生在从句的动作之后。如I went to school after I finished my breakfast.吃完早饭后我就去上学了。
四)soon as“一……就……”,引导时间状语从句时,表示主句动作紧接着从句动作发生。如:I’ll call you as soon as I get home.我一到家就给你打电话。
五)ntil, till“直到”,引导时间状语从句。当主句谓语动词是延续性动词时,主句常用肯定形式;当主句谓语动词是非延续性动词时,主句要用否定形式,即“not…until/till…”意为“直到……才……”。如:
I’ll wait here until/till the rain stops.我将在这里等着,直到雨停。
You can’t go home until/till you finish your work.直到你完成你的工作,你才能回家。
六)since引导的时间状语从句。
since引导的从句的谓语动词可以是延续性的动词,又可以是瞬时动词。一般情况下,从句谓语动词用一般过去时,而主句的谓语动词用现在完成时。但在It is +时间+since从句的句型中,主句多用一般现在时。例如:
I have been in Beijing since you left. 自从你离开以来,我一直在北京了。
Where have you been since I last saw you? 自上次我和你见面以后,你到哪里去了?
It is four years since my sister lived in Beijing. 我妹妹不在北京住有四年了。
七)by the time引导的时间状语从句。
注意时态的变化:在一般情况下,如果从句的谓语动词用一般过去时,主句的谓语动词用过去完成时;如果从句的谓语动词用一般现在时,主句的谓语动词用将来完成时。例如:
By the time you came back, I had finished this book.到你回来时,我已经写完这本书了。
By the time you come here tomorrow, I will have finished this work. 你明天来这儿的时候,我将已经完成此工作了。
八)each time, every time等引导的时间状语从句。
Each time he came to Harbin, he would call on me. 他每次来哈尔滨,总是来看我。
Whenever that man says“To tell the truth”, I suspect that he's about to tell a lie.每当那个人说“说实在话”的时候,我猜想他就要说谎了。
You grow younger every time I see you. 每次遇到你,见你更年轻了。
九)as long as和so long as引导的时间状语从句。
这两个连词表示“只要“例如:
You can go where you like as long as you get back before dark. 你可以随意到哪里去,只要在天黑以前回来就行。
I will fight against these conditions as long as there is a breath in my body! 只要我一息尚存,我就要反对这种境况。
when, while和as的区别
when引导的从句的谓语动词可以是延续性的动词,可以是瞬时动词。并且when有时表示“就在那时”。例如:When she came in, I stopped eating.她进来时,我停止吃饭。(瞬时动词)
When I lived in the countryside, I used to carry some water for him.当我住在农村时,我常常为他担水。(延续性的动词)
We were about to leave when he came in.我们就要离开,就在那时他进来了。
While引导的从句的谓语动作必须是延续性的,并强调主句和从句的动作同时发生(或者相对应)。并且while有时还可以表示对比。例如:
While my wife was reading the newspaper, I was watching TV. (was reading是延续性的动词,was reading和was watching同时发生) 。
I like playing football while you like playing basketball.我喜欢踢足球,而你喜欢打篮球。(对比)
As表示“一边……一边”,as引导的动作是延续性的动作,一般用于主句和从句动作同时发生;as也可以强调“一先一后。例如:
We always sing as we walk.我们总是边走边唱。(as表示“一边……一边”)
As we were going out, it began to snow.当我们出门时,开始下雪了。(as强调句中两个动作紧接着先后发生,而不强调开始下雪的特定时间)
2.原因状语从句
如果从句表示的是主句的行为元音就构成原因状语从句
A导原因状语从句的连词because, as, since,now that引导。
B、because, as, since和now that的区别:
1、because“因为”,表示直接的原因,语气最强。
1)why提问的句子,必须用because回答。
2)because的从句常放在主句之后。
3)because 不能与so连用。
4)because+ 从句;because of+ 名词短语
I missed the train because I got up late.
He was angry not because we were late but because we made a noise.
-Why didn’t he come yesterday? -Because he was ill.
2、as“因为”,语气较弱,一般放在主句前,中间用逗号隔开,表示的是明显的原因。
As he was not well, I decided to go there without him.
As it was raining hard, we had to be indoors.
3、since/ now that“既然”,一般放在主句前,中间用逗号隔开,表示的是明显的原因或众所周知的事实。
Since/ Now that this method doesn’t work, let]s try another.
Since/ Now that you feel ill, you'd better not go to work.
C、for 引导的并列句与原因状语从句的辨析
并列连词for“因为”,引导的不是从句,而是并列分句,只能放在主句之后,不能放在句首,常用逗号把它和前面的分句隔开。对主句补充说明理由或推断原因。
It rained last night, for the ground is wet.
She must have gone out early, for she had not come for breakfast.
3目的状语从句:
用来说明主句中谓语动词发生的目的的从句叫做目的状语从句。
表示目的状语的从句可以由 that(以便),so that(以便), in order that(为了;以便),Lest(免得;唯恐), for fear that(生怕;以免)等词引导;目的状语从句的谓语常含有may, might, can, could, should, would等情态动词。
学习目的状语从句应注意以下两点:
(1)目的状语从句中常含有can,could,may,might,should等情态动词。 例如:
I got up early so that I could catch the first bus.
(2)在口语中so可以引导目的状语从句。例如:
We'll sit nearer the front so we can hear better. 我们坐的靠前一点,因此,我们听得清楚一点。
1、in order that与in order to的区别:
in order that 从句 in order to 动词原形 ( in order to后面加的那个不叫目的状语从句,叫目的状语) 例如:
He got up early in order to take the first bus.
= He got up early in order that he could take the first bus.(他起床很早是为了赶上第一班 公共汽车)
目的状语从句的一个特点:由于目的都是未来的行为,所以从句中一般用表示未来可能性时态,比如上面句中的could。当然还可以用will,would,can,等 。
2、so that既可引导目的状语从句,也可以引导结果状语从句。
1)其引导结果状语从句时,so that翻译为“以至于...”,经常可以和so/such...that...转换,且从句只能放在主句之后。如:He got up late so that he was late for school. = He got up so late that he was late for school.
2)其引导目的状语从句时,从句只能放在主句之后,此时可以和in order that换用。如:He got up early so that he could take the first bus. = He got up early in order that he could take the first bus.
如何区别目的状语从句中的so that与结果状语从句中的so that的用法,这是我们需要注意的。目的状语从句的so that是连着的,结果状语从句是分开的,即so…that. so that是目的状语从句,是为了什么什么,有目的的含义。而so…that是结果状语从句,是“如此怎么怎么样结果是什么”
4.结果状语从句:
在句中作结果状语的从句称为结果状语从句,结果状语从句一般置于句尾。常用来引导结果状语从句的词或短语有:that , so, so that ,so ```that ```等
1、 so that与so···that···引导的结果状语从句
①、 so that引导的结果状语从句
It was dark,so that we could see nothing in front of us.
天很黑,我们看不见前面的任何东西。
②、 so···that···引导的结果状语从句
so···that···引导的结果状语状语从句可以构成如下结构
so+ 形容词或副词
so+ many/few(+可数名词复数)
so+ much/little(+不可数名词) +(that)+从句
so+ 形容词+a/an+可数名词复数
Kathy is so lovely that we all like to play with her. 凯西很可爱,我们都愿和她玩。 2、 such···that···引导的结果状语从句
such···that···引导结果状语从句,可以构成如下结构:
such| + a/an +形容词+可数名词复数
such+ 形容词+可数名词复数 +(that)+从句
such+ 形容词+不可数名词
Kathy is such lovely girl that we all like to play with her. 凯西很可爱,我们都愿和她玩。 特别提示!:
为了强调形容词或副词,so/such···that···引导的结果状语从句,可把so/such部分置于句首,主语用倒装语序。 So excited was he that he could not fall into sleep. 他太激动不能入睡。
3.that引导的结果状语从句 What have we done that you should be so angry with us? 我们做了什么使你这么生气?
4.So that,so,that引导的结构状语从句和目的状语从句的区别:
1根据上下文意思理解;
2从结构形式上进行判别:
A.从句之前有逗号(或停顿),为结果状语从句;否则为目的状语从句。
Miller slammed the door, so(that)he awakened his sister. (结果)
米勒砰地关上门,结果把他妹妹惊醒了。
Miller slammed the door so(that)his sister would know he was home. (目的)
米勒砰地关上门,以便使他妹妹知道他在家。
B.有时由so that引导的结果状语从句之前并没有逗号,这时就要看:从句中表达的是意图还是可能性,有can, may, might, could, should, will, would等情态动词,则多为目的状语从句;如果表达的是事实或客观事实,没有上述情态动词,则多为结果状语从句。
He got up early so that he caught the first bus. (结果)
他早早地起了床,结果赶上了首班公共汽车。
He got up early so that he might catch the first bus. (目的)
早早地起了床以便赶上首班公共汽车。
C.目的状语从句可以移到句首,而结果状语从句只能位于主句之后。
例如: We turned the radio up so that everyone could hear the announcement. (结果)我们开大收音机音量,结果大家都能听到通知。
So that everyone could hear the announcement, we turned up the radio. (目的)
为了大家都能听到通知,我们开大了收音机音量。
D.能用too···to或enough to结构代替so that从句,便是结果状语从句;能用in order to代替so that,或so that从句转换为in order to或so as to+动词原形或不定式短语,则为目的状语从句。
He walks fast so that we can’t catch up with him. (结果)
(这句可为:He walks too far for us to catch up with.)他走得很快,我们赶不上他。
I am saving money so that I can buy a house. (目的)
(这句可为: I am saving money in order to/so as to buy a house.)
我在省钱以便买一间房子。
5.让步状语从句
是状语从句中的一种,其本身也是状语从句。一般翻译为“尽管……”或“即使……”,就是我们日常生活中用的“退一步说……”的感觉。 使用的连词 引导让步状语从句的连词主要有以下这些:though, although,while, as; even if, even though; whether...or...; no matter+疑问词,疑问词-ever, regardless of+名词/名词短语/名词从句,despite,in spite of。切记although不可与but连用 用法
(1)though, although表示“虽然,纵然”之意。 这两个连词意思大致相同,在一般情况下可以互换使用。在口语中,though较常使用,although比though正式,二者都可与yet, still或never,the less连用,但不能与but连用。
Although/Though he was exhausted, (still) he kept on working.
虽然他已经精疲力竭了,但仍然继续工作。
(2)as, though表示“虽然……但是”,“纵使……”之意。 as引导的让步状语从句必须以部分倒装的形式出现,被倒装的部分可以是表语、状语或动词原形,though也可用于这样的结构中,但although不可以这样用。
Object as you may, I’ll go.(=Though/Although you may object, I’ll go.)
纵使你反对,我也要去。
(3)even if, even though 表示“即使……”,“纵使……”之意,含有一种假设。 这两个复合连词的意思基本相同。它们常互换使用,但意义有细微差别。even if引导的让步从句含有强烈的假定性,可用来表示与事实相反的假设,但不能用来描述已经发生的事实。而even though引导让步状语从句时,是以从句的内容为先决条件的,即说话人肯定了从句的事实,表示已经发生了的事。
We’ll make a trip even if/though the weather is bad.
即使天气不好,我们也要作一次旅行。
(4)whether...or...表示“不论是否……”,“不管是……还是……”之意。 由这一个复合连词引导的让步状语从句旨在说明正反两方面的可能性都不会影响主句的意向或结果。
You'll have to attend the ceremony whether you're free or busy.
不管你忙不忙,都要参加这个典礼。
Whether you believe it or not, it's true.无论你是否相信,这都是真的。
(5)“no matter+疑问词”或“疑问词-ever”的含义为“……都……;不管……都……” 它们引导的让步状语从句可以互换。
No matter what happened, he would not mind. (=Whatever happened, he would not mind.)无论发生了什么,他都不会介意的。
No matter who you are, you must keep the law.(=Whoever you are, you must keep the law.不管你是谁,你都要遵纪守法。
但“no matter+疑问词”结构只能引导让步状语从句,而“疑问词-ever”还可以引导名词性从句。 Whatever (=No matter what) you say, I won’t believe you. (Whatever 引导让步状语从句)无论你说什么,我都不会相信你。
I'll eat whatever (≠no matter what) you give me. (whatever引导宾语从句)
你给我吃什么,我就吃什么。
Whoever comes will be welcome. (Whoever 引导主语从句) 不管谁来都受到欢迎。 此外,有时while也可以引导让步状语从句,但一般要位于句首。
While I like the colour, I don't like the shape.我虽然喜欢那颜色,但不喜欢那形状。 综上所述,我们可以看出,学习让步状语从句的关键是关联词的选用;其次,要注意的是由as引导的让步状语从句要用倒装语序。 让步状语从句表示:虽然,尽管,即使等概念,由although, though(尽管,即使), however(无论怎样), whatever(无论什么), whoever(无论谁), whomever(无论谁), whichever(无论哪个), whenever(无论何时), wherever(无论哪里), whether(是否), no matter (who, what, where, when, etc) (无论……), even if(即使), even though(即使)等词引导。
We won’t be discouraged even if(=even though) we fail ten times.
我们就是失败十次也不泄气。
It was an exciting game, though / although no goals were scored.
那是一场精彩的球赛,尽管一个球都没进。(though, although不能与 but连用) Whether you believe it or not, it’s true.不管你信不信,这是真的。
However (=No matter how) expensive it may be, I’ll take it.
无论它有多贵,我也要买下它。
Don’t let them in, whoever(=no matter who) they are.不管他们是谁,别让他们进来。 No matter what I say or how I say it, he always thinks I’m wrong.
无论我说什么或怎么说,他总认为是我错。 特别提醒
1.no matter what(who,which,when,etc.)
与whatever(whoever,whichever,whenever,etc.)的区别:
当引导让步状语从句时,两者相同,可以互换,但当引导名词性从句(主语从句,宾语从句,表语从句和同位语从句)时则只能用whatever(whoever,whichever,whenever,etc)。如上面最后两个例句可改为:
However pure the water looks,I do not want to drink it.
I want to marry the man I love, no matter who he may be.
下面句子不能用no matter结构(no matter不能引导名词性从句):
Whoever comes back first is supposed to win the prize.(主语从句)
I am ready to do whatever you want me to .(宾语从句)
Whatever you did, I will accept.为让步状语从句.
I will accept whatever you did.为宾语从句.
2. as 引导让步状语从句的用法 引导让步状语从句时,as意为“虽然,尽管”,通常从句要倒装,倒装的方法是将从句的表语或状语放在as之前,而用though引导让步状语从句时句字则不必倒装(口语中也可倒装)。
Heavily as it was raining outside, they started out very early.
Young as he is, he knows a lot=Though he is young 或Young though he is, he….
他虽然年轻,但懂得很多。(though 也有这种用法,可以替换as,但although没有这种用法) though还可以用作副词,放在句末。
It was hard work;; I enjoyed it, though=It was hard work, but I enjoyed it.
那工作很苦,但是我喜欢干。
3.用though/although, as 引导让步状语从句时,句中不能用but表示转折语气。 不能说:Though he looks weak, but he is healthy. 而要说:Though he looks weak, he is healthy. 或者说:He looks weak, but he is healthy. 我自己认为让步就是存在一定条件下的说法.
4 . however 用作副词,不可连接句子。 但可置于第二句的句首、句末或句中。要特别注意标点的使用。 eg: Alice is a good student.However, she has one shortcoming. He has not arrived. He may, however, come later. The composition is all right. There is room for improvement, however.
2. 5. 除以上提到的从句连词外,表示让步的介词短语有despite, in spite of, 后接名词。. Despite all these facts, we cannot ignore the advantages of learning through internet.结果状语从句。
6.条件状语从句
在句子中做条件状语的从句称为条件状语从句。可置于句首、句尾,有时还可置于主语和谓语之间。引导条件状语从句的连接词有:if ,unless,as/so long as等
1.if引导的条件状语从句 表示在某种条件下某事很可能发生。
If we pay much attention to the earth, we'll have a better world.
如果我们多关爱地球,就会拥有一个更美好的世界
If it rains tomorrow, what shall we do? 如果明天下雨,我们怎么办?
注意:if还可以引导虚拟条件句,表示不可实现的条件,从句中多用一般过去时或过去完成时。 What would happen if there were no water ? 如果没有水会怎样?
2.unless引导的条件状语从句 unless的意思是如果不,除非。可与if...not互换。
You will fail in English unless you work hard. 你英语考试会不及格的,除非你更加努力。
3.as /so long as引导的条件状语从句 as /so long as意思是“只要”
So long as you're happy,i will be happy. 只要你高兴,我就高兴。
4.once引导的条件状语从句 once引导的条件状语从句,意为“一旦...,就”,从句可置于主句前或后
Once you begin,never stop. 一旦开始,就绝不要停止
Maths is easy to learn once you understand the rules. 一旦你理解了规则,数学就不难学了。
提示:在条件状语从句中,用一般现在时代替一般将来时,用一般过去时代替过去将来时。 If the weather is bad next week, we'll put off the climbing. 如果下周天气不好,我们将推迟爬山。 Father told me if I worked hard he would buy me a gift. 爸爸告诉我,如果我努力学习,他会给我买一份礼物。
注意 :
学习" if " 引导的条件状语从句的用法,现在总结一下:
一、 if 条件句不一般,几个要点记心间;
条件句,放在前,逗号要放句中间。
条件句表可能,主句多用将来时;
条件句表事实,主句常用现在时。
在 if 引导的条件状语从句中,如果从句谈论的是一个有可能发生的事实及其产生的相关的结果,主句用一般将来时态,从句用一般现在时态。如:
We can walk there if we can't find a bus .
If it rains tomorrow ,we will not go to the zoo.
What will you do if you find a panda in danger.
如果 if 条件句谈论的是重复发生和预示要发生的情景和事件,则主从句大多用一般现在时态。如:
If bears are in danger ,they attack people.
在 if 引导的条件状语从句中,if 和条件句位置灵活,可直接放在主句后面,若 if 条件句放句首, 从句后面要加逗号,和主句隔开。还要注意前后时态一致原则
二、if引导的条件状语从句
(1)“if从句+祈使句”的句子。其实,if作为一个连词,主句也可以是其他形式的句子。 例如:If you want to go, please let me know. If the green light isn’t on, wait for a minute.
(2)“祈使句 + and (or)+ 陈述句” 在意思上相当于一个带有条件状语从句的复合句。 注意:
A. “祈使句 + and + 陈述句”可以转化为if引导的肯定条件状语从句,而且主语是第二人称。
B. “祈使句 + or + 陈述句”可以转化为if引导的否定条件状语从句,而且主语是第二人称。
Study hard and you will pass the exam. =If you study hard, you will pass the exam. Hurry up, or you’ll be late. =If you don’t hurry up, you’ll be late. 三、if从句与主句具有以下特点:
1.If从句中用一般现在时,表示未来的一种条件,从句中可以加时间状语。
If you can’t come tomorrow, we can hold the party a little later.
明天你如果不能来,我们可迟一点举行宴会。
If it doesn’t rain tomorrow, we’ll go to the Great Wall. 明天如果不下雨,我们就去长城。
2.当if表示未来的条件时,主句中用一般将来时,从句用一般现在时,即“主将从现”。表示如果某种条件存在,就有可能/不可能发生什么事情。 E
If you don’t get up early, you will be late for school.你如果不早点起床,上学就会迟到。
If I play games on it, it will go wrong. 如果我用它玩游戏,它就会坏掉。
3.if从句可放在主句前或主句后,从句置于主句前时,须用逗号与主句隔开,反之则不用逗号。 .If it’s fine tomorrow, we can go out. 如果明天天气好,我们就能出去。
She will be happy if she joins the party. 如果她参加聚会她会很开心的。
I’ll ask the teacher for help if I don’t understand. 如果我不懂我会求助老师的。
三.注意if引导的条件状语从句和宾语从句的区别
if可以用来引导宾语从句也可以用来引导条件状语从句,主要是要弄清if引导从句的时态。if在引导宾语从句时,意为“是否”。要根据实际情况来确定时态,而if在引导条件状语从句时意为“如果,假设”,要用一般时代替将来时,即“主将从现”。
.I want to know if he will come here tomorrow.我想知道他明天是否到这儿来。 (if在上句引导的是宾语从句,从句中有很明显的表将来的时间状语tomorrow,所以if从句要用一般将来时。)
If it rains tomorrow, we’ll put off the sports meeting.如果明天下雨,我们就推迟运动会。 (if在上句引导的是条件状语从句,尽管从句中也有表将来时的时间状语tomorrow,从理论上讲也应该用一般将来时,但是在if引导的条件状语从句中要用一般现在时代替一般将来时,故从句谓语用rains而不用will rain. )
(二)宾语从句
在复合句中做及物动词介词或某些形容词宾语的句子。
I often think about how to improve my English . We all know she is a singer.
1. 宾语从句的连接词。
(1)当宾语从句是陈述句时,用that引导。That通常情况下可以省略。并非所有动词后面后面都可接that,常接that 引导的宾语从句的谓语动词:believe, expect, explain, feel, hope, hear, imagine, prefer, promise , report , say, tell, see, think, understand ,warm, with等
She is a good teacher . the teacher told us . The teacher told us that she is a good girl.
注意:引导词that 用于下列情况时不可省略。
A 当宾语从句的主语是that 时, he says that that is a useful book .
B 当宾语从句中含有主从复合句时,I’m afraid that if you’re lost it , you must pay for it .
C 当两个或多个宾语从句由并列连词连接时,除第一个从句中的that 可以省略外,其余从句中的that都不可以省略。
He said (that) the film was very interesting and that he enjoyed seeing it very much .
(2)含疑问语气的句子构成宾语从句时用whether 或if 连接。whether 或if可以互相转换。
Are you from Japan ? he asked me . He asked me if /whether I was from Japan .
注意:whether 或if在下列情况下,不能转换,只用whether 不用if。
A 当句中有or not 时, I don’t know whether he will come or not .
B. 从句用作介词宾语时。 I’m interested in whether he joined the army .
C. 用在不定式前。 I didn’t know whether to eat this kind of food is bad for us .
D. 做discuss, consider, decide 的宾语时,
They are discussing whether they will go to Beijing tomorrow .
E引导主语,表语或同位语从句时,
Success depends on whether we work hard .
whether the games will be held in our school is not known yet .
(3)当宾语从句是特殊疑问句时,连接词就用原来的疑问词,但一定要注意用陈述语气。
When did he leave for Japan ? could you tell me ? could you tell me when he left for Japan . what is the matter本身就是陈述语序, what”s the matter 或 what was the matter,表示“怎么啦”,语序相对固定。, 宾语从句里要采用陈述语序.
2.宾语从句的语序。
无论主句是陈述句还是疑问句,宾语从句都必须使用陈述语序,即“主句+连词+宾语从句(主语+谓语+……)”句式。根据连接词在从句中所担任的不同成分,可分为以下四种:
1)连接词+谓语。连接词在从句中作主语。常见的连接词有: who,what,which等。如:
Could you tell me who knows the answer,please?你能告诉我谁知道答案吗?
The small children don't know what is in their stockings.这些小孩子不知道袜子里有什么东西?
2)连接词+名词+谓语。连接词在从句中作主语的定语。常见的连接词有:whose,what,which,how many,how much等。如:
He asked whose handwriting was the best in our class.他问我们班上谁的书法最好。
The teacher asked us how many people there were in the room.老师问我们房间里有多少人。
3)连接词+主语+谓语。连接词在从句中作宾语、状语或表语。常见的连接词有:who(m),what,which,how many,how much, when,why,how,where,if /whether(在句中不充当任何成分)等。如:
He hasn't decided if he'll go on a trip to Wuxi.他还没决定是否去无锡旅行。
Could you tell me what I should do with the money ?你能告诉我我如何处理这笔钱吗?
4)连接词+名词+主语+谓语。连接词在从句中作宾语或表语的定语。常见的连接词有:what,which,how many,how much,how等。如:
Do you know which class he is in ?你知道他在哪个班吗?
She asked me if I knew whose pen it was.她问我是否知道这是谁的钢笔。
3.宾语从句的时态
由主句时态确定从句时态。
(1) 如果主句是现在的某种时态,(包括一般现在时,现在进行时,现在完成时)那么宾语从句的时态根据实际情况而定。
I remember he gave me a book yesterday he has told me that he’ll leave for New York tomorrow .
(2) 如果主句是过去的某种时态(包括一般过去时,过去进行时)那么宾语从句一定要用过去的某种时态。(包括一般过去时,过去进行时,过去将来时,过去完成时)
He told me that he would take part in the high jump .
(3)如果宾语从句表示的是客观事实或真理,自然现象,名言警句,即使主句是过去时,从句也用一般现在时态。
He told me that the earth is round .
(4)以could ,would 开头的句子,要看成一般现在时,不可看成一般过去式。
Could you tell me how I can get there ?
5. 宾语从句的符号:由主句确定,主句是陈述句用句号,是疑问句用问号。
Do you know where he comes from ? .I don’t know when he will come back .
6. 宾语从句的人称变化。根据句子意思变换人称。
Are you from Japan ? he asked me .
He asked me if /whether I was from Japan .
7. 否定转移。在主从复合句中,当主句的主语为第一人称,谓语动词是believe , suppose, think, expect,guess,imagine,等时,要将从句的否定词转移到主句当中,即主句的谓语动词用否定式,而从句的谓语动词用肯定形式。I don’t think he will come with me .
A否定前移的宾语从句变反意疑问句时,疑问部分的主语谓语与从句一致,并且用肯定形式。
I don’t believe he tells lies , does he ?
B 如果主句主语是第二三人称他后面的宾语从句的否定词通常不前移,反意疑问句的主语谓语由主句确定。He thinks that his brother can’t arrive on time , doesn’t he ?
8. 宾语从句的简化。
(1)当宾语从句的主语和从句的主语相同,且主句的谓语动词是hope , wish, decide , agree, choose ,等时,从句可简化为不定式结构。
I hope that I can receive your email .-----I hope to receive your email .
(2) 当宾语从句的主语和从句的主语相同,且主句的谓语动词是know,remember ,forget , learn 等时,从句可简化为 疑问词+不定式 结构,当主句谓语动词是tell, ask. Show, teach 等动词,且后带双宾语,从句主语和简介宾语一致时,宾语从句可简化为:疑问词+不定式结构。
She has forgotten how she can open the window .
She has forgotten how to get to open the window .
She doesn’t know what she should do next .-----she doesn’t know what to do next .
(3)动词seem后的宾语从句可用不定式(短语)来简化,但句型要有适当变化。一般的,通常将宾语从句的主语作为简化的句子主语,seem(适当时态形式)做谓语。
It seems that football is very interesting .------football seems to be very interesting .
(4)当主句的谓语动词是order(命令),require(需要)等时,如果主句和从句的主语不一致,宾语从句可简化为“名词(代词)+不定式”结构。例如:
The headmaster ordered that we should start at once. → The headmaster ordered us to start at once.
(5)某些动词后的宾语从句,可以用介词加动名词(短语)等其他形式简化。例如:
He insisted that he should go with us. →He insisted on going with us.
The poor boy doesn’t know when and where he was born.
→The poor boy doesn’t know the time and the place of his birth.
(6)某些动词后面的宾语从句可转化为“宾语+V-ing形式(作宾语补足语)”结构。例如:
Liu Ping found that there was a wallet lying on the ground.
→ Liu Ping found a wallet lying on the ground.
除上述方法外,还有一些特殊句式的转化。例如:
I found that it was difficult to learn English well. →I found it difficult to learn English well.
Soon we found that the ground was covered with thick snow. →Soon we found the ground covered with thick snow.
They found that the box was very heavy. →They found the box very heavy.
(1) 宾语从句可转化为名词或名词短语。
I don’t believe what Tom said .--------I don’t believe Tom’s words .
8. 宾语从句中复杂的特殊问句。
当主句的谓语动词是say, imagine , think , believe , guess ,suppose , expect 等词时,要将引导宾语从句的特殊疑问词移到主句的最前面。
What do you think we should do to improve our environment ?
注意:
A if 的不同用法:
If有两个意思,当是否讲时,引导宾语从句,从句的时态由事实决定,做如果假如讲时,引导条件壮语从句,此时若主语为将来时或祈使句时,从句用一般现在时,
I don’t know if she will come ,if he comes ,I will tell you .
B when 引导时间状语从句和宾语从句。
1)含有when 引导的时间状语从句的复合句中,若主句是一般将来时态,从句应用一般现在时。When 引导其他时态的时间状语从句时,从句时态应与主句时态保持一致
2)when 引导的宾语从句,首先要保证从句的陈述语气,然后再根据何足惧的是太确定从句时态,使其基本与主句内容保持一致。
I don’t know when my father will come back ,but I’ll tell you when he comes back .
(三)定语从句
1.概述:在复合句中修饰某一名词和代词的从句叫定语从句。被修饰的名词和代词叫先行词,通常位于定语从句之前。引导定于从句的是关系代词that , which , who(whom,whose )和关系副词when, where, why .关系代词和关系副词位于先行词和定语从句之间,它即起连接作用,又充当从句的一个成分,含定语从句的的复合句基本结构为:先行词+关系词+定语从句。
2.种类:定语从句分限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句,限制性定语从句是句子不可缺少的组成部分,如果没有从句先行词的意义就不明确或不完整,主句也不完整。非限制性定语从句是主句先行词的补充说明,没有从句不影响主句意思的明确和完整,这种从句用逗号与主句分开,引导非限制性定语从句的关系代词用 which ,who ,不用that。而限制性定语从句的引导词是who , whom ,whose , that ,which , where, when, why 等。我们这里要讲的是限制性定语从句。
3. 引导词
(1)who引导的定语从句:修饰表示人的先行词,在从句中作主语或宾语,作动词宾语时用whom,而且常被省略,在口语中常用who代替whom。
This is the English teacher who teaches my son . the man who/whom I saw just now is Mr Hu.
(2) which 引导的定语从句:修饰表示事物的先行词,在句中充当主语宾语表语。
He is reading a book which is about war . he is reading a book which he bought from London .
注意:which与介词搭配使用,介词可放在which之前,若是固定词组一般不可拆开。
The house in which Lu Xun once lived is now is Lu Xun Museum .
This is the magazine which you are looking for .
(3)that 引导的定语从句:一般情况下,that可以指人或物,可以代替who, whom ,which 在句子中做主语或谓语动词的宾语。但不能作介词的宾语。当先行词
Is that doctor that /who you talked about yesterday .
The letter that /which I received yesterday from my school .
(4 )whose引导的定语从句:whose是who和which的所有格译作某个(些)人或物的……,它指代的先行词既可以是人也可以是物。修饰先行词的同时在句中作定语。
This is the little girl whose parents were killed in the great earthquake .
We lived in a house whose windows open to the south .
注意:由于whose具有who和which的所有格的双重功能,所以在指人时,可以用of whom代替whose 指物时可以用of which 来代替whose .
This kind of book is for children whose native language is Chinese .(the native language of whom .)
Mr Brown has written a novel whose name I’ve completely forgotten .(the name of which )
(5) when 引导的定语从句:when表时间,在定语从句中做时间状语。
I still remember the year when you graduated from No.8 Middle School .
(6) why 引导的定语从句:why 表示原因,在定语从句中做原因状语,其先行词只有表示原因的reason 一词。We don’t know the reason why he was late for school .
(7)where 引导的定语从句: where表示地点,在定语从句中作地点状语。
This is the factory where father works .
3.关系代词的用法:
A 下列情况只能用that不能用who ,which .
(1) 先行词被序数词和形容词最高级所修饰时。 He was the first man that passed the exam.
(2) 当先行词是指物的all , any , much , little, everything ,something , nothing ,none, the one 时。
Is there anything that you don’t interested ?
(3) 当先行词被以下词修饰时,the only, the very. The same , the last, little , few , much, all, so, any , no 等. He is the only person that saw the accident .
(4) 先行词同时含有人和物时。I can remember the person and some pictures that I saw in the room
(5) 以who和which引导的特殊问句。 Who is the girl that is crying ?
(6) 主句是there be 结构, 修饰主语是物从句用that。
There is a book on the desk belongs to him . There is little work that is fit for you
(7)当先行词作主句的表语时。
.China is not the country that used to.中国不再是过去那样的国家。
(8)以the way ,distance ,direction 为先行词的限制性定语从句通常由in which
或That引导,通常可以省略如: The way (that/in which) he answered the questions was surprising. 他回答这些问题的方式令人惊奇。
I don’t like the way (that/in which) you laugh at her. 我不喜欢你嘲笑她的样子
B 关系词只能用which的。
(1)先行词为that,those表示物时,what’s that which is under the desk ?
(2) 关系代词前有介词时。 This is the room in which he lives .
----this is the room that he lives in
(3) 引导非限制性定语从句。 Tom came back , which made us happy .
(4)当主句中的主语被that修饰时。 That dog which I found in the street belongs to Mary.
C 关系代词只能用who不用that
(1) 当先行词为those ,he ,she , any 等代词表示人时,
He who doesn’t reach the Great Wall is not a true man .
(2)在there be 句型中,先行词指人,关系词用who
There is an old man who wants to see you.
There are many young men who are against him.
• 修饰人时关系代词that 和who, whom的区分。
• 当主句中的主语是who时,只能用that。
• eg. Who is the girl that is standing over there?
• 在非限制性定语从句中以及介词后面时只能用who 或者whom。
• eg. I have a son, who is really lovely and interesting.
• There are 40 students in the class, most of whom are boys.
• 关系代词whose既能修饰人,也能修饰物,在定语从句中充当定语,修饰先行词。
• eg. She is the girl whose English sounds very beautiful.
• Mary has a very good dog, whose hair turns out white and black.
• D关系副词when, where和关系代词that, which的区分
• 同样是修饰一个地点,有时使用where,有时使用that/which;
• 同样是修饰一个时间,有时使用when, 有时使用that/which
• 主要看: 从句意思是否完整;完整的话需用关系副词,若意思不完整则需加关系代词充当某个成分。二是定语从句中的谓语动词是否是一个及物动词。当从句中的谓语动词是不及物动词时
• ,1. 不及物动词后无介词时,先行词在从句中充当状语,用when(时间)或where(地点)
• .2. 及物动词后有介词时,先行词在从句中充当宾语,用whom,that,who(指人)或that,which(指物)或省略.及物动词后面无宾语,就必须要求用关系代词;而不及物动词则要求用关系副词。
• 请比较以下句子:
• This is the park that we visited last year.(从句意思不完整需要加宾语)
• This is the park where we held a birthday party.(从句完整,只需加上特定的关系副词)
• That’s the date that she won’t forget for ever.
• That’s the date when we went to the college.
• I like the time that we had together.
• I like the time when we lived together.
• She won’t forget the days that she spent on the island.
• She won’t forget the days when they stayed together.
• 1. Is this the room _ that ___ you cleaned last time?
• 2. Is this the room __where__ we lived before?
• 3. This is the garden __where__ they stayed for a night.
• 4. This is the garden _that___ they visited last time.
• 5. Tom has forgotten the day when__when__ he left his home.
• 6. Tom has forgotten the day __that__ I told him last day.
• 7. She still remembers the year _when___ she found her first job.
• 8. She still remembers the year __that__ she spent in Jining.
• E关系副词when, where, why 和介词+which之间的关系。关系副词when, where, why可以用适当的介词+which来替代。如:when=in/on/at…+which, where=in/on/at…+which, why=for+which介词的位置非常灵活,有时放在关系代词之前,有时放在动词之后。
• eg. 1. I won’t forget the date when( on which) I was born.
• 2. This is the room where (in which) I lived. = This is the room which I lived in.
• 3. I don’t know the reason why (for which) he haven’t come today.
• 4. Tom still remembers the days when (in which) they lived in Tianjin.
. 限制性和非限制性定语从句
• 1) 定语从句有限制性和非限制性两种。限制性定语从句是先行词不可缺少的部分,去掉它主句意思往往不明确;非限制性定语从句是先行词的附加说明,去掉了也不会影响主句的意思,它与主句之间通常用逗号分开。例如:
• This is the house which we bought last month. 这是我们上个月买的那幢房子。(限制性)
• The house, which we bought last month, is very nice.这幢房子很漂亮,是我们上个月买的。(非限制性)
• 2) 当先行词是专有名词或物主代词和指示代词所修饰时,其后的定语从句通常是非限制性的。例如:
• Charles Smith, who was my former teacher, retired last year. 查理?史密斯去年退休了,他曾经是我的老师。
• My house, which I bought last year, has got a lovely garden. 我去年买的的那幢房子带着个漂亮的花园。
• This novel, which I have read three times, is very touching. 这本小说很动人,我已经读了三遍。
• 3) 非限制性定语从句还能将整个主句作为先行词, 对其进行修饰, 这时从句谓语动词要用第三人称单数。例如:
• He seems not to have grasped what I meant, which greatly upsets me. 他似乎没抓住我的意思,这使我心烦。
• Liquid water changes to vapor, which is called evaporation. 液态水变为蒸汽,这就叫做蒸发。
• 说明:关系代词that和关系副词why不能引导非限制性定语从句。非限定性定语从句 由 as, which 引导
• 由as, which 引导的非限定性定语从句,as和which可代整个主句,相当于and this或and that。As一般放在句首,which在句中。例如:
• As we know, smoking is harmful to one's health. 如我们所知,吸烟有害健康。
• The sun heats the earth, which is very important to us. 太阳使地球暖起来,这对我们人类很重要。
• 典型例题
• 1Alice received an invitation from her boss, ___came as a surprise.
• A. it B. that C. which D. he
• 答案C. 此为非限定性从句,不能用 that修饰,而用which.,it 和he 都使后句成为句子,两个独立的句子不能单以逗号连接。况且选he句意不通。
• 2The weather turned out to be very good, ___ was more than we could expect. A. what B. which C. that D. it
• 答案B。which可代替句子,用于非限定性定语从句,而what不可。That 不能用于非限定性定语从句,it不为连词,使由逗号连接的两个句子并在一起在英语语法上行不通。
• 3)It rained hard yesterday, ____ prevented me from going to the park..
• A. that B. which C. as D. it
• 答案B. as 和which在引导非限制性定语从句时,这两个关系代词都指主句所表达的整个意思,且在定语从句中都可以作主语和宾语。但不同之处主要有两点:
• (1)as 引导的定语从句可置于句首,而which不可。 (2) as 代表前面的整个主句并在从句中作主语时,从句中的谓语必须是系动词;若为行为动词,则从句中的关系代词只能用which.。在本题中,prevent由于是行为动词,所以正确选项应为B。
• as 的用法
• 例1. the same„as;such„as 中的as 是一种固定结构, 和„„一样„„。例如:
• I have got into the same trouble as he (has). 我碰到了跟他一样的麻烦。
• 例2. as可引导非限制性从句,常带有'正如'。例如:
• As we know, smoking is harmful to one's health. 如我们所知,吸烟有害健康。
• As is known, smoking is harmful to one's health. As是关系代词。例1中的as作know的宾语;例2中,它充当从句的主语,谓语动词know要用被动式。
•
做题思路
定语从句:应放于名词或代词之后,且从句中缺少句子成分
从句中少主语,从which, that, who, as中选择
从句中少宾语,从which, that, who, whom, as中选择
从句中少状语,从where, when, why中选择(可换为介词+which)
从句中少定语,从whose, of which中选择
引导词
先行词
成分
关
系
代
词
who
人
主,宾
whom
人
宾(可省)
which
物
主,宾(可省)
that
人或物
主,宾(可省)
whose
(=of whom/which)
人或物
定
关
系
副
词
where
(=介词+which)
地点词
状
when
(=介词+ which)
时间词
状
why (= for which)
reason
状
D. 定语从句引导词的省略与保留。
1)通常情况下引导词在定语从句中作宾语时可省略,作主语时不可省略。
The cartoons (that/which )I like have lots of jokes . 做宾语
I’d love to have a teacher who was a cartoonist . 做主语
2)在下列情况下关系代词虽做宾语,但不可省略。
在介词+whom/which 结构中,whom which 不能省略。
That is the headteacher with whom my father was talking just now .
Do you know any shops nearly in which I can buy flowers .
4. 对定语从句提问一般用which。
He is reading a book which is about war which book is he reading ?
1. 定语从句的主谓关系。
当引导词在句中作主语时,从句的谓语动词的数取决于先行词的数。
I have a camera which has got his name on it . these are the films which have been shown this year .
1)在定语从句中one of +the +复数名词+ who/which /that 引导的定语从句中,从句的谓语动词用复数,但是在the only one of +复数名词+ who/which /that 引导的定语从句中,先行词是one,从句的谓语动词要用单数。
Tom is one of the boys who are on time . he is the only one of the students who has been a winner .
7.定语从句的时态。根据从句的主语和时间状语来确定。
相关资料
更多